Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850
Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver
on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, fuser unit, damp
heater and areas around them.
Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, IH control circuit,
developer, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched
since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is
turned OFF.
Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser
optical unit).
Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.
Use designated jigs and tools.
Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.
Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
5) Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs
- Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se dbarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs uss y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung des gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
CONTENTS
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850
Specifications....................................................................................................................... 1-1
Accessories ......................................................................................................................... 1-8
Options ................................................................................................................................ 1-9
Supplies ............................................................................................................................. 1-10
System List ........................................................................................................................ 1-11
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 CONTENTS
1
05/05
2
05/05
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 CONTENTS
3
05/06
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 CONTENTS
4
05/11
1.
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/
SUPPLIES
1
2.
3.
ADJUSTMENT
3
4.
5.
TROUBLESHOOTING
5
6.
FIRMWARE UPDATING
6
7.
8.
REMOTE SERVICE
8
9.
05/11
1.
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1.1
Specifications
Accepted originals........................
Sheet, book and 3-dimensional object. The reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) only
accepts paper which are not pasted or stapled. (Single-sided originals: 50 to 127 g/m / 13 to 34 lb.
Bond, Double-sided originals: 50 to 105 g/m / 13 to 28 lb. Bond) Carbon paper are not acceptable
either. Maximum size: A3/LD
e-STUDIO520
Paper size
A4, B5,
A5-R, LT,
ST-R
A4-R,
B5-R, LT-R
B4, FOLIO,
LG,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
1st
52
Drawer
3rd
2nd
(*1)
52
52
4th
(*1)
52
Tandem
LCF(*2)
52
Bypass feed
Size
Size not
specified
specified
45
28
Option
LCF(*3)
52
52
52
52
52
52
45
28
52
42
42
42
42
37
28
42
42
42
42
37
28
37
37
37
37
32
28
37
37
37
37
32
28
33
33
33
33
28
28
31
31
31
31
28
28
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-1
e-STUDIO600
Paper size
A4, B5,
A5-R, LT,
ST-R
A4-R,
B5-R, LT-R
B4, FOLIO,
LG,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
1st
60
Drawer
3rd
2nd
(*1)
60
60
4th
(*1)
60
Tandem
LCF(*2)
60
Bypass feed
Size
Size not
specified
specified
46
30
Option
LCF(*3)
60
60
60
60
60
60
46
30
60
46
46
46
46
38
30
46
46
46
46
38
30
41
41
41
41
34
30
38
38
38
38
34
30
36
36
36
36
30
30
32
32
32
32
30
30
Drawer
3rd
2nd
(*1)
72
72
4th
(*1)
72
e-STUDIO720
Paper size
A4, B5,
A5-R, LT,
ST-R
A4-R,
B5-R, LT-R
B4, FOLIO,
LG,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
1st
72
Tandem
LCF(*2)
72
Bypass feed
Size
Size not
specified
specified
46
30
Option
LCF(*3)
72
72
72
72
72
72
46
30
72
52
52
52
52
38
30
50
50
50
50
38
30
44
44
44
44
34
30
41
41
41
41
34
30
37
37
37
37
30
30
34
34
34
34
30
30
Drawer
3rd
2nd
(*1)
85
85
4th
(*1)
85
e-STUDIO850
Paper size
A4, B5,
A5-R, LT,
ST-R
A4-R,
B5-R, LT-R
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
1st
85
Tandem
LCF(*2)
85
Bypass feed
Size
Size not
specified
specified
50
34
Option
LCF(*3)
85
85
85
85
85
85
50
34
85
61
61
61
61
42
34
56
56
56
56
42
34
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-2
Paper size
B4, FOLIO,
LG,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
1st
52
Drawer
3rd
2nd
(*1)
52
52
4th
(*1)
52
Tandem
LCF(*2)
-
Bypass feed
Size
Size not
specified
specified
38
34
Option
LCF(*3)
-
45
45
45
45
38
34
43
43
43
43
34
34
37
37
37
37
34
34
*1 : The 3rd drawer and 4th drawer are standard equipments for NAD, SAD and TWD (e-STUDIO600/
720) versions.
*2 : The Tandem LCF is a standard equipment for ASD, ASU, AUD, MJD, CND, TWD (e-STUDIO850)
and KRD versions. Only A4/LT can be used for the Tandem LCF.
*3 : Only A4, B5 and LT can be used for the Option LCF.
*
*
*
*
*
Each copy speed has been measured in the Continuous Copy Mode, using single-sided originals
placed on the original glass manually.
Accuracy: Within 2 sheets (Bypass feed) / Within 1 sheet (Other paper sources)
A hyphen ("-") indicates that the combination is invalid for the subject paper source.
Values may vary depending on its use condition and environment.
When the RADF is used, each copy speed per minute of e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 has reached
52/60/72/85 sheets. These copy speeds can be realized only in the following conditions.
Original: A4/LT / 1 sheet
Copy mode: A4/LT / Plain paper / Automatic Paper Selection - OFF / Automatic Copy Density OFF
Number of copy set: 52 or more / 60 or more / 72 or more / 85 or more
Reproduction ratio: 100%
A4-R, B5-R,
LT-R
B4, FOLIO,
LG,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
*
*
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
e-STUDIO520
52
e-STUDIO600
60
e-STUDIO720
72
e-STUDIO850
85
52
60
72
85
42
46
52
61
42
46
50
56
37
41
44
52
37
38
41
45
33
36
37
43
31
32
34
37
Thick 1 (Paper weight: From over 80 g/m (21.3 lb. Bond) to 105 g/m (28 lb. Bond))
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-3
e-STUDIO520
Yes
No
45
28
e-STUDIO600
Yes
No
46
30
e-STUDIO720
Yes
No
46
30
e-STUDIO850
Yes
No
50
34
45
28
46
30
46
30
50
34
37
28
38
30
38
30
42
34
37
28
38
30
38
30
42
34
32
28
34
30
34
30
38
34
32
28
34
30
34
30
38
34
28
28
30
30
30
30
34
34
28
28
30
30
30
30
34
34
Thick 2 (Paper weight: From over 105 g/m (28 lb. Bond) to 163 g/m (90 lb. Index))
Paper source: Drawers / Tandem LCF / Option LCF
A4, B5, A5-R,
LT, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R,
LT-R
B4, FOLIO,
LG,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
*
*
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
e-STUDIO520
52
e-STUDIO600
60
e-STUDIO720
72
e-STUDIO850
85
52
60
72
85
42
46
52
61
42
46
50
56
37
41
44
52
37
38
41
45
33
36
37
43
31
32
34
37
Thick 2 (Paper weight: From over 105 g/m (28 lb. Bond) to 163 g/m (90 lb. Index))
Paper source: Bypass feed
Size specified
A4, B5, A5-R, Top side
LT, ST-R
discharging
Back side
discharging
A4-R, B5-R,
Top side
LT-R
discharging
Back side
discharging
e-STUDIO520
Yes
No
45
28
e-STUDIO600
Yes
No
46
30
e-STUDIO720
Yes
No
46
30
e-STUDIO850
Yes
No
50
34
45
28
46
30
46
30
50
34
37
28
38
30
38
30
42
34
37
28
38
30
38
30
42
34
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-4
Size specified
B4, FOLIO,
Top side
LG,
discharging
COMPUTER Back side
discharging
A3, LD
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
e-STUDIO520
Yes
No
32
28
e-STUDIO600
Yes
No
34
30
e-STUDIO720
Yes
No
34
30
e-STUDIO850
Yes
No
38
34
32
28
34
30
34
30
38
34
28
28
30
30
30
30
34
34
28
28
30
30
30
30
34
34
Thick 3 (Paper weight: From over 163 g/m (90 lb. Bond) to 209 g/m (115.7 lb. Index))
Paper source: Drawers / Tandem LCF / Option LCF
A4, B5, A5-R,
LT, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R,
LT-R
B4, FOLIO,
LG,
COMPUTER
A3, LD
*
*
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
e-STUDIO520
52
e-STUDIO600
60
e-STUDIO720
65
e-STUDIO850
72
52
60
65
72
42
46
80
52
42
46
48
50
37
41
43
44
37
38
40
41
33
36
37
37
31
32
34
34
Thick 3 (Paper weight: From over 163 g/m (90 lb. Bond) to 209 g/m (115.7 lb. Index))
Paper source: Bypass feed
Size specified
A4, B5, A5-R, Top side
discharging
LT, ST-R
Back side
discharging
A4-R, B5-R,
Top side
LT-R
discharging
Back side
discharging
Top side
B4, FOLIO,
discharging
LG,
COMPUTER Back side
discharging
A3, LD
Top side
discharging
Back side
discharging
e-STUDIO520
Yes
No
45
28
e-STUDIO600
Yes
No
46
30
e-STUDIO720
Yes
No
46
30
e-STUDIO850
Yes
No
46
30
45
28
46
30
46
30
46
30
37
28
38
30
38
30
38
30
37
28
38
30
38
30
38
30
32
28
34
30
34
30
34
30
32
28
34
30
34
30
34
30
28
28
30
30
30
30
30
30
28
28
30
30
30
30
30
30
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-5
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
e-STUDIO520
20.17
43.13
65.20
23.79
46.44
69.30
41.18
87.04
132.36
37.00
82.38
128.19
Sec.
e-STUDIO600
e-STUDIO720
18.11
17.20
38.30
32.95
57.72
49.56
21.83
20.56
41.78
37.03
62.37
54.52
35.14
35.57
75.26
68.23
101.34
114.96
30.88
31.28
63.86
70.87
97.23
110.63
e-STUDIO850
14.89
29.86
43.93
18.63
32.59
46.65
33.96
61.79
89.88
30.54
58.79
86.92
*
*
*
The system copy speed, including scanning time, is available when 10 sheets of A4/LT size original
are set on RADF and one of the copy modes in the above table is selected. The period of time from
pressing [START] to the paper exit completely out of the equipment based on the actually measured
value.
1st drawer is selected and copying is at the sort mode.
Finisher, hole punch unit and inserter are installed.
Automatic copy density, APS/AMS are turned off.
Copy paper
Duplex
copy
A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R,
FOLIO, COMPUTER, 13"LG,
8.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Drawer
Size
Weight
Special paper
Tandem
LCF
A4, LT
Bypass copy
Remarks
These special
papers recommended by
Toshiba Tec
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-6
Eliminated portion .........Leading edges: 3.02.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.02.0 mm (copy)
Leading / trailing edges: 5.02.0 mm, Side edges: 5.02.0 mm (print)
Paper feeding ...............Drawers:
2 drawers + Tandem LCF or 4 drawers (Depends on versions)
- Drawer: Stack height 55 mm, equivalent to 500 sheets; 80 g/m
(22 lb. Bond)
- Tandem LCF: Stack height 137 mm x 2, equivalent to 2500 sheets; 80 g/m
(22 lb. Bond)
Bypass feeding: Bypass tray
Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 80 g/m (22 lb. Bond)
Option LCF: MP-4004
Stack height 428 mm: equivalent to 4000 sheets; 80 g/m (22 lb. Bond)
Capacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder
........................................A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R:
Stack height 16 mm or less / 100 sheets; 80 g/m (22lb. Bond)
Automatic duplexer .......Stackless, Switchback type
Toner supply .................Automatic toner density detection/supply
Toner cartridge replacing method
(There is a recycle toner supplying mechanism.)
Density control ..............Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11 steps
Weight...........................Approximately 210 kg (463 lb.): NAD, TWD, SAD
Approximately 204 kg (450 lb.): ASD, ASU, AUD, MJD, CND, KRD
Power requirements......AC 115 V / 16 A, 127 V / 16 A, 220 V or 220-240 V / 9 A (50/60 Hz)
* The acceptable value of each voltage is 10%
Power consumption ......2.0 kW or less
* The electric power is supplied to the options through the equipment.
* 1.5 kW or less: TWD version of e-STUDIO520/600/720 only
Dimensions of the equipment ........... See the figure below (W 698 x D 789 x H 1213 (mm))
12 1 3 mm
6 98 mm
789 mm
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-7
1.2
Accessories
Unpacking/setup instruction
Operator's manual
CD-ROM
Drum
Toner bag (Installed inside of the equipment)
Operator's manual pocket
Original feeding tray spacer
Tab paper end guide
Cleaning cloth
Cloth case
Power cable
Setup report
Customer satisfaction card
Approval sheet
Envelope
Packing list
Label
1 pc.
1 pc. (not available for MJD, ASU, KRD)
4 pcs
1 pc.
1 pc.
1 pc.
1 pc.
1 pc.
1 pc.
1 pc.
1 pc. (for TWD, ASD, ASU, AUD, MJD, CND,
KRD)
1 set (for NAD, ASU, MJD)
1 pc. (for ASU, MJD, KRD)
1 pc. (for CND)
1 pc. (for CND)
1 pc. (for CND)
2 pc. (for MJD)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-8
1.3
Options
*
*
*
*
*
MP-4004L/A
MJ-1027
MJ-1028
STAPLE-700
STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitch)
KN-1017
MJ-6003N/E/F/S
MJ-7001
MF-6000U/E
GD-1170NA/EU/AU
GM-1050
GM-2040
GM-4010
GN-1040/1041
GN-2010
GN-3010
GP-1040
GP-1060
GO-1050
GF-1140
The finisher (MJ-1027/1028) is necessary for the installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6003N/E/F/
S) and the inserter (MJ-7001).
The PCI slot (GO-1050) is necessary for the installation of the scrambler board (GP-1040), the parallel interface kit (GF-1140) and the fax board (GD-1170NA/EU/AU).
The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041) and the
bluetooth module (GN-2010).
Up to 2 antennas (GN-3010) can be connected to the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041).
When the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041) and the bluetooth module (GN-2010) are installed
together, only 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to each.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-9
05/11
1.4
Supplies
Drum
Developer
Toner
Toner bag
OD-6510
D-6000
PS-ZT6000D (for other)
PS-ZT6000E (for MJD)
PS-ZT6000 (for NAD)
PS-TB6510E (for MJD)
PS-TB6510 (for other)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1 - 10
Staple cartridge
STAPLE-600
Finisher
guide rail
KN-1017
Staple cartridge
STAPLE-700
Saddle stitch
finisher
MJ-1028
Finisher
MJ-1027
1 - 11
05/11
Parallel interface
kit
GF-1140
FAX board
GP-1170
Scrambler
board
GP-1040
PCI slot
GO-1050
Inserter
MJ-7001
Damp heater
MF-6000U/E
Wireless LAN
modude
GN-1040/1041
Bluetooth
modude
GN-2010
Antena
GN-3010
LCF
MP-4004L/A
Data
overwrite kit
GP-1060
Scanner kit
GM-4010
Printer/
Scanner kit
GM-2040
Printer kit
GM-1050
1.5
System List
1
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1 - 12
2.
2.1
The following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen when the CLEAR PAPER or
CALL SERVICE symbol is blinking.
2.1.1
Jam
Error code
E010
Classification
Paper exit jam
Contents
Paper not reaching fuser transport sensor: Paper
which has passed the fuser unit does not reach the
fuser transport sensor.
Troubleshooting
Ch.5.1.1
Paper stopping at fuser transport sensor: The trailing edge of paper does not pass the fuser transport
sensor after its leading edge has reached the fuser
transport sensor.
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
E061
Ch.5.1.1
E062
Ch.5.1.1
E064
Ch.5.1.1
E065
Ch.5.1.1
E090
Ch.5.1.1
E020
E030
E063
E110
Paper misfeeding
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.2
E120
Ch.5.1.2
E130
Ch.5.1.2
E140
Ch.5.1.2
2-1
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
Ch.5.1.2
E180
Ch.5.1.2
E190
Ch.5.1.2
1st drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st
drawer transport sensor does not reach the registration sensor during the feeding at the 1st drawer.
Ch.5.1.1
E201
1st drawer transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor): Paper which has passed
the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the
intermediate transport sensor during the feeding at
the 1st drawer.
Ch.5.1.1
E210
2nd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st
drawer transport sensor does not reach the registration sensor during the feeding at the 2nd drawer.
Ch.5.1.1
E211
2nd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor): Paper which has passed
the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the
intermediate transport sensor during the feeding at
the 2nd drawer.
Ch.5.1.1
E220
Ch.5.1.1
E230
Ch.5.1.1
E240
Ch.5.1.1
E250
Ch.5.1.1
E260
Option LCF transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st
drawer transport sensor does not reach the registration sensor during the feeding at the Option LCF.
Ch.5.1.1
E150
Classification
Paper misfeeding
E160
E200
2-2
Ch.5.1.2
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
Option LCF transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor): Paper which has passed
the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the
intermediate transport sensor during the feeding at
the Option LCF.
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
E300
3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st
drawer transport sensor does not reach the registration sensor during the feeding at the 3rd drawer.
Ch.5.1.1
E301
3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor): Paper which has passed
the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the
intermediate transport sensor during the feeding at
the 3rd drawer.
Ch.5.1.1
E310
Ch.5.1.1
E320
Ch.5.1.1
E350
Ch.5.1.1
E360
Ch.5.1.1
E370
Ch.5.1.1
E261
Classification
Paper transport jam
E2A1
E330
E331
E340
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
2-3
Error code
E380
Classification
Troubleshooting
Ch.5.1.1
E3C0
Tandem LCF transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st
transport sensor does not reach the registration
sensor during the feeding at the Tandem LCF.
Ch.5.1.1
E3C1
Ch.5.1.1
E3D0
Ch.5.1.1
E3E0
Ch.5.1.1
E3F0
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.3
Ch.5.1.3
E410
E440
E450
Contents
Ch.5.1.3
E460
Ch.5.1.3
E470
Ch.5.1.3
2-4
Error code
E510
Classification
Paper transport jam
(Exit/Reverse section
or other sections)
E511
E512
Contents
Troubleshooting
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
2
Ch.5.1.1
E540
Ch.5.1.1
E550
Ch.5.1.1
E570
Ch.5.1.1
E580
Ch.5.1.1
E590
Ch.5.1.1
E5A0
Ch.5.1.1
Original not reaching original length detection sensor: An original fed out of the original feeding tray
does not reach the original length detection sensor.
Ch.5.1.4
E712
Original not reaching registration sensor: An original fed out of the original feeding tray does not
reach the original registration sensor.
Ch.5.1.4
E713
Original stopping at original length detection sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass
the original length detection sensor after its leading
edge has reached the original length detection sensor.
Ch.5.1.4
E714
Ch.5.1.4
E715
Ch.5.1.4
E716
Ch.5.1.4
E711
RADF jam
2-5
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
Ch.5.1.4
E722
Original not reaching large original exit sensor (during scanning): An original which has passed the
read sensor does not reach the large original exit
sensor when this original is transported from the
scanning section to the exit section.
Ch.5.1.4
E723
Ch.5.1.4
E724
Ch.5.1.4
E725
Ch.5.1.4
E726
Ch.5.1.4
E728
Original not reaching small original exit sensor (during scanning): An original which has passed the
read sensor does not reach the small original exit
sensor when this original is transported from the
scanning section to the exit section.
Ch.5.1.4
E731
Ch.5.1.4
E732
Ch.5.1.4
E733
Ch.5.1.4
E741
Ch.5.1.4
E742
Ch.5.1.4
E743
Original not reaching small original exit sensor (during reverse feeding): An original which has passed
the small original reverse sensor does not reach the
small original exit sensor when this original is exited
out of the reverse section.
Ch.5.1.4
E751
Ch.5.1.4
E721
Classification
RADF jam
2-6
Error code
E752
Classification
RADF jam
E761
E762
Contents
Troubleshooting
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
E763
Ch.5.1.4
E764
Ch.5.1.4
E765
Ch.5.1.4
E766
Ch.5.1.4
E767
Ch.5.1.4
E768
Ch.5.1.4
E800
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
E860
E870
Ch.5.1.4
E9F0
Finisher jam
(Puncher section)
Ch.5.1.5 [ 1 ]
EA10
Finisher jam
(Finisher section)
Ch.5.1.5 [ 2 ]
EA30
Power-ON jam: Paper is remaining at the inlet sensor when the power is turned ON.
Ch.5.1.5 [ 2 ]
EA40
Ch.5.1.5 [ 2 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 2 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 5 ]
EA20
EA50
EA60
EA80
Finisher jam
(Saddle Stitcher section)
EA90
EAA0
EAB0
EAC0
EAD0
Ch.5.1.5 [ 2 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 2 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 3 ]
2-7
Error code
EAE0
Classification
Finisher jam
EB30
EB50
EB60
EC00
Finisher jam
(Inserter section)
Contents
Troubleshooting
Ch.5.1.5 [ 5 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 5 ]
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
EC10
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
EC20
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
EC30
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
EC40
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
EC50
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
EC60
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
EC70
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
EC80
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
EC90
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
ECA0
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
ECB0
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
ECC0
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
ECD0
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
2-8
2.1.2
Service call
Error code
Classification
C130
Paper feeding system related service call
C140
C150
C160
C180
C1A0
C1C0
C260
Scanning system
related service call
C270
C280
C360
Process related
service call
C370
Contents
Troubleshooting
Ch.5.1.6
1st drawer tray abnormality: The tray-up motor-1 does
not run normally or the 1st drawer tray does not move
normally.
(Feeding of any other drawer than the 1st drawer is possible.)
Ch.5.1.6
2nd drawer tray abnormality: The tray-up motor-1 does
not run normally or the 2nd drawer tray does not move
normally.
(Feeding of any other drawer than the 2nd drawer is possible.)
Ch.5.1.6
3rd drawer tray abnormality: The tray-up motor-2 does
not run normally or the 3rd drawer tray does not move
normally.
(Feeding of any other drawer than the 3rd drawer is possible.)
Ch.5.1.6
4th drawer tray abnormality: The tray-up motor-2 does
not run normally or the 4th drawer tray does not move
normally.
(Feeding of any other drawer than the 4th drawer is possible.)
Ch.5.1.6
Tandem LCF tray-up motor abnormality: The Tandem
LCF tray-up motor does not run normally or the Tandem
LCF tray does not move normally.
(Feeding of any other drawer than the Tandem LCF is
possible.)
Tandem LCF end fence motor abnormality: The Tandem
Ch.5.1.6
LCF end fence motor does not run normally or the Tandem LCF end fence does not move normally.
(Feeding of any other drawer than the Tandem LCF is
possible.)
Ch.5.1.6
Option LCF tray-up motor abnormality: The Option LCF
tray-up motor does not run normally or the Option LCF
tray does not move normally.
(Feeding of any other drawer than the Option LCF is possible.)
Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp
Ch.5.1.7
(white reference) is not detected when the power is
turned ON.
Ch.5.1.7
Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a
specified period of time: The carriages do not shift from
their home position within a specified period of time.
Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a
Ch.5.1.7
specified period of time: The carriages do not reach their
home position within a specified period of time.
Ch.5.1.13
Wire cleaner drive motor abnormality: The wire cleaner
drive motor does not run normally or the charger wire
cleaner does not move normally.
Transfer belt cam motor abnormality: The transfer belt
Ch.5.1.13
cam motor does not run normally when the power is
turned ON or the copying is started.
2-9
Error code
Classification
C411
Fuser unit related
service call
C412
C443
C445
C446
C447
C449
C465
C466
C467
C468
C471
C472
C473
C474
C475
C480
C481
C490
C4A0
C4B0
C550
C560
C570
C580
C590
Contents
Troubleshooting
Thermistor/heater abnormality at power-ON: Thermistor
Ch.5.1.8
abnormality is detected at power-ON or the fuser roller
temperature does not rise within a specified period of
time after power-ON.
Ch.5.1.8
Thermistor/heater abnormality at power-ON: Thermistor
abnormality is detected at power-ON or the fuser roller
temperature does not rise within a specified period of
time after power-ON.
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment (not
Ch.5.1.8
reaching to intermediate temperature)
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment (pre-runCh.5.1.8
ning end temperature abnormality)
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment (pre-runCh.5.1.8
ning end temperature abnormality)
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment (temperaCh.5.1.8
ture abnormality at ready status)
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment (overheatCh.5.1.8
ing)
Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering
Ch.5.1.8
ready status (pre-running end temperature abnormality)
Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering
Ch.5.1.8
ready status (pre-running end temperature abnormality)
Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering
Ch.5.1.8
ready status (temperature abnormality at ready status)
Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering
Ch.5.1.8
ready status (overheating)
IH power voltage abnormality or IH initial abnormality
Ch.5.1.8
(IH board initial abnormality)
IH power voltage abnormality (power supply abnormality)
Ch.5.1.8
IH power voltage abnormality (power voltage upper limit
Ch.5.1.8
abnormality)
IH power voltage abnormality (power voltage lower limit
Ch.5.1.8
abnormality)
IH power voltage abnormality (power supply abnormality
Ch.5.1.8
when door is opened)
IH abnormality
Ch.5.1.8
IGBT abnormality
Ch.5.1.8
IH control circuit abnormality or IH coil abnormality: The
Ch.5.1.8
IH control circuit is under abnormal conditions, or the IH
coil is broken or has a short-circuit.
End of cleaning web
Ch.5.1.8
Fuser unit counter abnormality
Ch.5.1.8
RADF interface error: Communication error has occurred
Ch.5.1.9
between the RADF and the scanner.
Communication error between Engine-CPU and PFC
Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC
board
Communication error between IPC board and Finisher
Communication error between Engine-CPU and LaserCPU
2 - 10
Ch.5.1.9
Ch.5.1.9
Ch.5.1.9
Ch.5.1.9
Error code
Classification
C730
RADF related service call
C820
C830
C840
C850
C860
C870
C940
C970
CA10
CA20
CA30
CA41
CA42
CA43
CA44
CA50
CA90
CAA0
CAB0
CAC0
CAF0
Contents
Troubleshooting
EEPROM error: EEPROM cannot be initialized normally
Ch.5.1.10
when the code 05-352 is performed or the data cannot be
read out of the EEPROM when the power is turned ON.
Read sensor adjustment error: The read sensor cannot
Ch.5.1.10
be adjusted normally when the code 05-356 is performed.
Ch.5.1.10
Original length detection sensor adjustment error: The
original length detection sensor cannot be adjusted normally when the code 05-356 is performed.
Ch.5.1.10
Small original reverse sensor adjustment error: The small
original reverse sensor cannot be adjusted normally
when the code 05-356 is performed.
Tray lift motor abnormality
Ch.5.1.10
Large original exit sensor adjustment error: The large
Ch.5.1.10
original exit sensor cannot be adjusted normally when the
code 05-356 is performed.
Temperature detection error
Ch.5.1.10
Engine-CPU abnormality
Ch.5.1.13
High-voltage transformer leakage abnormality: The highvoltage leakage of the main charger is detected.
Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor does
not run normally.
H-sync detection error: Laser beam cannot be detected
at the SNS board.
Secondary scanning coarse adjustment error
[e-STUDIO850]
Window comparator abnormality (error during secondary
scanning control)
[e-STUDIO850
Sensor signal busy error (error during secondary scanning control)
[e-STUDIO850]
Comparator abnormality
[e-STUDIO850]
Beam sensor detection error
[e-STUDIO850]
Laser power adjustment error
[e-STUDIO850]
Image data transmission error of SYS board: Communication error has occurred between the PLG board and
the SYS board.
[e-STUDIO850]
Secondary scanning fine adjustment error: Secondary
scanning control by the galvanometer mirror does not
end normally.
[e-STUDIO850]
Inter-page correction error of secondary scanning: Interpage secondary scanning control by the galvanometer
mirror does not end normally.
[e-STUDIO850]
Primary scanning dot adjustment error: Primary scanning
control does not end normally.
[e-STUDIO850]
Inter-page correction error of primary scanning: Interpage primary scanning control does not end normally.
[e-STUDIO850]
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11
2 - 11
Error code
Classification
CB10
Finisher related
service call
CB20
CB30
CB40
CB50
CB60
CB70
CB80
CB90
CBA0
CBB0
CBC0
CBD0
CBE0
CBF0
CC00
CC10
CC20
CC40
Contents
Troubleshooting
Feed motor abnormality: The feed motor does not run
Ch.5.1.12
normally or the stack feed roller does not move normally.
Delivery motor abnormality: The delivery motor does not
Ch.5.1.12
run normally or the delivery roller does not move normally.
Tray lift motor abnormality
Ch.5.1.12
Ch.5.1.12
Alignment motor (rear) abnormality: The alignment motor
(rear) does not run normally or the alignment plate does
not move normally.
Staple motor abnormality: The staple motor does not run
Ch.5.1.12
normally or the stapler does not move normally.
Stapler shift motor abnormality: The stapler shift motor
Ch.5.1.12
does not run normally or the Staple Unit does not move
normally.
Stack amount detection sensor abnormality
Ch.5.1.12
Ch.5.1.12
Backup RAM data abnormality:
1) Abnormality of checksum value on the finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is turned
ON.
2) Abnormality of checksum value on the punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned
ON.
Ch.5.1.12
Paper pushing plate motor abnormality: The paper pushing plate motor does not run normally or the paper pushing plate does not move normally.
Ch.5.1.12
Stitch motor (front) abnormality: The stitch motor (front)
does not run normally or the rotational cam does not
move normally.
Stitch motor (rear) abnormality: The stitch motor (rear)
Ch.5.1.12
does not run normally or the rotational cam does not
move normally.
Ch.5.1.12
Alignment motor abnormality: The alignment motor does
not run normally or the alignment plate does not move
normally.
Guide motor abnormality: The guide motor does not run
Ch.5.1.12
normally or the guide does not move normally.
Paper folding motor abnormality: The paper folding motor
Ch.5.1.12
does not run normally or the paper folding roller does not
move normally.
Ch.5.1.12
Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: The paper
positioning plate motor does not run normally or the
paper positioning plate does not move normally.
Sensor connector abnormality: Disconnection of each
Ch.5.1.12
connector of the guide home position sensor, paper pushing plate home position sensor and paper pushing plate
leading position sensor is detected.
Ch.5.1.12
Microswitch abnormality: Any of the inlet door switch,
delivery door switch and front cover closing detection
switch is opened while all the covers are closed.
Ch.5.1.12
Communication error between Finisher and Saddle Stitch
section: Communication error has occurred between the
finisher controller PC board and the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
Swing motor abnormality: The swing motor does not run
Ch.5.1.12
normally or the swing unit does not move normally.
2 - 12
Error code
Classification
CC50
Finisher related
service call
CC60
CCC1
CCD1
CCE1
CD00
CD10
CD20
CD30
CD40
CD50
CE50
CE90
CF70
Process related
service call
CF80
F070
F090
F091
F092
F100
Communication
related service call
Other service call
F101
F102
F103
F104
F105
F106
F107
F108
F110
F111
F120
F130
F200
Communication
related service call
Other service call
Contents
Horizontal registration motor abnormality: The horizontal
registration motor does not run normally or the puncher
does not move normally.
Punch motor abnormality: The punch motor does not run
normally or the puncher does not move normally.
Communication error between Inserter Unit and Finisher
Inserter EEPROM abnormality
Inserter fan motor abnormality
Laser initialization time-out: Laser control does not end
within the initialization period.
[e-STUDIO850]
Cleaning brush drive motor abnormality: The cleaning
brush drive motor does not run normally when the power
is turned ON or the copying is started.
Used toner transport motor abnormality: The used toner
transport motor does not run normally when the power is
turned ON or the copying is started.
Recycle toner transport motor abnormality: The recycle
toner transport motor does not run normally when the
power is turned ON or the copying is started.
Toner bag full
Web motor signal path abnormality
Troubleshooting
Ch.5.1.12
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.12
Ch.5.1.12
Ch.5.1.12
Ch.5.1.12
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.8
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.9
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.9
Ch.5.1.9
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
Ch.5.1.13
2 - 13
05/11
2.1.3
Contents
Troubleshooting
1C10
1C11
Insufficient memory
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C12
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C13
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C14
Invalid parameter
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C15
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C20
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C21
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C22
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C30
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C31
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C32
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C33
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C40
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C60
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C61
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C62
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C63
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C64
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C65
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C66
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C69
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C6A
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C6B
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C6C
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C6D
System error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C70
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C71
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C72
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C80
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C81
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1C82
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
1CC0
Job canceling
1CC1
Power failure
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
2 - 14
05/05
Contents
Troubleshooting
2500
Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ]
2501
Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ]
2503
Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ]
2504
Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ]
2550
Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ]
2551
Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ]
2552
Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ]
2553
Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ]
2 - 15
2B10
Contents
Troubleshooting
2B11
2B20
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
2B30
2B31
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
2B32
2B50
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
2B51
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
2B71
2B90
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
2BA0
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
2BB0
Job canceled
Job canceling
2B80
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
2BB1
Power failure
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
2BC0
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
2BC1
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
2BD0
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
2BE0
2BF0
2BF1
2BF2
2 - 16
Contents
Troubleshooting
2C10
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C11
Insufficient memory
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C12
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C13
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C14
Invalid parameter
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C15
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C20
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C21
2C22
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C30
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C31
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C32
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C33
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C40
2C60
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C61
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C62
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C63
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C64
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C65
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C66
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C69
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C6A
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C6B
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
System error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C6C
2C6D
2C70
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C71
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C72
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C80
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2CC0
Job canceling
2CC1
Power failure
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2C81
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
2 - 17
05/05
Contents
Troubleshooting
2D10
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D11
Insufficient memory
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D12
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D13
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D14
Invalid parameter
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D15
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D20
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D21
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D22
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D30
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D31
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D32
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D33
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D40
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D60
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D61
Invalid parameter
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D62
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D63
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D64
Login failure
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D65
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2D66
Failed to process your Job. Insuf- HDD full failure during processing
ficient disk space.
FTP service is not available
FTP service not available
2D67
2D68
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2DA1
2DA2
2DA4
2DA5
2DA6
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2DA7
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2DA0
2DA3
2 - 18
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
2DC0
Job canceling
2DC1
Power failure
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
2 - 19
Contents
E-mail MIME error
Troubleshooting
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3A12
3A20
3A21
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3A22
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3A30
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3A40
3A50
3A51
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3A52
3A60
3A61
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3A62
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3A70
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
2 - 20
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
3A80
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3A81
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3A82
3B10
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3B20
Content-Type error
3B21
3B11
3B12
3B22
3B30
3B31
3B32
3B40
3B41
3B42
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Charset error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
2 - 21
Error code
3C10
3C11
3C12
3C13
3C20
Contents
TIFF analysis error
Troubleshooting
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
TIFF compression error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3C21
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3C22
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3C30
3C31
3C32
3C40
3C41
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3C42
3C50
3C51
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3C52
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
2 - 22
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Error code
3C60
3C61
3C62
3C70
Contents
Offramp security error
Troubleshooting
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3D20
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3D30
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3E10
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3E20
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3E30
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3E40
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3D10
3F00
3F10
3F20
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3F30
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
3F40
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
2 - 23
2.1.4
Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen
(when GM-1050/4010 or 2040 is installed)
Error code
4030
Contents
Troubleshooting
No printer kit / Invalid: When the printer kit or printer/scanner kit is not
installed, network print is performed after the trial period.
HDD full during print: Large quantity image data by private print or invalid
network print are saved in HDD.
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be performed.
Printing data storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the
HDD temporarily (Proof print, Private print, Scheduled print, etc.) cannot be
performed.
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
4034
e-Filing storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD
(print and e-Filing, print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be performed.
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
4035
Local file storing limitation error: Network FAX or Internet FAX cannot be sent
when "Local" is selected for the destination of the file to save.
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
4036
User authentication error: The user who intended to print a document is not
registered as a user.
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
A221
Print job cancellation: Print job (copy, list print, network print) is deleted from
the print job screen.
Print job power failure: The power of the equipment is turned OFF during
print job (copy, list print, network print).
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Limit over error: The numbers of output pages have exceeded those specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same time.
Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the user code.
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
4031
4032
4033
A222
A290
A291
A292
Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the department code.
2 - 24
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
<<Error history>>
In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed.
Display example
EA10
99999999
05 03 10 17 57 32
064
064
23621000000
Error code
Total counter YY MM DD HH MM SS
MMM
NNN
ABCDEFHIJLO
4 digits
8 digits
12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits
3 digits
11 digits
with its last two digits.)
A
Paper source
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: Tandem LCF 3: 1st drawer 4: 2nd drawer 5: 3rd drawer 6: 4th drawer
7: Option LCF 8: Inserter
ADF mode
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
APS/AMS mode
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS
Duplex mode
0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying
8: Single-sided/Duplex copying
Unused
Image shift
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right
Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive Reversal
Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
Unused
Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission
3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print
6: Scan/E-mail transmission
MMM
NNN
Mode
0: Unused 1: Unused 2: Black 3: Unused 4: Unused 5: Gray scale
2 - 25
2.2
Self-diagnosis Modes
Mode
Control panel
check mode
For start
[0]+[1]+
[POWER]
Contents
All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all the
LCD pixels blink.
For exit
[POWER]
OFF/ON
Display
-
Test mode
[0]+[3]+
[POWER]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% C A4
TEST MODE
Test print
mode
[0]+[4]+
[POWER]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% P A4
TEST PRINT
Adjustment
mode
[0]+[5]+
[POWER]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% A A4
TEST MODE
Setting mode
[0]+[8]+
[POWER]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% D
TEST MOD
[9]+[START]
+[POWER]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% UA A4
LIST PRINT
PM support
mode
[6]+[START]
+[POWER]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% K
TEST MODE
Firmware
update mode
[8]+[9]+
[POWER]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
Note:
To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode
(e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously.
To exit from Self-diagnosis modes:
Shut down the equipment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds except for
the control panel check mode and the firmware update mode.
<Operation procedure>
Control panel check mode (01):
[0][1]
[POWER]
LED lit/
LCD blinking
[START]
(Button check)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[START]
Notes:
1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking.
2. Button Check
Buttons with LED
(Press to turn OFF the LED.)
Buttons without LED
(Press to display the message on the control panel.)
Button on touch panel
(Press to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.)
2 - 26
05/06
List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code.
[9][START]
[POWER]
[START]
(Code)
[Digital keys]
101: Adjustment mode (05)
Key in the first
code to be printed
102: Setting mode (08)
[START]
[Digital keys]
Key in the last
code to be printed
[START]
List starts to
be printed
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
(Code)
103: PM support mode
104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
106: Error history (Maximum 1000 items)
107: Error history (Latest 80 items)
(Code)
1: Auto-toner adjustment
2: PM Support Screen
[START]
(Operation started)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Warming up
Control panel
check mode
[0][3]
Test mode
[0][4]
Test print
mode
[0][5]
Adjustment
mode
[0][8]
Setting
mode
[9][START]
List print
mode
[6][START]
PM support
mode
[8][9]
Firmware
update mode
Ready
[POWER]
OFF
*1
To user
Fig.2-1
*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis modes, and leave the equipment to the user.
2 - 27
2.2.1
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, [COPY] button and
the digital keys in the test mode (03).
<Operation procedure>
[0][3]
[POWER]
[START]
[FAX]
or
[COPY]
[Digital keys]
(LCD ON)
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.
2 - 28
[FAX] button: OFF / [COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF / [COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital
key
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Button
Contents
Highlighted display
Normal display
Items to check
e.g.
e.g.
A
B
C
D
E
No paper
No paper
Upper limit position
Bottom position
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
No paper
Drawer present
Cover closed
No paper
No paper
Upper limit position
Bottom position
G
H
A
B
C
No paper
Drawer present
No paper
D
E
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
No paper
Drawer present
No paper
No paper
Upper limit position
Bottom position
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
No paper
Drawer present
Not connected
Unit opened
No paper
Upper limit position
Bottom position
G
H
No paper
Tray opened
No paper
-
No paper
Upper limit position
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
Other than upper
limit position
Other than bottom
position
Paper present
No drawer
Cover opened
Paper present
Paper present
Other than upper
limit position
Other than bottom
position
Paper present
No drawer
Paper present
Paper present
Other than upper
limit position
Other than bottom
position
Paper present
No drawer
Paper present
Paper present
Other than upper
limit position
Other than bottom
position
Paper present
No drawer
Connected
Unit closed
Paper present
Other than upper
limit position
Other than bottom
position
Paper present
Tray closed
2 - 29
Digital
key
Button
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
No paper
Cover closed
Cove opened
Paper present
No paper
No paper
No paper
Connected
Correct stacking
No paper
Bottom position
Home position
Stop position
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Not connected
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
Not connected
Connected
Not connected
Not connected
[8]
[9]
[0]
e.g.
[7]
Items to check
e.g.
A
[6]
Contents
Highlighted display
Normal display
2 - 30
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 0
-
Paper present
Cover opened
Cover closed
No paper
Paper present
Paper present
Paper present
Not connected
Incorrect stacking
Paper present
Other than bottom
position
Other than home
position
Other than stop
position
Connected
No paper
No paper
No paper
Connected
Not connected
Connected
Connected
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper size detection sensor and the paper width
3
0
1
1
1
0
Paper-width size
0
1
1
1
0
1
A3/LD
A4-R/LT-R
A5-R/ST-R
Card size
B4/LG
B5-R
[FAX] button: ON / [COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON / [COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital
key
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Button
Contents
Highlighted display
Normal display
Items to check
e.g.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Exit sensor
Cover interlock switch (front cover (lower))
Toner bag full detection sensor
Fuser exit sensor
Front cover switch (front cover (upper))
Auto-toner sensor
Cleaner unit connection
Wire cleaner position detection switch
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Paper present
Cover opened
Full
No paper
Cover closed
Not connected
Not connected
Stop position
Cover opened
Other than SAD
Other than TWD
Not connected
Not connected
No cartridge
Toner present
Cover closed
End of web
No paper
Other than release
position
Other than contact
position
e.g.
No paper
Cover closed
Not full
Paper present
Cover opened
Connected
Connected
Other than stop
position
Cover closed
SAD
TWD
Connected
Connected
Cartridge present
No drawer
Error
Web remaining
Paper present
Release position
Contact position
2 - 31
Digital
key
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[0]
Button
Contents
Highlighted display
Normal display
Items to check
e.g.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
RADF connection
RADF opening/closing switch
Carriage home position sensor
Connected
RADF opened
Home position
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
Original present
Original present
Cover opened
RADF opened
Original present
Original present
Original present
Original present
Lower limit position
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Original present
Original present
Original present
Original present
Original present
Original present
APS sensor ON
Power OFF
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 1
2 - 32
e.g.
Not connected
RADF closed
Other than home
position
Original present
Original present
Original present
Original present
Original present
No original
No original
Cover closed
RADF closed
No original
No original
No original
No original
Other than lower
limit position
Other than upper
limit position
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
APS sensor OFF
Power ON
Bit 0
Bit 0
Bit 0
Bit 0
Bit 0
Bit 0
Bit 0
Bit 0
[FAX] button: OFF / [COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF / [COPY] LED: ON)
Digital
key
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Button
Contents
Highlighted display
Normal display
Items to check
e.g.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
e.g.
-
Temperature [C]
Humidity [%RH]
Temperature [C]
2 - 33
Digital
key
[9]
[0]
Button
Contents
Highlighted display
Normal display
Items to check
e.g.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
e.g.
Connectable
Connectable
Connectable
Connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
Not connectable
Acceptable
Not acceptable
*1
Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used with
this code.
Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental
recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise this code
cannot be used.
It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB storage device.
2 - 34
05/11
2.2.2
Status of the output signals can be checked by keying in the following codes in the test mode 03.
<Operation procedure>
Procedure 1
2
[0][3]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation
ON
Stop
code
[START]
Operation
OFF
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 2
[0][3]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation
One direction
[CLEAR]
Test mode
standby
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 3
[0][3]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation
ON
[START]
Operation
OFF
[CLEAR]
Test mode
standby
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 4
[0][3]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
[POWER] OFF
2 - 35
Code
Function
Code
101
151
152
103
153
108
Registration motor ON
158
110
160
111
161
112
162
113
Fuser motor ON
163
114
164
115
165
116
166
102
Function
Procedure
118
Laser ON
168
120
170
121
171
122
172
123
Hopper motor ON
173
124
Web motor ON
174
125
Feed motor ON
175
126
176
177
128
178
129
179
131
181
132
182
133
183
134
184
135
185
127
2 - 36
Code
201
202
Function
1st drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
2nd drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
Procedure
3
3
204
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
218
220
221
225
226
228
229
230
231
234
235
236
237
240
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
254
255
Transfer belt cleaning brush bias ON/OFF (operational without developer unit)
257
258
259
260
261
Scan motor ON (automatically stops at limit position; speed can be changed with the
[ZOOM] button)
SLG board cooling fan ON/OFF
264
267
270
271
2 - 37
Code
272
Function
LCF feed clutch ON/OFF
Procedure
3
273
274
276
278
279
280
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
292
293
295
450
451
452
454
2 - 38
2.2.3
The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode
(04).
<Operation procedure>
[0][4]
[POWER]
2
(Code)
[START]
Operation
Continuous
Test Printing
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Notes:
1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not performed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error.
2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when Wait adding toner is displayed.
Code
Remarks
111
Error diffusion
113
142
Grid pattern
182
184
2 - 39
2.2.4
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in
order to enter this mode.
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the
[ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds.
Procedure 1
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)
[CANCEL]
([FAX]
[ENTER]
[POWER]
or
or
OFF/ON
[COPY])
[INTERRUPT]
(Exit)
(Stores value in RAM) (Test copy)
Procedure 2
[0][5]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Value
displayed
([FAX]
[ENTER]
or
or
[COPY])
[INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable) (Test copy)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 3
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
[CANCEL]
[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
([FAX]
[POWER]
or
OFF/ON
[COPY])
(Exit)
(Test copy)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub code)
[START]
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
value
(Stores
in RAM )
([FAX]
or
[COPY])
(Test copy)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
2 - 40
Procedure 6
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
Automatic
adjustment
([FAX]
or
[COPY])
(Test copy)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
Automatic
( adjustment
)
[ENTER]
Stores value
in RAM
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
([FAX]
or
[COPY])
(Test copy)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 10
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
(Sub code)
[START]
[START]
Value
( displayed
)
[START]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[SET] or [INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)
Procedure 17
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
Automatic
adjustment
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
value
( Stores
in RAM )
([FAX]
or
[COPY])
(Test copy)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state.
Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment
mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after
it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
2 - 41
05/05
Remarks
Grid pattern
10
90
91
92
2 - 42
Notes:
The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code.
In RAM, the NVRAM or FRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. M stands for the LGC board and SYS stands for the SYS board.
Code
Classification
RAM
Contents
200
Developer
201
Developer
Correction of auto-toner
sensor
(Fuser heater ON)
ALL
128
<0-255>
205
Developer
ALL
113
<0-255>
210
Charger
ALL
102
<0-255>
Procedure
17
2 - 43
05/05
Code
221
241
Image
quality
control
242
244
247
248
249
251-0
Charger
251-1
253-0
253-1
Development
Contents
ALL
55
<0-99>
ALL
0
<0-2>
ALL
0
<0-999>
ALL
60
<0-100>
ALL
22
<0-100>
ALL
0
<0-999>
ALL
50
<0-255>
ALL
207
<0-255>
Lower limit
ALL
59
<0-255>
Upper limit
ALL
227
<0-255>
Image
quality
control
RAM
Developer
bias calibration reference
value adjustment
2 - 44
05/11
Procedure
3
Code
260
Classification
Image
quality
control
261
262
Image
quality
control
263-0
Image
quality
control
263-1
264-0
Image
quality
control
Laser power
RMS value
display
264-1
265-0
Image
quality
control
265-1
268
269
Image
quality
control
300
<0-999>
ALL
100
<0-999>
1st laser
ALL
Refer to
contents
<0-1500>
2nd laser
ALL
304
<0-1500>
1st laser
ALL
Refer to
contents
<0-1500>
2nd laser
ALL
304
<0-1500>
ALL
0
<0-99>
ALL
0
<0-99>
ALL
0
<0-999>
ALL
0
<0-999>
Development contrast
voltage
correction
Laser
power correction
Drum surface potential
sensor output
(Latest value)
(Low voltage)
Drum surface potential
sensor output
(Latest value)
(High voltage)
Number of
times of
image quality
closed-loop
control correction
Contents
ALL
RMS value
display of
open-loop
control
(Laser power
initial value)
RAM
Procedure
2
10
10
10
10
10
10
2 - 45
Code
270
286-0
Laser
Laser power
adjustment
286-1
RAM
Contents
1st laser
ALL
Refer to
contents
<0-255>
2nd laser
ALL
101
<0-255>
290
Image
quality
control
ALL
291
Image
quality
control
ALL
0
<0-2,4>
292
Image
quality
control
Image quality
sensor output
value display
Light
source off
ALL
0
<0-1023>
Drum surface
ALL
0
<0-1023>
ALL
0
<0-1023>
ALL
0
<0-1023>
ALL
0
<0-255>
293
294
Image
quality
control
295
296
Image
quality
control
2 - 46
05/11
Procedure
2
14
14
Code
Classification
Procedure
RAM
Contents
305
ALL
140
<92-164>
SYS
306
ALL
135
<0-255>
SYS
308
ALL
310
Scanner
ALL
0
<0-11>
0
<0-5>
128
<0-255>
SYS
SYS
0.1433 mm/step
SYS
ALL
SYS
ALL
10
<0-20>
SYS
ALL
10
<0-20>
SYS
299
Image
quality
control
311
340
Original
glass
RADF
352
RADF
EEPROM initialization
354
RADF
Adjustment of
RADF paper
alignment
355
ALL
ALL
6
1
2 - 47
Code
Classification
356
RADF
357
RADF
ALL
50
<0-100>
SYS
358
RADF
ALL
120
<0-255>
SYS
ALL
128
<0-255>
SYS
ALL
50
<0-100>
SYS
ALL
50
<0-100>
SYS
359
365
RADF
366
RAM
Contents
SYS
367
RADF
ALL
368
RADF
ALL
2 - 48
Procedure
6
Code
Classification
401
Laser
405
RAM
Contents
Procedure
1
1
408
Laser
ALL
40
<0-80>
409
Drive
FAX
Laser
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
410
FAX
128
<0-255>
PPC/
PRT
FAX
128
<0-255>
139
<0-255>
PPC/
PRT
FAX
107
<0-255>
121
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
20
<0-40>
20
<0-40>
411
412
Drive
421
Drive
422
424
Drive
425
426
Drive
427
Drive
428
Laser
429
PPC
PRT
FAX
FAX
ALL
ALL
M
M
M
M
1
When the value
increases by 1, the writing start position shifts to
the front side by approx.
0.0423 mm.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 49
Code
Classification
430
Image
431
Image
432
Image
433
Image
434-0
Image
434-1
Image
435
Image
436
Image
437
Image
438
Image
439
Drive
440
Laser
441
442
443
444
445
446-0
446-1
Drive
2 - 50
RAM
M
Contents
When the value
increases by 1, the
blank area becomes
wider by approx.
0.0423 mm.
Procedure
1
M
M
M
1
1
1
Code
Classification
447-0
Drive
447-1
448-0
Paper
feeding
448-1
448-2
448-3
448-4
449-0
Paper
feeding
449-1
449-2
449-3
449-4
450-0
Paper
feeding
450-1
450-2
450-3
450-4
451-0
Drive
451-1
452-0
452-1
452-2
452-3
452-4
Paper
feeding
RAM
Contents
Procedure
2
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
M
M
M
M
M
4
4
4
4
4
2 - 51
Code
Classification
453-0
Drive
453-1
454-0
Drive
454-1
455-0
Paper
feeding
455-1
455-2
455-3
455-4
456-0
Drive
456-1
457
Paper
feeding
458-0
Paper
feeding
458-1
458-2
458-3
458-4
Fine adjustment of
reverse motor
rotation speed
Normal
speed
Increased
speed
Paper aligning amount
adjustment at the registration section
(Tandem LCF/Plain paper)
Paper aligning Long size
amount
adjustment at Middle
the registrasize
tion section
Short size(Bypass feed- 1
ing/Plain
Short sizepaper)
2
Postcard
FAX
FAX
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
2 - 52
RAM
Contents
Procedure
M
M
M
M
M
4
4
4
4
4
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
12
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
M
M
M
M
4
4
4
4
4
Code
460-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
460-1
460-2
460-3
460-4
461-0
Paper
feeding
461-1
461-2
461-3
461-4
462-0
Paper
feeding
462-1
462-2
462-3
462-4
463-0
Paper
feeding
463-1
463-2
463-3
463-4
464-0
464-1
464-2
464-3
Drive
RAM
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Contents
When the value
increases by 1, the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size-1:
205 mm to 219 mm
Short size-2:
160 mm to 204 mm
Postcard:
159 mm or shorter
Procedure
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
2 - 53
05/06
Code
466-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
466-1
466-2
466-3
466-4
468-0
Finisher
468-1
468-2
469-0
Paper
feeding
469-1
469-2
469-3
469-4
470-0
Paper
feeding
470-1
470-2
470-3
470-4
471-0
471-1
471-2
471-3
471-4
Paper
feeding
2 - 54
RAM
Contents
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Procedure
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Code
472-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
472-1
472-2
472-3
472-4
473-0
Paper
feeding
473-1
473-2
473-3
474-0
Paper
feeding
474-1
474-2
474-3
474-4
475-0
475-1
475-2
475-3
Drive
RAM
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Contents
When the value
increases by 1, the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size-1:
205 mm to 219 mm
Short size-2:
160 mm to 204 mm
Postcard:
159 mm or shorter
Procedure
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
2 - 55
05/06
Code
476-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
476-1
476-2
476-3
476-4
476-5
477-0
Paper
feeding
477-1
477-2
477-3
477-4
477-5
478-0
Drive
478-1
478-2
478-3
480
Paper
feeding
481
Drive
2 - 56
05/06
Procedure
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Code
Classification
482
Drive
483
Drive
484
Drive
485
Drive
486
Drive
487
Drive
488
Drive
489
Drive
490
Drive
493
Drive
497-0
Laser
PPC
497-2
497-3
4th drawer
ALL
497-4
Tandem
LCF
Bypass
feeding
Option
LCF
Long size
ALL
497-1
497-5
497-6
498-0
498-1
Laser
Adjustment of
primary scanning laser
writing start
position at
duplex feeding
Short size
(A4/LT or
smaller)
PRT
PPC
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
RAM
Contents
Procedure
2
M
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
8
<0-15>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
148
<0-255>
148
<0-255>
M
M
4
4
M
M
4
4
2 - 57
05/06
Code
Classification
501
Image
503
504
505
Image
506
507
508
Image
509
510
512
Image
514
515
532
533
534
Image
2 - 58
05/06
RAM
Contents
SYS
Procedure
1
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
1
1
1
SYS
SYS
1
1
SYS
SYS
1
1
1
1
1
Code
Classification
570
Image
571
572
593
Image
594
Image
595
Image
596-0
Image
596-1
Gamma data
slope adjustment
596-2
597-0
Image
597-1
597-2
598-0
Image
598-1
598-2
599-0
599-1
Image
599-2
Text/Photo
PPC
Photo
PPC
Text
PPC
Low density
Medium
density
High density
Low density
Medium
density
High density
Low density
Medium
density
High density
Low density
Medium
density
High density
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
5
<0-9>
5
<0-9>
5
<0-9>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
RAM
Contents
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS/
RIP
SYS/
RIP
SYS/
RIP
SYS/
RIP
SYS/
RIP
SYS/
RIP
SYS/
RIP
SYS/
RIP
SYS/
RIP
SYS/
RIP
SYS/
RIP
SYS/
RIP
Procedure
1
2
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2 - 59
Code
Classification
600
Image
601
602
620
Image
621-0
621-1
622
RAM
Contents
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Image
Adjustment of Text/Photo
smudged/faint
text
PPC
192
<0-255>
SYS
654
Image
Adjustment of PS
smudged/faint
text
PRT
5
<0-9>
PRT
5
<0-9>
PCL
663
Image
PRT
255
<0-255>
664
Image
Upper limit
PS
value in tonersaving period PCL
PRT
176
<0-255>
176
<0-255>
665
PRT
2 - 60
SYS
653
655
Procedure
1
4
4
1
1
1
Code
Classification
693
Image
694
695
700
Image
Adjustment of
binarized
threshold
(Text)
Contents
SYS
SYS
SYS
Center
value
FAX
120
<0-255>
SYS
701
Light step
value
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
702
Dark step
value
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
Photo
FAX
128
<0-255>
SYS
Text/Photo
FAX
128
<0-255>
SYS
Photo
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
Text/Photo
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
Photo
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
Text/Photo
FAX
20
<0-255>
SYS
710
Image
714
715
Image
719
720
724
Image
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Center value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Light step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Dark step
value
Procedure
RAM
2
1
2 - 61
Code
Classification
725
Image
729
825
Image
826
827
828
830
Image
SCN
831
Text
SCN
832
Photo
SCN
833
Gray scale
SCN
SCN
835
836
Image
SCN
837
Photo
SCN
838
Gray scale
SCN
2 - 62
RAM
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
40
<0-255>
48
<0-255>
16
<0-255>
16
<0-255>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents
Procedure
1
1
SYS
SYS
Code
Classification
845
Image
846
847
848
850
Image
851
852
853
855
Image
856
857
858
860
Image
861
862
863
865-0
Image
865-1
865-2
866-0
Image
866-1
866-2
867-0
Image
867-1
867-2
868-0
868-1
Image
RAM
Contents
SYS
SYS
Procedure
1
1
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
1
1
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
1
1
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
1
1
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
4
4
4
4
4
4
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
2 - 63
Code
Classification
869
Image
870
871
872
913
Image
914
915
916
PPC
917
Custom
Mode 2
PPC
918
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
919
920
921
Image
Image
Range correction
Background
peak adjustment
PPC
PPC
2 - 64
RAM
Contents
SYS
SYS
Procedure
1
1
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
EUR:12
UC:12
JPN:22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
22
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
SYS
40
<0-255>
64
<0-255>
16
<0-255>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
1
1
1
Code
Classification
922
Image
923
924-0
924-1
RAM
Contents
SYS
Custom
Mode 2
PPC
61
<11-99>
SYS
Custom
Mode 3
(error diffusion)
Custom
Mode 3
(Dither)
PPC
23
<11-99>
SYS
PPC
13
<11-99>
SYS
928
Image
Adjustment of Custom
smudged/faint Mode 1
text
PPC
192
<0-255>
SYS
931
Image
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Center value
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
SYS
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
20
<0-255>
SYS
Custom
Mode 1
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3
PPC
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
SYS
932
933
934
Image
935
936
937
Image
938
939
940
941
942
Image
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Light step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of manual density/
Dark step
value
Density
adjustment
Fine adjustment of automatic density
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
1
1
1
1
1
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Procedure
1
1
1
1
1
1
2 - 65
Code
Classification
943
Image
944
Custom
Mode 2
945
946
Image
947
948
976
Maintenance
Custom
Mode 3
Background
Custom
Mode 1
adjustment
Custom
Mode 2
Custom
Mode 3
Equipment number (serial
number) entry
RAM
SYS
Contents
Select the slope of
Gamma curve (The
larger the value is, the
larger the slope
becomes.)
Procedure
1
PPC
5
<0-9>
SYS
PPC
5
<0-9>
5
<1-9>
6
<1-9>
4
<1-9>
-
SYS
PPC
PPC
PPC
ALL
2 - 66
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
1
1
1
2.2.5
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing
the [ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds.
Procedure 1
2
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
Sets or
changes value
[START]
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 2
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
[START]
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 3
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[ENTER]
or
(Automatic setting)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
or
[Digital key]
[INTERRUPT]
* [FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Stores value
Sets or
in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
2 - 67
Procedure 5
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
*[HELP]
Sets or
changes value
[START]
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Setting)
[ENTER]
or
(HDD formatting)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[ENTER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
or
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[Select icon]
Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(1st setting)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER]
[ENTER]
or
OFF/ON
[INTERRUPT]
(Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[Digital key]
(2nd setting)
Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
or
[ENTER]
[START]
[Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM)
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
2 - 68
Procedure 14
[CANCEL]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
2 - 69
Notes:
The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code.
In RAM, the NVRAM or FRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. M stands for the LGC board, SYS and UTY stands for the SYS board.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accepttion
able
value>
ALL
<13 digits>
Code
Classification
200
General
201
General
Destination selection
ALL
202
User
interface
ALL
203
General
204
User
interface
205
User
interface
Items
Contents
Year/month/date/day/
hour/minute/second
Example:
03 07 0 13 13 27 48
Day - 0 is for
Sunday. Proceeds Monday
through Saturday
from 1 to 6.
0: EUR
1: UC
2: JPN
0: No external counter
1: Coin controller
2: Copy key card
3: Key copy counter
0: For factory shipment
1: For line
* Field: 0 must be
selected
Timer to return the
equipment to the
default settings when
the [START] button is
not pressed after the
function and the mode
are set
0: Not cleared
1 to 10: Set number x
15 sec.
Timer to automatically
switch to the Auto
power save mode when
the equipment has not
been used
0: Invalid
6: 3min.
7: 4min.
8: 5min.
9: 7min.
10: 10min.
11: 15min.
12: 20min.
13: 30min.
14: 45min.
15: 60min.
EUR: 0
UC: 1
JPN: 2
<0-2>
0
<0-3>
ALL
0
<0-1>
ALL
3
<0-10>
SYS
ALL
11
<0, 6-15>
SYS
2 - 70
Procedure
RAM
Code
206
Classification
User
interface
RAM
Contents
SYS
207
User
interface
Highlighting display on
LCD
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
209
User
interface
ALL
0
<0-4>
SYS
210
Paper
feeding
PRT
211
Paper
feeding
Inserter Unit
Reversing operation at
back cover insertion
PPC
148/105
<148432/105297>
0
<0-1>
213
User
interface
Paper
feeding
Display of [REVERSE
ORDER] button
Tab paper printing/ Tab
width setting
(Drawer)
ALL
215
Paper
feeding
216
Paper
feeding
214
SYS
0
<0-1>
130
<120170>
SYS
PPC
130
<0-300>
SYS
PPC
130
<100200>
SYS
PPC
SYS
Procedure
1
10
1
1
2 - 71
05/11
Code
Classification
Items
217
Paper
feeding
219
User
interface
220
User
interface
221
RAM
SYS
SYS
Language displayed at
power-ON
ALL
EUR: 0
UC: 0
JPN: 5
<0-6>
SYS
User
interface
Language selection in UI
data at Web power ON
ALL
EUR: 0
UC: 0
JPN: 5
<0-6>
SYS
223
Maintenance
ALL
0
<0-1>
224
Paper
feeding
Paper
feeding
PPC
UNDEF
SYS
ALL
226
Paper
feeding
ALL
227
Paper
feeding
ALL
228
Paper
feeding
ALL
229
Paper
feeding
ALL
EUR: A4
UC: LT
JPN: A4
EUR: A3
UC: LD
JPN: A3
EUR:
A4-R
UC:
LT-R
JPN:
A4-R
EUR: A4
UC: LG
JPN: B4
420/297
<182432/140297>
2 - 72
05/11
0
<0-4>
Procedure
0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF (Multi)
2: Not used
3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
0: Language 1
1: Language 2
2: Language 3
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
0: Language 1
1: Language 2
2: Language 3
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
The PM timing can be
displayed in these 2
methods. (Messages
will appear on the LCD
panel.)
0: PM counter (Number of output pages
can be set in 08251)
1: PM time counter
(Drive counts can
be set in 08-375)
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
SCN
225
Contents
9
9
10
Code
Classification
230
Paper
feeding
231
Paper
feeding
232
Paper
feeding
233
Paper
feeding
234
Paper
feeding
235
Paper
feeding
236
Paper
feeding
237
Paper
feeding
238
Paper
feeding
239
Paper
feeding
240
Paper
feeding
241
Paper
feeding
242
Paper
feeding
243
Paper
feeding
RAM
Contents
Procedure
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
SYS
10
SYS
10
2 - 73
Code
Classification
RAM
244
Paper
feeding
245
Paper
feeding
246
Paper
feeding
247
Paper
feeding
248
Paper
feeding
249
Paper
feeding
250
Maintenance
251
Maintenance
Setting value of PM
counter
ALL
Refer to
content
<8 digits>
252
Maintenance
Current value of PM
counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0
<8 digits>
253
Maintenance
ALL
SYS
2 - 74
Contents
Procedure
10
10
10
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
10
10
10
11
Code
254
Classification
Paper
feeding
Items
LT <-> A4/LD <-> A3
RAM
Contents
SYS
EUR: A4
UC: LT
JPN: A4
<1-2>
ALL
1
<0-2>
SYS
PRT
14
<0-35>
SYS
Network
SCN
10
<3 digits>
SYS
Network
SCN
10
<3 digits>
SYS
256
Paper
feeding
ALL
257
Counter
Counter copy
ALL
258
Maintenance
FSMS acceptance
259
Network
260
261
1) Electrical counter
! Backup counter
2) Backup counter !
Electrical counter
(P.2-158 "Fig.2-3")
Sets whether the FSMS
connection is accepted
or not.
0: Prohibited
1: Accepted (USB normal connection)
2: Accepted (USB
forcible connection)
0: No limits
1 to 30: 1 to 30 days
31: 1 hour
32: 2 hours
33: 4 hours
34: 8 hours
35: 12 hours
When a certain period
of time has passed
without operation after
accessing TopAccess,
the data being registered is automatically
reset. This period is set
at this code.
(Unit: Minute)
When a certain period
of time has passed
without operation after
accessing the Box, the
data being registered is
automatically reset.
This period is set at this
code.
[Unit: Minute]
Procedure
1
2 - 75
Code
Classification
262
Network
263
User
interface
Administrator's password
(Maximum 10 digits)
ALL
123456
<10 digits>
264
Network
SCN
SYS
265
Network
30
<0-999>
30
<2-30>
30
<2-30>
0
<0-1>
Items
Contents
SYS
SYS
SYS
2 to 30 M bytes
SYS
SCN
270
ALL
0
<0-999>
SYS
271
General
ALL
90
<0-100>
SYS
ALL
3
<0-99>
SYS
266
267
272
ALL
ALL
2 - 76
05/11
Procedure
RAM
11
1
1
Code
273
RAM
Contents
SYS
274
FAX
FAX
0
<0-4>
SYS
276
User
interface
SCN
0
<0-11>
SYS
281
User
interface
SCN
1
<0-4>
SYS
283
User
interface
SCN
0
<0-3>
SYS
284
User
interface
User
interface
SCN
0
<0-2>
0
<0-3>
SYS
User
interface
SCN
285
286
SCN
0
<0-22>
SYS
SYS
Procedure
1
1
1
2 - 77
05/11
Code
Classification
288
General
289
User
interface
PRT
5
<1 -9>
SYS
290
Network
PRT
SYS
291
Network
PRT
1
<0-1>
EUR: 6
UC: 2
JPN: 6
<0 -13>
292
Network
PRT
0
<0-5>
SYS
293
Network
PRT
Network
295
Network
PRT
0
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
0
<0-6>
SYS
294
296
Network
PRT
1200
<50012800>
SYS
297
Network
PRT
1000
<449999>
SYS
298
Network
PRT
1200
<40099975>
SYS
299
Network
PRT
0
<0-79>
SYS
PRT
2 - 78
05/11
RAM
Contents
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Procedure
1
1
1
1
1
1
Code
300
302
305-0
305-1
305-2
305-3
305-4
305-5
305-6
305-7
305-8
305-9
305-10
305-11
305-12
305-13
305-14
305-15
305-16
306-0
306-1
306-2
306-3
306-4
306-5
306-6
306-7
306-8
306-9
306-10
306-11
306-12
306-13
306-14
306-15
306-16
Classification
User
interface
User
interface
Counter
Counter
Number of
A3
output pages A4
in copier func- A5
tion
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
Number of
output pages A4
in printer func- A5
tion
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: 9999 1: 999
2: 99
3: 9
Sets whether the original counter is displayed or not.
0: Not displayed
2: Displayed
4: Displayed (Doublesized original is counted
as 2.)
Counts the output
pages in the copier
function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
large-sized paper (08353).
SYS
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
2 - 79
Code
307-0
307-1
307-2
307-3
307-4
307-5
307-6
307-7
307-8
307-9
307-10
307-11
307-12
307-13
307-14
307-15
307-16
308-0
308-1
308-2
308-3
308-4
308-5
308-6
308-7
308-8
308-9
308-10
308-11
308-12
308-13
308-14
308-15
308-16
Classification
Items
Counter
Number of
output pages
at list print
mode
Counter
Number of
output pages
in FAX function
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
FAX
2 - 80
0
<8 digits>
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
SYS
Code
312-0
312-1
312-2
312-3
312-4
312-5
312-6
312-7
312-8
312-9
312-10
312-11
312-12
312-13
312-14
312-15
312-16
313-0
313-1
313-2
313-3
313-4
313-5
313-6
313-7
313-8
313-9
313-10
313-11
313-12
313-13
313-14
313-15
313-16
Classification
Counter
Counter
Items
Number of
scanning
pages in
copier function
Number of
scanning
pages in
scanning
function
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
SCN
0
<8 digits>
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
SYS
2 - 81
Code
314-0
314-1
314-2
314-3
314-4
314-5
314-6
314-7
314-8
314-9
314-10
314-11
314-12
314-13
314-14
314-15
314-16
315-0
315-1
315-2
315-3
315-4
315-5
315-6
315-7
315-8
315-9
315-10
315-11
315-12
315-13
315-14
315-15
315-16
Classification
Items
Counter
Number of
scanning
pages in FAX
function
Counter
Number of
transmitted
pages in FAX
function
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
FAX
2 - 82
0
<8 digits>
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
SYS
Code
Classification
316-0
316-1
316-2
316-3
316-4
316-5
316-6
316-7
316-8
316-9
316-10
316-11
316-12
316-13
316-14
316-15
316-16
320-0
Counter
Counter
320-1
Items
Number of
received
pages in FAX
function
Contents
SYS
14
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13LG
8.5 x 8.5
16K
8K
Others
Large
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
Counter
Small
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
320-2
Counter
Total
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
321-0
Counter
Large
Display of
number of
output pages
in printer function
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
321-1
Counter
Small
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
321-2
Counter
Total
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
Display of
number of
output pages
in copier function
Procedure
RAM
14
14
14
14
14
2 - 83
Code
Classification
322-0
Counter
322-1
Counter
Small
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
322-2
Counter
Total
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
323-0
Counter
Large
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
323-1
Counter
Small
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
323-2
Counter
Total
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
327-0
Counter
Large
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
327-1
Counter
Small
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
327-2
Counter
Total
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
Items
Display of
number of
output pages
at list print
mode
Display of
number of
output pages
in FAX function
Display of
number of
scanning
pages in
copier function
Large
2 - 84
RAM
Contents
SYS
Procedure
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
Code
Classification
328-0
Counter
Items
Display of
number of
scanning
pages in FAX
function
Large
RAM
Contents
SYS
328-1
Counter
Small
FAX
0
<8 digits>
SYS
328-2
Counter
Total
FAX
0
<8 digits>
SYS
329-0
Counter
Large
SCN
0
<8 digits>
SYS
329-1
Counter
Small
SCN
0
<8 digits>
SYS
329-2
Counter
Total
SCN
0
<8 digits>
SYS
330-0
Counter
Large
FAX
0
<8 digits>
SYS
330-1
Counter
Small
FAX
0
<8 digits>
SYS
330-2
Counter
Total
FAX
0
<8 digits>
SYS
Display of
number of
scanning
pages in
scanning
function
Display of
number of
transmitted
pages in FAX
function
Procedure
14
2
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
2 - 85
Code
Classification
331
User
interface
332-0
Counter
332-1
Display of
number of
received
pages in FAX
function
RAM
Contents
SYS
Large
FAX
0
<8 digits>
SYS
Counter
Small
FAX
0
<8 digits>
SYS
332-2
Counter
Total
FAX
0
<8 digits>
SYS
335-0
Counter
Large
ALL
SYS
335-1
Counter
Small
ALL
335-2
Counter
Total
ALL
342
User
interface
Displaying number of
original pages placed on
original glass
PPC
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<0-1>
344
Counter
ALL
Counter
347
Counter
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
346
348
Counter
ALL
Counter
352
Counter
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
JPN: 0
OTHER:
1
<0-2>
349
Display of
total number
of pages
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
2 - 86
SYS
SYS
SYS
M
M
M
M
Procedure
1
14
14
14
14
14
14
1
1
1
1
1
1
Code
Classification
353
Counter
355
Counter
356
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
357
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
358
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
359
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
360
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
370
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
372
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
374
Counter
ALL
SYS
375
Maintenance
ALL
0
<8 digits>
Refer to
contents
<8 digits>
376
Maintenance
ALL
0
<8 digits>
381
Counter
ALL
1
<0-7>
RAM
Contents
Procedure
0: A3/LD
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP/8K
2
1
2 - 87
Code
Classification
390
Counter
391
Counter
FAX
0
<8 digits>
SYS
392
Counter
SCN
0
<8 digits>
SYS
393
Counter
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
400
Fuser
ALL
0
<0-29>
401
Fuser
ALL
Fuser
403
Fuser
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
7
<0-255>
402
ALL
ALL
2 - 88
05/06
RAM
Contents
SYS
M
M
Procedure
2
1
1
1
Code
Classification
404
Fuser
RAM
M
405
Fuser
ALL
Refer to
contents
<8 digits>
406
Fuser
ALL
8
<0-16>
407
Fuser
ALL
0
<0-16>
Contents
<Default value>
e-STUDIO600:
450,000
e-STUDIO720:
525,000
e-STUDIO850:
550,000
(Setting value X 1
sheet)
<Default value>
e-STUDIO600:
500,000
e-STUDIO720:
575,000
e-STUDIO850:
600,000
(Setting value X 1
sheet)
0: 100C 1: 110C
2: 120C 3: 125C
4: 130C 5: 135C
6: 140C 7: 145C
8: 150C 9: 155C
10: 160C
11: 165C
12: 170C
13: 175C
14: 180C
15: 185C
16: 190C
0: 100C 1: 110C
2: 120C 3: 125C
4: 130C 5: 135C
6: 140C 7: 145C
8: 150C 9: 155C
10: 160C
11: 165C
12: 170C
13: 175C
14: 180C
15: 185C
16: 190C
Procedure
1
2 - 89
Code
Classification
408
Fuser
409
Fuser
ALL
2 - 90
Refer to
contents
<0-27>
RAM
Contents
0: 100C 1: 110C
2: 120C 3: 125C
4: 130C 5: 135C
6: 140C 7: 145C
8: 150C 9: 155C
10: 160C
11: 165C
12: 170C
13: 175C
14: 180C
15: 185C
16: 190C
<Default value>
e-STUDIO520
UC, EUR: 4
e-STUDIO600
JPN: 1 UC, EUR: 4
e-STUDIO720
JPN: 2 UC, EUR: 4
e-STUDIO850
JPN: 2 UC, EUR: 4
0: OFF
1: 50C
2: 55C 3: 60C
4: 65C 5: 70C
6: 75C 7: 80C
8: 85C 9: 90C
10: 95C
11: 100C
12: 105C
13: 110C
14: 115C
15: 120C
16: 125C
17: 130C
18: 135C
19: 140C
20: 145C
21: 150C
22: 155C
23: 160C
24: 165C
25: 170C
26: 175C
27: 180C
<Default value>
e-STUDIO520
UC, EUR: 19
e-STUDIO600
JPN: 5 UC, EUR: 19
e-STUDIO720
JPN: 5 UC, EUR: 22
e-STUDIO850
JPN: 22 UC, EUR: 25
Procedure
1
Code
Classification
410
Fuser
RAM
M
411
Fuser
ALL
Refer to
contents
<0-14>
412
Fuser
ALL
12
<0-14>
413
Fuser
ALL
12
<0-14>
Contents
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
<Default value>
e-STUDIO520
UC, EUR: 12
e-STUDIO600
JPN: 9 UC, EUR: 12
e-STUDIO720
JPN: 9 UC, EUR: 12
e-STUDIO850
JPN: 12
UC, EUR: 12
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Procedure
1
2 - 91
Code
Classification
RAM
Contents
0: Approx. 0.75%
lower than current
status
1: Approx. 0.50%
lower than current
status
2: Approx. 0.25%
lower than current
status
3: Unchanged
(Default)
4: Approx. 0.15%
higher than current
status
5: Approx. 0.25%
higher than current
status
6: Approx. 0.50%
higher than current
status
7: Approx. 0.75%
higher than current
status
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
0: Disabled
1: 500 sheets interval
2: 1,000 sheets interval
3: 1,500 sheets interval
4: 2,000 sheets interval
5: 2,500 sheets interval
6: 3,000 sheets interval
The fusing efficiency
level goes up during a
continuous printing
(when Thick 3 is
selected).
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
414
Developer
417
Fuser
ALL
0
<0-15>
418
Charger
ALL
4
<0-6>
433
Fuser
ALL
0
<0-1>
437
Fuser
ALL
12
<0-14>
2 - 92
Procedure
1
Code
Classification
439
Fuser
RAM
Contents
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
The supply amount of
new toner to the developer unit (the drive
counts of the new toner
supply motor) is corrected.
Smaller-Toner supply
amount-Larger
5!4!3!1!0!2!6
!7!8
The supply amount of
recycle toner to the
developer unit (the
drive counts of the hopper motor) is corrected.
Smaller-Toner supply
amount-Larger
3!1!0!7!6!5!4
!8!2
440
Fuser
ALL
0
<0-15>
441
Fuser
ALL
0
<0-15>
449
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-8>
455
Paper
feeding
Process
456
Process
ALL
0
<0-8>
ALL
Procedure
1
1
1
2 - 93
Code
Classification
457
Process
460
Fuser
ALL
2 - 94
7
<0-11>
RAM
Contents
Procedure
1
Code
Classification
462
RADF
463-0
463-1
Paper
feeding
Feeding retry
number setting
(1st drawer)
Plain
paper
Others
ALL
ALL
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
RAM
Contents
M
M
Procedure
1
4
4
2 - 95
Code
464-0
Classification
Paper
feeding
464-1
465-0
Paper
feeding
465-1
466-0
Paper
feeding
466-1
467-0
Paper
feeding
467-1
468-0
Paper
feeding
468-1
470
Paper
feeding
471
Paper
feeding
476
Counter
478
Laser
480
Paper
feeding
RAM
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
10
10
ALL
0
<0-6>
PPC
0
<0-6>
2 - 96
Procedure
Contents
Code
481
482
Classification
Paper
feeding
ALL
Pre-running rotation of
polygonal motor
ALL
Contents
SYS
483
Paper
feeding
Laser
484
Laser
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
485
Laser
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0
<0-1>
0
<0-2>
RAM
M
SYS
Procedure
1
1
1
2 - 97
Code
Classification
486
Laser
488
Laser
ALL
2
<2-3>
489
Laser
ALL
Refer to
contents
<0-5>
502
Image
PPC
1
<0-1>
SYS
503
User
interface
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
2 - 98
RAM
Contents
SYS
Procedure
1
Code
Classification
508
Image
Items
Custom Mode setting
Contents
SYS
0: Not used
1: Custom Mode 1
when Text/Photo is
set as a base
2: Custom Mode 2
when Text is set as
a base
3: Custom Mode 3
when Photo is set
as a base
Switches the image
processing method
when Custom Mode 3
is set.
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
0: Invalid 1: 0 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
11: 12 sec.
12: 14 sec.
13: 16 sec.
14: 18 sec.
15: 20 sec.
0: Text/Photo
1: Photo 2: Text
3: Custom Mode
0: Auto Shut Off Mode
1: Sleep Mode
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Invalid
1: Single-sided to
duplex copying
2: Double-sided to
duplex copying
3: User selection
0: APS (Automatic
Paper Selection)
1: AMS (Automatic
Magnification Selection)
2: Not selected
0: Invalid 1: Valid
509
Image
PPC
1
<0-1>
SYS
526
Fuser
ALL
5
<0-15>
550
Image
PPC
0
<0-10>
SYS
601
User
interface
User
interface
ALL
SYS
603
User
interface
PPC
0
<0-1>
EUR: 0
UC: 1
JPN: 1
<0-1>
0
<0-3>
604
User
interface
PPC
0
<0-2>
SYS
605
User
interface
PPC
1
<0-1>
SYS
607
User
interface
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
602
ALL
Procedure
RAM
SYS
SYS
0: Continuous feeding
(by pressing the
[START] button)
1: Single feeding
(by setting original
on the tray)
1
1
2 - 99
05/11
User
interface
User
interface
612
General
ALL
613
User
interface
PPC
614
Network
PRT
615
General
ALL
SYS
617
User
interface
ALL
1
<0-2>
SYS
618
User
interface
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
619
Paper
feeding
ALL
4
<0-10>
SYS
620
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
Department management
setting (Copier)
Department management
setting (FAX)
Department management
setting (Printer)
Department management
setting (Scanner)
PPC
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
SYS
Code
610
611
621
622
623
Classification
FAX
PRT
SCN
2 - 100
0
<0-1>
EUR:
FOLIO
UC:
COMP
JPN:
A5-R
6
<1-50>
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Left page to right
page
1: Right page to left
page
0: Not summer time
1: Summer time
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Procedure
1
1
1
9
1
1
1
1
Code
624
625
627
Classification
User
interface
User
interface
Contents
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: OFF
1: ON (Start printing
when the scanning
of each page is finished)
0: Not rotating
1: Rotating
0: Automatic
1: Portrait
0: Invalid
1: Valid
* When this code is
set to 0 (Invalid),
the user data
department management setting
(08-1482) will be set
to 0 (Invalid).
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
SYS
User
interface
User
interface
User
interface
630
Paper
feeding
ALL
633
Scrambler
board
User
interface
ALL
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
EUR: 24
UC: 40
JPN: 6
Other:0
<0-47>
SYS
628
629
636
638
General
ALL
RAM
PPC
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
SYS
JPN: A4
UC: LT
EUR: A4
0
<0-2>
SYS
SYS
SYS
Procedure
1
1
1
1
1
0: Not used
1: Board installed
2: Service call
0: ON
1: OFF
0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h
2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h
4: +10.0h 5: +9.5h
6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h
8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h
10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h
12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h
14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h
16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h
18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h
20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h
22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h
24: 0.0h 25: -0.5h
26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h
28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h
30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h
32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h
34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h
36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h
38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h
40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h
42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h
44: -10.0h
45: -10.5h
46: -11.0h
47: -11.5h
2 - 101
05/11
640
User
interface
641
User
interface
642
User
interface
PPC
0
<0-4>
SYS
645
User
interface
Correction of reproduction
ratio in editing copy
PPC
10
<0-10>
SYS
646
User
interface
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
648
User
interface
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
649
User
interface
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
650
User
interface
User
interface
PPC
0
<0-1>
2
<0-3>
SYS
User
interface
User
interface
PPC
SYS
PRT
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0: Invalid 1: STAPLE
2: SORT 3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
0: NON-SORT
1: STAPLE
2: SORT 3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
Sets the reproduction
ratio for the X in 1
printing (including magazine sort) to the
Reproduction ratio x
Correction ratio.
0: 90%
1: 91%
2: 92%
3: 93%
4: 94%
5: 95%
6: 96%
7: 97%
8: 98%
9: 99%
10: 100%
Sets the page pasted
position for X in 1 to
the upper left corner/
center.
0: Cornering
1: Centering
Sets whether or not
returning the finisher
tray to the bin 1 when
printing is finished.
0: Not returned
1: Returned
0: Left page to right
page
1: Right page to left
page
0: Horizontal
1: Vertical
Hyphen
(with page number)
/Dropout
(with date, time and
page number)
0: OFF/OFF
1: ON/OFF
2: OFF/ON
3: ON/ON
Note:
Note:
Hyphen printing
format
ON: -1- OFF: 1
0: OFF
1: ON
SYS
0: OFF
Code
651
652
653
Classification
PPC
2 - 102
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: YYYY.MM.DD.
1: DD.MM.YYYY
2: MM.DD.YYYY
SYS
SYS
1: ON
1
1
1
1
User
interface
User
interface
659
User
interface
PPC
1
<0-1>
SYS
660
Network
ALL
Network
662
General
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
-
SYS
661
Auto-forwarding setting of
received FAX
Auto-forwarding setting of
received E-mail
Clearing of SMS partition
665
General
ALL
M/
SYS
666
General
ALL
SYS
667
General
ALL
SYS
669
General
ALL
SYS
670
General
ALL
SYS
671
User
interface
Size indicator
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
Code
657
658
Classification
ALL
SYS
SYS
Contents
0: Short edge
1: Long edge
Sets whether or not
feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)
Sets whether or not
feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed
on the bypass tray.
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic
feeding)
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Clears SMS partition.
(Performs when the
service call [F106] has
occurred.)
Initializes all the adjustment modes and setting
modes.
Initializes the Electronic Filing.
Initializes the shared
folder.
The system FRAM storage area is cleared.
Display the HDD information
(Ch.5.3.5)
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Procedure
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
2
2 - 103
05/11
Code
Classification
672
General
673
General
PRT/
SCN
254
<1-60>
SYS
678
General
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
679
General
ALL
SYS
680
General
ALL
SYS
681
General
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
682
User
interface
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
2 - 104
RAM
Contents
SYS
Procedure
3
11
11
1
Code
Classification
683
General
Items
Duplex printing setting
when coin controller is
used
RAM
Contents
SYS
684
685
General
General
ALL
ALL
SYS
SYS
686
General
ALL
SYS
689
FAX
FAX
0
<0-1>
SYS
690
General
HDD formatting
ALL
SYS
691
General
ALL
<2>
<0-2>
692
Maintenance
ALL
SYS
693
General
ALL
SYS
694
695
General
General
ALL
PRT/
SCN
3
<0-59>
SYS
SYS
696
Scrambler
board
Paper
feeding
Installation of scrambler
board (Option)
ALL
0
<0-1>
PPC
1
<1-2>
SYS
697
SYS
Procedure
1
3
3
3
1
0: Not formatted
1: Not used
2: Normal format
Performs the calibration
of the pressing position
on the touch panel
(LCD screen). The calibration is performed by
pressing 2 reference
positions after this code
is started up.
Returns the value to the
factory shipping default
value.
Checks the bad sector.
Sets when the end of
trial period is notified.
0: On the day it ends
1 to 59: n days before
0: Not installed
1: Installed
3
1
2 - 105
Code
Classification
RAM
Contents
698
Scrambler
board
699
Scrambler
board
FAX
ALL
FAX
EUR: 5
UC: 4
JPN: 0
Other: 1
<0-25>
SYS
702
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service
function
ALL
2
<0-2>
SYS
703
Maintenance
ALL
SYS
704-0
User
interface
Remote-controlled service
HTTP server
URL setting
Interruption of Copying
stapling operation (no staple)
Printing /
BOX printing
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
https://
device.mf
p-support.com:
443/
device/firstregist.ashx
SYS
701
704-1
707
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service
HTTP initially-registered
server
URL setting
2 - 106
05/06
0: Continues printing
by switching sort
setting
1: Interrupts printing
0: Continues printing
by switching sort
setting
1: Interrupts printing
Maximum 256 letters
Procedure
5
11
11
Code
710
711
715
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
716
Maintenance
717
Maintenance
718
Maintenance
719
Maintenance
Maintenance
720
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
ALL
60
<30-360>
SYS
Remote-controlled service
periodical polling timing
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
Remote-controlled service
Writing data of self-diagnostic code
Remote-controlled service
response waiting time
(Timeout)
Remote-controlled service
initial registration
ALL
1230
SYS
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Prohibited
1: Accepted
ALL
3
<1-30>
SYS
Unit: Minute
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
Remote-controlled service
tentative password
Status of remote-controlled service initial registration
(Display only)
Service center call function
ALL
SYS
0: OFF
1: Start
2: Only certification is
scanned
Maximum 10 letters
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Not registered
1: Registered
ALL
2
<0-2>
SYS
ALL
SYS
0: OFF
1: Notifies all service
calls
2: Notifies all but
paper jams
Maximum 256 letters
ALL
1
<0-1>
-
SYS
SYS
SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
2
1
11
721
Maintenance
723
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
ALL
728
Maintenance
ALL
729
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
(Remote)
ALL
0
<065535>
-
ALL
SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
ALL
SYS
ALL
ALL
SYS
0: Valid
1: Invalid
0: Ordered by FAX
1: Ordered by E-mail
2: Ordered by HTTP
3: OFF
Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
1
<0-1>
3
<0-3>
726
727
730
731
732
733
SYS
SYS
0: Valid
1: Invalid
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
11
1
11
11
2 - 107
Code
734
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
Classification
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
745
Maintenance
(Remote)
746
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
747
748
758
759
760
761
762
763
2 - 108
RAM
Contents
Procedure
SYS
11
SYS
Maximum 50 letters
11
SYS
Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
Maximum 192 letters
List: 256 digits
11
SYS
11
SYS
Maximum 5 digits
11
SYS
Maximum 50 letters
11
SYS
Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
11
SYS
11
SYS
Maximum 50 letters
11
SYS
11
SYS
11
SYS
Maximum 20 digits
11
SYS
11
SYS
SYS
SYS
Maximum 20 digits
11
SYS
SYS
Code
764
765
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: OFF
1: Always
2: ON Error
0: Valid (FAX/Internet
FAX)
1: Valid (FAX/Internet
FAX/HTTP)
2: Invalid
Enables to set up to 3
E-mail addresses to be
sent.(08-768, 777, 778)
0: Invalid
1: Valid (E-mail)
2: Valid (FAX)
Maximum 192 letters
SYS
Procedure
1
767
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
768
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
ALL
SYS
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
ALL
1
<1-31>
SYS
1 to 31
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Dealer's name
ALL
SYS
11
Login name
ALL
SYS
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
ALL
SYS
ALL
SYS
11
ALL
SYS
11
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Text
1: Text + XML data
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection
Day-1
Remote-controlled service
polling day selection
Day-2
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
ALL
0
<0-31>
SYS
0: OFF
1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a
month
0: OFF
1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a
month
769
770
771
772
773
Maintenance
774
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
(Remote)
Maintenance
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
Maintenance
11
11
2 - 109
05/06
Code
Classification
782
Maintenance
783
Maintenance
784
Maintenance
785
Maintenance
786
Maintenance
787
Maintenance
788
Maintenance
789
Maintenance
790
Maintenance
794
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
795
796
797
798
Maintenance
General
799
General
PRT/
SCN
2 - 110
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: OFF
1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a
month
0: OFF
1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a
month
0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0: Accepted
1: Prohibited
Sets where the end of
the trial period is to be
notified.
0: OFF 1: User
2: Service center
3: User and service
center
[CANCEL]: Cancel
[EXECUTION]: Forcible end
When the Forcible end
of trial period is performed, 0 is set in the
code (08-673) to end up
the trial period forcibly.
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
1
1
Code
800
Classification
Image
quality
control
RAM
Contents
803
Image
quality
control
ALL
20
<0-30>
804
Image
quality
control
ALL
4
<0-24>
810
Image
quality
control
ALL
50
<1-99>
830
Transfer
ALL
Refer to
contents
<0-255>
Procedure
1
2 - 111
Code
Classification
841
Transfer
844
Fuser
ALL
2 - 112
1
<0-12>
RAM
Contents
Procedure
1
Code
Classification
845
Fuser
846
Fuser
847
Fuser
848
Fuser
855
Fuser
Contents
0: 50C
1: 55C
2: 60C
3: 65C
4: 70C
5: 75C
6: 80C
7: 85C
8: 90C
9: 95C
10: 100C
11: 105C
12: 110C
13: 115C
14: 120C
15: 125C
16: 130C
<Default value>
e-STUDIO520
UC, EUR: 10
e-STUDIO600
JPN: 6 UC, EUR: 10
e-STUDIO720
JPN: 6 UC, EUR: 10
e-STUDIO850
JPN: 10 UC, EUR: 10
0: +5C
1: +10C
2: +15C
3: +20C
4: +25C
5: +30C
6: +35C
7: +40C
8: +45C
9: +50C
0: 50C
2: 60C
4: 70C
6: 80C
8: 90C
10: 100C
11: 105C
12: 110C
13: 115C
14: 120C
15: 125C
16: 130C
0: +5C
2: +15C
4: +25C
6: +35C
8: +45C
1: 55C
3: 65C
5: 75C
7: 85C
9: 95C
1: +10C
3: +20C
5: +30C
7: +40C
9: +50C
Low-speed pre-running
stopping temperature during ready status
(Pressure roller)
(Option not installed)
(When setting 08-844 is
enabled)
Low-speed pre-running
starting temperature during ready status
(Pressure roller)
(Option installed)
(When setting 08-844 is
enabled)
ALL
5
<0-9>
ALL
10
<0-16>
Low-speed pre-running
stopping temperature during ready status
(Pressure roller)
(Option installed)
(When setting 08-844 is
enabled)
Low-speed pre-running
setting at recovery from
Energy Saving Mode
ALL
5
<0-9>
ALL
Refer to
contents
<0-1>
Procedure
RAM
0: Performs pre-running
1: No pre-running
<Default value>
e-STUDIO520
UC, EUR: 0
e-STUDIO600
JPN: 1 UC, EUR: 0
e-STUDIO720
JPN: 1 UC, EUR: 0
e-STUDIO850
JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 0
2 - 113
05/04
Code
Classification
858
Fuser
859
860
861
RAM
Contents
0: Disabled
1: Enabled only for 5
minutes after warming-up
2: Always enabled
M
M
M
868
Transfer
869
Transfer
Transfer transformer DC
correction (L)
ALL
128
<0-255>
890
Fuser
Low-speed pre-running
starting temperature during ready status
(Pressure roller)
(Option not installed)
ALL
Refer to
contents
<0-16>
891
Fuser
Low-speed pre-running
stopping temperature during ready status
(Pressure roller)
(Option not installed)
ALL
Refer to
contents
<0-9>
2 - 114
Procedure
1
1
1
1
Code
Classification
897
Fuser
898
Fuser
900
Version
903
904
Version
Version
905
906
Version
Version
907
908
909
Version
Version
Version
915
920
Version
Version
921
922
Version
Version
923
Version
924
Version
925
Version
926
Version
927
Version
928
Version
929
Version
930
Version
931
Version
Low-speed pre-running
stopping temperature during ready status
(Pressure roller)
(When options are
installed))
System firmware ROM version
Engine ROM version
Laser
ROM version
Scanner ROM version
PFC
ROM version
RADF ROM version
Finisher ROM version
Inserter
ROM version
Fax board ROM version
FROM basic section software version
FROM internal program
UI data fixed section version
UI data common section
version
Version of UI data language 1 in HDD
Version of UI data language 2 in HDD
Version of UI data language 3 in HDD
Version of UI data language 4 in HDD
Version of UI data language 5 in HDD
Version of UI data language 6 in HDD
Version of UI data in
FROM displayed at powerON
Version of UI data language 7 in HDD
RAM
M
Contents
0: 50C
2: 60C
4: 70C
6: 80C
8: 90C
10: 100C
11: 105C
12: 110C
13: 115C
14: 120C
15: 125C
16: 130C
0: 5C
2: 15C
4: 25C
6: 35C
8: 45C
Procedure
1: 55C
3: 65C
5: 75C
7: 85C
9: 95C
1: 10C
3: 20C
5: 30C
7: 40C
9: 50C
ALL
2
<0-9>
ALL
T390SYXXXXX
ALL
ALL
390M-XXX
390L-XXX
2
2
ALL
ALL
390S-XXX
390F-XXX
2
2
ALL
ALL
ALL
DF-XXXX
SDL-XX FIN-XX
INS-XX
2
2
2
FAX
ALL
F562-XXX
VX.XX/X.XX
2
2
ALL
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
2
2
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
ALL
VXXX.XXX X
2 - 115
Code
Classification
933
934
Version
Version
935
Version
936
Version
937
Version
938
Version
939
Version
944
945
Version
Network
947
General
949
General
950
RAM
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
2
2
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
T390HDXXXXX
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Perform this code when
the software in this
equipment has been
upgraded.
Sets the number of
pages to interrupt the
printing automatically.
0-100: 0 to 100 pages
Sets the start-up
method of the Electronic Filing.
0: Standard
1: Forced start-up (Not
recovered)
2: Forced start-up
(Recovered)
0: Renewed automatically
1: Enter every time
0: Immediately after
the completion of
scanning
1: Cleared by Auto
Clear
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
2
12
UTY
-
0
<0-100>
SYS
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
953
User
interface
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
954
User
interface
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
969
User
interface
User
interface
Error sound
ALL
SYS
ALL
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
PRT
0
<0-3>
SYS
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
970
973
Network
975
General
2 - 116
05/06
Procedure
ALL
Automatic interruption
page setting during black
printing
Contents
SYS
1
1
Code
976
RAM
Contents
SYS
978
Network
PRT
0
<0-6>
SYS
979
Network
PRT
0
<0-39>
SYS
Procedure
1
2 - 117
Code
985
RAM
Contents
SYS
986
General
PPC
0
<0-1>
SYS
988
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
995
Version
ALL
<10 digits>
SYS
999
ALL
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1
<1-2>
SYS
1002
Maintenance
Network
1003
Network
ALL
1
<1-5>
NIC
1006
Network
Method of IP addressing
ALL
2
<1-3>
NIC
1007
Network
Domain name
ALL
NIC
1008
Network
IP address
ALL
NIC
1009
Network
Subnet mask
ALL
NIC
1010
Network
Gateway
ALL
NIC
1011
Network
Availability of IPX
ALL
1
<1-2>
NIC
2 - 118
05/11
NIC
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Available
2: Not available
Procedure
1
11
1
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Code
Classification
1012
Network
Items
Network frame type
1013
Network
ALL
1014
Network
Availability of AppleTalk
ALL
1015
Network
ALL
1016
Network
Availability of LDAP
ALL
1017
Network
Availability of DNS
ALL
1018
Network
1019
Network
1020
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
*
RAM
Contents
NIC
1: Automatic
2: IEEE802.3
3: Ethernet II
4: IEEE802.3SNAP
5: IEEE802.2
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 32 letters
*: Wildcard character
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Invalid
2: Via DHCP
3: Insecure DDNS
4: Secure DDNS
5: Multi-secure DDNS
0: Not edited
1: Account name of
From Address
+Device name
Maximum 15 letters
The network - related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial"
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 127 letters
Maximum 47 letters
1: Available
2: Not available
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
-
ALL
NIC
Network
ALL
1
<1-5>
NIC
1022
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1023
Network
NetBios name
ALL
MFP_seri
al
UTY
1024
Network
ALL
UTY
1025
Network
ALL
UTY
1026
Network
Availability of Bindery
ALL
NIC
1027
Network
Availability of NDS
ALL
1028
1029
1030
Network
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
ALL
1031
Network
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
80
<165535>
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
Procedure
12
2
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2 - 119
05/11
Code
Classification
1032
Network
1037
Network
1038
Network
1039
Network
1040
Network
1041
Network
1042
Network
1043
Network
1044
Network
1045
Network
1046
Network
1047
Network
1048
Network
1049
Network
1050
1051
Network
Network
1052
Network
1055
Network
ALL
1057
1058
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
1059
Network
1060
Network
ALL
1061
1062
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
1063
Network
ALL
1065
Network
ALL
RAM
NIC
NIC
NIC
UTY
05/11
1: Available
2: Not available
12
12
UTY
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 128 Bytes
12
UTY
UTY
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
2 - 120
12
12
5
<0-4096>
110
<165535>
21
<165535>
-
12
ALL
ALL
1
<1-2>
public
12
UTY
NIC
1
<1-2>
21
<165535>
-
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 128 Bytes
UTY
ALL
Procedure
1
NIC
ALL
ALL
Contents
1: Automatic
2: POP3
3: APOP
Maximum 96 letters
Maximum 96 letters
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
NIC
12
UTY
12
SYS
SYS
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
11
11
NIC
1: Available
2: Not available
12
UTY
12
SYS
SYS
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
11
11
NIC
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Maximum 31 letters
12
NIC
12
Code
Classification
1066
Network
1069
Network
1070
Network
1073
RAM
Maximum 31 letters
12
UTY
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
Maximum 31 letters
12
ALL
public
NIC
Network
ALL
NIC
1074
Network
ALL
1075
Network
ALL
1076
Network
ALL
1077
1078
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
1079
Network
ALL
1080
Network
1081
Network
ALL
1
<1-2>
9100
<165535>
1
<1-2>
515
<165535>
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
631
<165535>
MFP_seri
al
1082
1083
1084
Network
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
ALL
1085
Network
ALL
1086
Network
1087
Network
1088
Network
1089
Network
1090
1091
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
1092
Network
Procedure
NIC
Community setting of
TRAP (via IP)
Availability of Raw/TCP
ALL
Contents
1: Valid
2: Invalid
NIC
NIC
NIC
1: Valid
2: Invalid
12
12
12
Maximum 31 letters
1: Valid
2: Invalid
1: Valid
2: Invalid
NIC
12
12
12
12
12
NIC
NIC
NIC
12
12
12
NIC
12
ALL
NIC
12
ALL
NIC
12
ALL
NIC
12
ALL
1
<1-2>
print
-
NIC
1: Available
2: Not available
Maximum 31 letters
Maximum 31 letters
12
ALL
21
<165535>
NIC
12
12
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
NIC
12
12
12
2 - 121
05/11
Code
Classification
1093
Network
1094
Network
1095
Network
1096
Network
1097
Network
1098
Network
1099
Network
1100
Network
ALL
1
<1-6,10>
NIC
1101
Network
ALL
1102
Network
ALL
1103
Network
ALL
1104
Network
ALL
1105
Network
1111
Network
RAM
Procedure
12
ALL
NIC
Maximum 47 letters
The network - related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial"
Maximum 31 letters
ALL
NIC
Maximum 31 letters
12
ALL
5
<1-255>
5
<1-99>
NIC
Unit: Second
12
ALL
ALL
UTY
12
NIC
12
NIC
Maximum 64 letters
12
1
<1-2>
MFP_seri
al
NIC
12
ALL
Refer to
content
NIC
ALL
2
<1-2>
NIC
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Maximum 127 letters
The network - related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial"
Maximum 63 letters
The network - related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial"
<Default value>
e-STUDIO520:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO520_serial
e-STUDIO600:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO600_serial
e-STUDIO720:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO720_serial
e-STUDIO850:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO850_serial
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2 - 122
05/11
UTY
12
1: Valid
2: Invalid
24 letters
(Valid from 0 to 9 and
from A to F)
1: Disable
2: Plain
3: Login
4: Cram-MD5
5: Digest MD5
6: Kerberos
10: Auto
Maximum 64 letters
ALL
2
<1-2>
-
NIC
Contents
UTY
NIC
12
12
12
12
12
12
Code
Classification
1112
Network
1113
Network
1114
Network
1117
Items
Host name
RAM
NIC
ALL
UTY
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
Network
ALL
SYS
1118
1119
General
Network
ALL
ALL
300
<1-9999>
-
SYS
-
1121
Network
ALL
1122
Network
ALL
1123
Network
1124
Network
1125
General
1126
Counter
1128
Network
1129
Network
1130
User
interface
1131
User
interface
1132
1134
Contents
Maximum 63 letters
The network - related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial"
Maximum 128 letters
0: Invalid (Not sending the mail text)
1: Valid (Sending the
mail text)
Unit: Second
Procedure
12
2
12
1
1
3
3
UTY
12
UTY
12
ALL
4
<3-4>
UTY
12
Workgroup name
ALL
UTY
ALL
workgroup
0
<0-1>
3: ON
(Domain selected)
4: OFF
(Work group selected)
Maximum 15 letters
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
0: Invalid
1: Valid
ALL
UTY
Maximum 47 letters
12
ALL
UTY
12
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
ALL
2000
<5-2000>
SYS
General
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
Network
ALL
UTY
12
12
2 - 123
05/11
Code
Classification
1135
Paper
feeding
1136
Network
1137
Network
1138
Network
1139
RAM
SYS
Contents
1: Tandem LCF
2: 1st drawer
3: 2nd drawer
4: 3rd drawer
5: 4th drawer
6: Option LCF
Procedure
1
ALL
13
<8-16>
SYS
ALL
12
<8-20>
0
<0-3>
SYS
8-20 M bytes
SYS
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1140
User
interface
Restriction on template
function by administrator
privilege
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1141
Network
ALL
SYS
1143
Network
ALL
UTY
12
1144
Network
ALL
UTY
Maximum 47 letters
12
1145
Maintenance
(Remote)
ALL
SYS
11
1148
Network
ALL
UTY
1149
General
Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[MONITOR/PAUSE]
button.
Maximum 127 letters
ALL
SYS
1345
Image
quality
control
ALL
0
<0-1>
0
<8 digits>
1371
Image
quality
control
ALL
0
<0-9999>
ALL
2 - 124
05/11
12
1
Code
Classification
1372
Counter
RAM
Contents
1376
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1378
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1380
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1382
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1385
Image
processing
ALL
0
<8 digits>
Procedure
1
2 - 125
Code
Classification
RAM
Contents
Procedure
1
1386
Image
processing
1387
Image
processing
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1388
Image
processing
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1390
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1391
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1392
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1393
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1394
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1395
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1396
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1397
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1398
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1399
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1400
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1401
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
2 - 126
Code
Classification
Items
RAM
Contents
1402
Paper
feeding
1403
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1410
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1412
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
1415
Process
ALL
JPN: 0
Others: 1
<0-1>
1422
Data
overwrite kit
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1424
Data
overwrite kit
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1426
Data
overwrite kit
ALL
Procedure
1
2 - 127
05/11
Code
1427
Classification
Data
overwrite kit
Data
overwrite kit
User
interface
RAM
ALL
Margin width
(Top/Bottom, Left/Right)
ALL
SYS
Margin width
(Bookbinding margin)
ACC
(AT_CASETTE_CHANGE)
for Printer/Box printing
ALL
1431
User
interface
Network
Front: 7/
Back: 7
<2-100/100-100>
14
<2-30>
1
<0-2>
1432
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1433
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1435
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1436
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1437
Paper
feeding
Paper
feeding
ALL
SYS
ALL
0
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
ALL
1<0-1>
SYS
ALL
1
<1-2>
1429
1430
1438
1439
Paper
feeding
1440
Network
ALL
2 - 128
05/11
Procedure
1428
Contents
SYS
SYS
SYS
10
1
0: ACC prohibited
1: Only in the same
paper direction
2: In both same direction and different
directions
0: Normal mode
1: Mode for Private
Print
0: Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)
0: Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)
0: Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted
0: No hole punch
1: Hole punch
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
1
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
12
Code
Classification
1441
Network
SNTP Enable
1442
Network
ALL
1444
Network
1445
Network
1446
Items
RAM
-
ALL
24
<1-168>
-
ALL
Network
ALL
1447
Network
ALL
123
<165535>
-
1448
Network
ALL
1449
Network
ALL
1
<1-4>
1450
Network
ALL
1451
Network
ALL
1464
Network
ALL
1
<1-4>
NIC
1470
General
ALL
General
0
<0-1>
0
<0-5>
SYS
1471
1472
General
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1473
General
ALL
General
0
<0-1>
0
<7 digits>
SYS
1474
ALL
ALL
SYS
SYS
Contents
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Data obtaining interval
(Unit: Hour)
SNTP server IP
Address (Primary)
SNTP server IP
Address (Secondary)
Procedure
12
12
12
12
12
This should be an
account which can control all IPP jobs.
This should be the
password of an account
which can control all
IPP jobs.
1: Disabled
2: Basic
3: Digest
4: Basic Digest
This should be the
account at the time IPP
authentication was performed.
This should be the
password of the
account at the time IPP
authentication was performed.
1: Samba enabled
2: Samba disabled
3: Print Share disabled
4: File Share disabled
0: OFF
1: ON
0: Local
1: NTLM (NT Domain)
2: LDAP
3: Kerberos (Active
Directory)
4: Netware
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
12
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0-9,999,999:
0-9,999,999 sheets
12
12
12
12
12
1
1
2 - 129
05/11
Code
Classification
1476
Network
1477
Network
ALL
0
<0-3>
SYS
1478
User
interface
ALL
User
interface
JPN: 0
UC: 1
<0-1>
5
<1-9>
SYS
1479
1481
General
ALL
1482
General
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1483
General
ALL
1484
Network
Authentication method of
"Scan to Email"
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1485
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1486
Network
ALL
0
<04294967
296>
SYS
ALL
2 - 130
05/06
RAM
Contents
SYS
SYS
1: -4 2: -3
3: -2 4: -1
5: 0 6: +1
7: +2 8: +3 9: +4
All the user data in the
database and backup
files can be deleted.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
* When this code is
set to 1 (Valid), the
department management setting
(08-629) should be
1 (Valid).
The data in the database is overwritten with
the data in the backup
file.
0: Disable
1: SMTP authentication
2: LDAP authentication
0: Not permitted
1: Permitted
Procedure
1
Code
Classification
1487
Network
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: "User name" + @ +
"Domain name"
1: LDAP search
2: Use the address
registered in "From"
field of E-mail setting
1488
Network
ALL
1489
Network
ALL
1491
Network
1492
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1493
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1494
General
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1495
Maintenance
ALL
6
<0-12>
0
<04294967
296>
0
<0-1>
ALL
SYS
SYS
SYS
Procedure
1
2
2
0: Not permitted
1: Permitted
96+2 (delimiter) character
ASCII sequence only
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Function off (No
restriction on data
saving and other
operations)
1: Function on (Data
saving and other
operations have
some restrictions)
0: Checked at every
page printed
1: Checked at every
job printed
0: No checking period
specified (= Calls
service technician
immediately)
0: 10 minutes
1: 30 minutes
3: 1 hour
4: 6 hours
5: 12 hours
6: 24 hours
7: 48 hours
8: 7 days
9: 1 month
10: 1 year
11: 5 years
12: Not limited (= Calls
service technician if
such error has
occurred in the past
even once or more)
1
11
12
2 - 131
05/11
Code
Classification
1496
General
1497
Network
1498
FAX
1519
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: Disables operation
setting for User
authentication/registration
1: Enables operation
setting for User
authentication/registration
0: Mode 1
1: Mode 2
2: Mode 3
0: OFF
(Function disabled)
1: ON
(Function enabled)
The period of rotation
time of the toner transport motor is counted.
(1 count = 12 ms)
0: 0
1: 100
2: 200
3: 500
4: 1000 5: 1500
6: 2000
7: No limit i99999999)
[Unit: Sheets]
Counts the number of
output pages.
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
FAX
1
<0-1>
SYS
Counter
ALL
0
<8 digits>
SYS
1520
User
interface
ALL
3
<0-7>
SYS
1530-0
Counter
Number of
output pages
1-UP /
Duplex
printing
2-UP /
Duplex
printing
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
2-UP /
Simplex
printing
4-UP /
Duplex
printing
4-UP /
Simplex
printing
1-UP /
Duplex
printing
2-UP /
Duplex
printing
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
PPC
0
<8 digits>
SYS
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
PRT
0
<8 digits>
SYS
FAX
0
<8 digits>
SYS
1530-1
1530-2
1530-3
1530-4
1533-0
Counter
1533-1
1535
Counter
Number of
output pages
of the printer
or BOX
2 - 132
05/11
Code
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
Classification
Items
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
ALL
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
ALL
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
RAM
Contents
2: ON
Procedure
1: OFF
12
Maximum 32 letters
12
1
<1-2>
4
<1-7>
12
1
<1-3>
1
<1-5>
1
<1-2>
1
<1-12>
2
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
1
<1-2>
1
<1-11>
1
<1-3>
2
<1-2>
-
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
1: 1
3: 5.5
5: 6
7: 12
9: 24
10: 36
11: 48
12: 54
1: Auto
12
12
12
12
2: 2
4: 11
6: 9
8: 18
12
2: Manual
12
12
1:64
3: 152
1: Hex
2: ASCII
12
Maximum 32 letters
12
Maximum 64 letters
12
1
<1-3>
1
<1-2>
5
<0-1000>
1: Off
2: Max
3: Normal
1: Long 2: Short
12
1
<1-2>
1
<1-3>
1
<1-3>
1: Long
1: All
2: 11b
3: 11g
This setting is whether
the wireless LAN connection is enabled or
disabled.
1: Unset 2: Enabled
3: Disabled
2: 128
12
12
12
2: Longshort
12
12
12
2 - 133
05/11
Code
Classification
RAM
12
12
Wireless
LAN
1681
Wireless
LAN
1682
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1684
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1685
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1686
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1688
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1689
Wireless
LAN
ALL
30
<3065535>
1690
Wireless
LAN
ALL
60
<6065535>
1691
Wireless
LAN
ALL
3
<165535>
1692
Wireless
LAN
ALL
2
<1-2>
2 - 134
Procedure
1680
Contents
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Code
1693
Classification
Wireless
LAN
RAM
Contents
1696
Wireless
LAN
ALL
/dev/
urandom
1697
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1699
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1
<1-3>
1700
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1701
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1
<1-2>
0
<0-7>
1
<1-2>
1704
Wireless
LAN
ALL
0
<0-720>
1705
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1
<1-2>
1706
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1
<1-2>
1702
1703
ALL
ALL
Procedure
12
2
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2 - 135
1707
Wireless
LAN
1708
User
interface
ALL
1
<1-3>
1709
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Installation status of option
Bluetooth
ON/OFF setting
Bluetooth
Device name
Bluetooth
Discovery
Bluetooth
Security
ALL
0
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
MFP
SYS
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
SYS
1714
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
PIN
ALL
0000
SYS
1715
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
Data encryption
ALL
1
<0-1>>
SYS
1716
Bluetooth
ALL
6<1-50>
SYS
1717
Bluetooth
ALL
6<1-50>
SYS
1720
Network
Bluetooth
HCRP reception time-out
period
Bluetooth
HCRP transmission timeout period
IP address range for IP filter
(Minimum area 1)
0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
0: Security function
OFF
1: Security function
ON
Maximum 8 digits
(8-digit sequence)
This setting is valid only
when the bluetooth
security function is ON.
0: Not encrypted
1: Encrypted
This setting is valid only
when the bluetooth
security function is ON.
Setting value ~ 0.5 sec.
ALL
12
1721
Network
ALL
Code
1710
1711
1712
1713
Classification
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
2 - 136
05/06
Procedure
RAM
Contents
12
SYS
SYS
SYS
12
1
1
11
11
12
Code
Classification
1722
Network
RAM
Contents
1723
Network
ALL
1724
Network
ALL
1725
Network
ALL
1726
Network
ALL
1727
Network
ALL
1728
Network
ALL
1729
Network
ALL
1730
Network
ALL
1731
Network
ALL
Procedure
12
2
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2 - 137
Code
Classification
1732
Network
1733
Network
ALL
1734
Network
ALL
1735
Network
ALL
1736
Network
ALL
1737
Network
ALL
1738
Network
ALL
1739
Network
ALL
1740
Network
ALL
2
<1-2>
1741
Network
SSL setting
HTTP server OFF/ON setting
SSL setting
HTTP server port number
ALL
1742
Network
ALL
1743
Network
SSL setting
IPP server OFF/ON setting
SSL setting
IPP server port number
10443
<165535>
2
<1-2>
443
<165535>
ALL
2 - 138
05/06
Procedure
RAM
Contents
12
12
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
SSL IPP server port
number
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Code
Classification
1744
Network
1745
Network
SSL setting
SSL ftp server Port
ALL
1746
Network
SSL setting
SSL LDAP Client OFF/ON
ALL
1747
Network
SSL setting
SSL LDAP Client Port
ALL
1748
Network
SSL setting
SSL POP3 Client OFF/ON
ALL
1749
Network
SSL setting
SSL POP3 Client Port
ALL
1750
Network
SSL setting
SSL SMTP Client OFF/ON
ALL
1751
Network
SSL setting
SSL SMTP Client Port
ALL
1755
Network
Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
ALL
1756
Network
Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
1757
Network
1759
Network
RAM
-
990
<165535>
2
<1-2>
636
<165535>
2
<1-2>
995
<165535>
2
<2-4>
465
<165535>
2
<1-2>
ALL
2
<1-2>
Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
ALL
1
<1-2>
Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
ALL
2
<1-2>
Contents
Procedure
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Port number to FTP
Server
12
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Port number to LDAP
Server
12
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Port number to POP3
Server
12
2: Invalid
3: SMTP with TLS
(STARTTLS)
4: SMTPS (SMTP
OverSSL)
Port number to SMTP
Server
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2 - 139
05/11
Code
Classification
1760
Network
1762
Network
Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
ALL
2
<1-2>
1763
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1764
Wireless
LAN
ALL
1765
Wireless
LAN
1766
Wireless
LAN
1767
Network
1768
Network
1778
Procedure
RAM
Contents
12
12
ALL
Maximum 63 letters
12
ALL
Maximum 63 letters
12
ALL
2
<1-2>
SYS
12
Previous IP address
ALL
General
ALL
1
<0-7>
SYS
1779
Network
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
1781-0
Network
Notification of
scan job
ALL
SYS
1781-1
Network
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
When job
completed
On error
ALL
2 - 140
05/11
SYS
12
12
12
4
4
Code
Classification
1782
Network
RAM
Contents
SYS
1783
Network
ALL
0
<0-4>
SYS
1784
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1785
Network
ALL
4
<4-6>
SYS
1786
Network
ALL
3
<3-6>
SYS
Procedure
1
2 - 141
Code
Classification
1804
Fuser
1808
Image
quality
control
1809
Image
quality
control
Image
quality
control
Image
quality
control
Image
quality
control
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
Image
quality
control
Image
quality
control
RAM
M
Contents
Procedure
0: 140C 1: 145C
2: 150C 3: 155C
4: 160C 5: 165C
6: 170C 7: 175C
8: 180C 9: 185C
10: 190C
11: 195C
12: 200C
13: 205C
14: 210C
Unit: Second
ALL
10
<0-99>
ALL
0
<0-1>
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
ALL
0
<0-1>
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
ALL
0
<0-1>
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
ALL
0
<0-16>
ALL
0
<0-1>
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
ALL
5
<0-10>
1815
Image
quality
control
ALL
4
<0-10>
1820
Image
quality
control
ALL
535
<0-999>
1821
Image
quality
control
ALL
190
<0-999>
2 - 142
Code
1824
Classification
Image
quality
control
RAM
M
Contents
Procedure
1825
Image
quality
control
ALL
Refer to
contents
<0-1500>
1826
Image
quality
control
ALL
0
<0-1>
1827
Image
quality
control
ALL
0
<0-1>
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1828
Image
quality
control
ALL
0
<0-1>
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1829
Image
quality
control
ALL
0
<0-1>
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
1830
Image
quality
control
ALL
0
<0-1>
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2 - 143
Code
Classification
RAM
Contents
0: 30C
1: 35C
2: 40C
3: 45C
4: 50C
5: 55C
6: 60C
7: 65C
8: 70C
9: 75C
10: 80C
11: 85C
12: 90C
13: 95C
14: 100C
15: 105C
16: 110C
17: 115C
18: 120C
19: 125C
20: 130C
0: -100
1: -80
2: -60
3: -40
4: -20
5: 0
6: +20
7: +40
8: +60
9: +80
10: +100
[Unit: V]
<Default value>
e-STUDIO520
UC, EUR: 6
e-STUDIO600
JPN: 5 UC, EUR: 6
e-STUDIO720
JPN: 5 UC, EUR: 6
e-STUDIO850
JPN: 5 UC, EUR: 6
0: -50
1: -40
2: -30
3: -20
4: -10
5:0
6: +10
7: +20
8: +30
9: +40
10: +50
0: -150
1: -120
2: -90
3: -60
4: -30
5: 0
6: +30
7: +60
8: +90
9: +120
10: +150
<Default value>
e-STUDIO520: 5
e-STUDIO600: 5
e-STUDIO720: 5
e-STUDIO850: 5 (6 for
NAD only)
0: Disabled
1-255: 1-255 sec.
0: Control OFF
1: Table 1 applied
2: Table 2 applied
Procedure
1
1831
Image
quality
control
1833
Image
quality
control
ALL
Refer to
contents
<0-10>
1834
Image
quality
control
ALL
5
<0-10>
1835
Image
quality
control
ALL
Refer to
contents
<0-10>
1836
Process
ALL
1837
Image
quality
control
Paper
feeding
ALL
0
<0-255>
0
<0-2>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
1900-0
1900-1
ALL
ALL
2 - 144
05/06
1
1
Code
1901
Classification
RAM
1907
Paper
feeding
General
1908
General
1909
1910
Paper
feeding
Image
quality
control
1915
Network
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1920
Network
ALL
1921
Network
ALL
1922
Network
1923
Network
1924
Network
1925
Network
Contents
0: Accelerated
1: Low speed
Procedure
1
1
2
M
M
1
1
1
UTY
0: Always ON
1: Performs the toner
supply opening
upward control only
when the available
number of outputs
using the remaining
toner is between
2,000 and 5,000
sheets. (However, if
the value "0" (OFF)
is set at 08-1415,
the operation will be
the same as when
the value "2"
(Always OFF) is set
in this setting.)
2: Always OFF
* When in the toner
empty status, the
toner supply opening upward control
is always performed regardless
of this setting.
0: Eliminates 2 mm
from circumference
(Void: 2 mm)
1: No space eliminated
(Void: 0 mm)
Maximum 128 letters
12
UTY
12
ALL
UTY
12
ALL
1
<1-2>
-
NIC
1: Windows Server
2: Not Windows Server
Sets a user attribute
name.
0: Forcible execution
1: Execution impossible (pooled in the
invalid queue)
2: Forcible deletion
12
ALL
ALL
2
<0-2>
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Setting value X 10msec
NIC
SYS
12
1
2 - 145
05/11
Code
Classification
1926
FAX
1928
Network
ALL
1936
Network
ALL
1937
Network
1938
General
1950
Network
RAM
Contents
SYS
0
<04294967
295>
MFP_seri
al
SYS
ALL
0
<0-2>
SYS
ALL
2
<0-2>
ALL
1
<1-3>
UTY
2 - 146
05/11
UTY
Procedure
1
Maximum 32 letters
The Network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"Serial".
0: User name and
password of the
device
1: User name and
password at the
user authentication
(Template registration information
comes first when a
template is
retrieved.)
2: User name and
password at the
user authentication
(User information of
the authentication
comes first when a
template is
retrieved.)
Use this setting to reformat the specific partition whose file system
has been changed in
Ver.2, at the version up/
downgrade of the SYS
ROM.
No reformatting process shall be used in
any cases other than
this version change.
0: Waiting (No reformatting)
1: dosFs to catFs (Version upgrade from
Ver.1 to Ver.2 or
later)
2: catFs to dosFs (Version downgrade
from Ver.2 or later to
Ver.1)
1: Auto
2: Valid
3: Invalid
12
12
Code
Classification
1951
Network
1952
Network
1953
Network
1954
Network
1955
Network
1956
Network
1957
Network
1958
Network
1959
Network
RAM
UTY
Contents
Procedure
12
ALL
UTY
1: Auto
2: Valid
3: Invalid
Maximum 128 letters
ALL
UTY
12
ALL
UTY
12
ALL
UTY
12
ALL
UTY
12
ALL
UTY
12
ALL
UTY
12
ALL
UTY
12
12
2 - 147
05/11
Code
Classification
Contents
SYS
1500
Pixel
counter
1501
Pixel
counter
ALL
SYS
1502
Pixel
counter
ALL
SYS
1503
Pixel
counter
ALL
SYS
1504
Pixel
counter
ALL
1
<0-1>
SYS
1505
Pixel
counter
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1506
Pixel
counter
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1507
Pixel
counter
ALL
400
<0-999>
SYS
1508
Pixel
counter
ALL
17550
<060000>
SYS
1509
Pixel
counter
ALL
0
<0-1>
SYS
1510
Pixel
counter
ALL
SYS
1514
Pixel
counter
ALL
SYS
1518
Pixel
counter
ALL
SYS
2 - 148
Procedure
RAM
Code
1548
Classification
Pixel
counter
RAM
Contents
SYS
1550
Pixel
counter
PRT
<8 digits>
SYS
1551
Pixel
counter
FAX
<8 digits>
SYS
1553
Pixel
counter
PPC
<8 digits>
SYS
1555
Pixel
counter
PRT
<8 digits>
SYS
1556
Pixel
counter
FAX
<8 digits>
SYS
1566
Pixel
counter
ALL
<3 digits>
SYS
1592
Pixel
counter
PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
1593
Pixel
counter
PRT
0
<010000>
SYS
Procedure
2
2
2
2 - 149
Code
Classification
RAM
Contents
SYS
1594
Pixel
counter
1595
Pixel
counter
PPC/
PRT/
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1606
Pixel
counter
PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
1607
Pixel
counter
PRT
0
<010000>
SYS
1608
Pixel
counter
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1613
Pixel
counter
PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
1619
Pixel
counter
PRT
0
<010000>
SYS
1624
Pixel
counter
PPC/
PRT/
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1625
Pixel
counter
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1634
Pixel
counter
FAX
0
<010000>
SYS
1639
Pixel
counter
PPC
0
<010000>
SYS
2 - 150
05/06
Procedure
2
Code
1640
Classification
Pixel
counter
1649-0
1649-1
1649-2
1649-3
1649-4
1649-5
1649-6
1649-7
1649-8
1649-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
1650-0
1650-1
1650-2
1650-3
1650-4
1650-5
1650-6
1650-7
1650-8
1650-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
1651-0
1651-1
1651-2
1651-3
1651-4
1651-5
1651-6
1651-7
1651-8
1651-9
Pixel
counter
Pixel count
distribution
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
0-5%
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
80.1100%
RAM
Contents
SYS
Procedure
2
2
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
PPC
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
FAX
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
<8 digits>
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
2 - 151
2 - 152
Items
Photoconductive drum
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
1151
Remarks
<Default value of code 1150
(e-STUDIO520/600/720/850)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000
575,000/600,000
Sub-code 4: 495,000/495,000/
495,000/410,000
1158-0 to 8
1159
1166-0 to 8
1167
1172-0 to 8
1173
1174-0 to 8
1175
1182-0 to 8
1183
1190-0 to 8
1191
Ozone filter
1198-0 to 8
1199
2 - 153
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Developer material
1200-0 to 8
1201
Toner filter
1208-0 to 8
1209
1212-0 to 5, 8
1213
1228-0 to 8
1229
1232-0 to 5, 8
1233
1234-0 to 5, 8
1235
Fuser roller
1246-0 to 8
1247
Pressure roller
1250-0 to 8
1251
Items
Transfer belt
2 - 154
Remarks
Items
Cleaning web
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
1252-0 to 8
1253
Remarks
<Default value of code 1252
(e-STUDIO520/600/720/850)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8: 0/0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/
575,000/600,000
Sub-code 4: 470,000/470,000/
470,000/390,000
Sub-code 7: 1/1/1/1
1254-0 to 8
1255
1268-0 to 8
1269
Pickup belt
(RADF)
1282-0,1,2,8
1283
Feed roller
(RADF)
1284-0,1,2,8
1285
Separation roller
(RADF)
1286-0,1,2,8
1287
Pickup roller
(Tandem LCF)
1288-0,1,2,8
1289
Pickup roller
(1st drawer)
1290-0,1,2,8
1291
Pickup roller
(2nd drawer)
1292-0,1,2,8
1293
Pickup roller
(Option LCF)
1294-0,1,2,8
1295
2 - 155
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Feed roller
(Tandem LCF)
1296-0,1,2,8
1297
Feed roller
(1st drawer)
1298-0,1,2,8
1299
Feed roller
(2nd drawer)
1300-0,1,2,8
1301
Feed roller
(Option LCF)
1302-0,1,2,8
1303
Separation roller
(Tandem LCF)
1304-0,1,2,8
1305
Separation roller
(1st drawer)
1306-0,1,2,8
1307
Separation roller
(2nd drawer)
1308-0,1,2,8
1309
Separation roller
(Option LCF)
1310-0,1,2,8
1311
Separation roller
(3rd drawer)
1312-0,1,2,8
1313
Separation roller
(4th drawer)
1314-0,1,2,8
1315
Separation roller
(Bypass feed)
1316-0,1,2,8
1317
Items
2 - 156
Remarks
Date of previous
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Feed roller
(3rd drawer)
1320-0,1,2,8
1321
Feed roller
(4th drawer)
1322-0,1,2,8
1323
Feed roller
(Bypass feed)
1324-0,1,2,8
1325
Pickup roller
(3rd drawer)
1328-0,1,2,8
1329
Pickup roller
(4th drawer)
1330-0,1,2,8
1331
Pickup roller
(Bypass feed)
1332-0,1,2,8
1333
1338-0 to 8
1339
Items
Remarks
2 - 157
Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
Key in the code 257 with the digital keys and press the [START] button (the following is displayed).
Note:
Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.
Fig.2-3
(3)
Key in the value 1 or 2 with the digital key and press the [START] button.
The value entered is displayed on the left of the %, and the [ENTER] button is displayed.
Note:
The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] button is not pressed. (The value on the left of the % is reset to 0 by pressing the [CLEAR] button.)
(A)
(B)
Fig.2-4
2 - 158
(A)
(B)
Fig.2-5
(4)
Note:
The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the
[CANCEL] button is pressed.
2 - 159
2.2.6
Pixel counter
1) Outline
Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the
print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This Print ratio (%) per standard paper size is called Pixel
count (%).
This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of
toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge).
2 - 160
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
The general relations between the 4 factors mentioned in the previous page and toner consumption
per output page in the Copier Function are as follows:
Toner consumption
Original density
Toner consumption
Original coverage
TEXT
/PHOTO
TEXT
PHOTO
Original mode
Density setting
Fig.2-6 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency
2 - 161
2 - 162
2
Ex.)
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
! Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
! Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
! Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4
Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of laser emission
Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of laser emission
! Pixel count: 5%, Print count: 4
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
! Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of laser emission
! Pixel count: 6%, Print count: 4
2 - 163
Copier function
"
"
Printer function
"
"
FAX function
"
"
Total
"
"
2 - 164
X/2
X/10
60%
6% 12%
2 - 165
05/06
The following screen is displayed when the toner cartridge reference is selected in the setting
mode (08-1505).
The following screen is displayed when the service technician reference is selected in the setting
mode (08-1505).
2 - 166
05/06
2004.7.11 09:55
TONERCARTRIDGE
No DATE
0 20040711
1 20040711
2 20040711
PPC
12345
12345
12345
PRN
23456
23456
23456
FAX
12345
12345
12345
TOTAL
45678
45678
45678
FAX
12345
12345
12345
TOTAL
45678
45678
45678
PPC
12345
12345
12345
PRN
23456
23456
23456
2 - 167
05/06
Print count
(page)
1553
1548
1613
1592
1639
1606
1555
1550
1619
1593
1640
1607
1556
1551
1625
1594
1634
1608
1624
1595
Copier
function
Printer
function
FAX
function
Total
1649
Printer function
1650
FAX function
1651
Note:
By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed dividing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows.
0: 0 - 5%
1: 5.1 - 10%
2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25%
5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100%
2 - 168
05/06
Other information
Toner cartridge replacement counter
The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed. (08-1566)
Toner cartridge reference count started date
The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed. (08-1518)
Service technician reference cleared date
The service technician reference cleared date is displayed.(08-1510)
The date (08-1502 was performed) is stored.
Toner cartridge reference cleared date
The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed.
The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored.
2 - 169
05/06
2.2.7
Classification
User interface
Scanner
FAX
2 - 170
05/11
Classification
Image
Image control
Drive system
2 - 171
Classification
Feeding system
Laser
Main charger
Developer
Transfer
[Cleaning] 418
[Auto-toner] 414
Fuser
Image processing
RADF
Finisher
[Switchback] 462
[Stapling] 704-0 to 1
2 - 172
Classification
Network
2 - 173
05/11
Classification
Network
Wireless LAN
Bluetooth
Counter
Version
[HDD] 944
[ROM] 900, 903, 904, 905, 906, 907, 908, 909,
915
[System] 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926,
927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933, 934, 935, 936,
937, 938, 939
2 - 174
05/11
Classification
Maintenance
Scrambler
board
[HDD]699
[Key code] 698
[Installation] 696
Electronic Filing
Data overwrite
kit
[FRAM] 1427
[HDD] 1422, 1424, 1426
[SRAM] 1428
[Releasing F200] 633
General
2 - 175
05/11
2 - 176
3.
ADJUSTMENT
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the [ENERGY
SAVER] button for a few seconds.
3.1
When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure.
Note:
Check if the cleaning blade is pressed against the drum before performing this adjustment.
<Procedure> (Adjustment Mode (05-200))
(1)
(2)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
The following message will be displayed.
[0][5]
[POWER]
A3
100%
TEST MODE
Fig.3-1
(3)
230%
[200]
[START]
200
A3
TEST MODE
128
128
C
Fig.3-2
Notes:
A indicates the controlled value of the auto-toner sensor output.
B indicates the output voltage of the auto-toner sensor (2.30 V in the above case).
The drum, developer unit, etc. are in operation.
C indicates the latest adjustment value.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3-1
05/05
(4)
After about two minutes and 30 seconds, the value B automatically starts changing.
230%
A3
200
TEST MODE
WAIT
128
128
Fig.3-3
(5)
After a short time, the value B becomes stable and the display changes as follows.
B
240%
A3
200
ADJUSTMENT MODE
150
128
A
Fig.3-4
(6)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. The drum, developer unit, etc. are stopped and the
following is displayed.
The drum, developer unit, etc. are stopped and the following is displayed.
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
100%
A3
TEST MODE
Fig.3-5
(7)
Humidity(%)
0 to 29.9
2.46
30.0 to 44.9
2.48
45.0 to 59.9
2.50
60.0 to 74.9
2.64
75.0 to 100
2.78
(8)
Key in code [290] and press the [START] button. When the message "WAIT" goes off, turn the
power OFF by shutdown.
(9)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3-2
05/05
3.2
3.2.1
There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.
Item to be adjusted
1
Printer related
adjustment
Scanner related
adjustment
Code in mode 05
448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457,
458, 460, 461, 462, 463, 469,
470, 471, 472, 473, 474, 480
401
411
488
498
405
306
340
305
430
432
433
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3-3
<Operation keys>
<Display>
100%
0
A3
TEST MODE
POWER
1
Code No.
XXX
100%
START
A3
TEST MODE
Digital keys : Enter adjustment
values.
( CLEAR Use to make corrections)
ENTER Value ZZZ is stored
Test copy
YYY
ZZZ
A3
A3
A3
TEST MODE
100%
Wait Warming Up
100%
COPYING
Fig.3-6
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3-4
3.2.2
Fig.3-7
(2)
Fig.3-8
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3-5
(3)
Fig.3-9
(4)
Fig.3-10
(5)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3-6
2nd
drawer
3rd
drawer
4th
drawer
Tandem
LCF
Duplexing
(ADU)
Option
LCF
Bypass
feed(SFB)
64-80 g/m2
17-20 lb.
450 (*1)
452 (*1)
448 (*1)
449 (*1)
457
455 (*1)
458 (*1)
Thick
paper 1
81-105g/m2
21-28 lb.
469 (*1)
470 (*1)
471 (*1)
472 (*1)
473-0
474 (*1)
460 (*1)
Thick
paper 2
106-163g/m2
29-43 lb.
473-1
461 (*1)
Thick
paper 3
164-209g/m2
44-55 lb.
473-2
462 (*1)
OHP
473-3
463 (*2)
Paper
type
Weight
Plain
paper
Sub-code
(*1) 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size1 3:Short size 4:Post card
(*2) 0: Long size of OHP film 1: Middle size of OHP film 2: Short size1 of OHP film
3: Short size 2 of OHT film 4:Post card size of OHP film
Notes:
1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer)
Middle size: 220-239 mm (8.7-12.9 inches)
Short size1: 205-219 mm (8.1-8.6 inches)
Short size2: 160-204 mm (6.3-8.0 inches)
Post card: 159 mm or shorter (6.2 inches or shorter)
2. The adjustment of Post card is for Japan only.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3-7
<Procedure>
(1)
[0][5]
[Power]
(Code)
[START]
(Sub-code)
[START]
[SET] or
[INTERRUPT]
Stores in memory
[Drawer
selection]
Enter new
value
Current value
displayed
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
(*3) +[FAX]
(Test print)
Transfer void
mm
00
mm
-1
50
Fig.3-11
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3-8
3.2.3
The printer related adjustment is performed by using the printed out grid pattern.
1
21
A
6
B, E
26
Feeding direction
Adjustment
Tolerance
200 0.5mm
B
C
52 0.5mm
200 0.5mm
D
E
52 0.5mm
52 0.5mm
Detail of adjustment
Refer to [A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of
polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer))
Refer to [B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)
Refer to [C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment
of transfer belt motor rotation speed (Copier/Printer))
Refer to [D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
Refer to [E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3-9
05/11
[A]
Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation
speed (Printer))
<Procedure>
(1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ! (Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Press [1] ! [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD in the 2nd/4th
drawer.
(3)
Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance A from the 1st line
to the 21st line of the grid pattern.
(4)
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.
(Adjustment Mode) ! (Key in code [401]) ! [START]
! (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
! [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
! 100% A is displayed
! Press [1] ! [FAX] ! (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes.
(e-STUDIO 520/600/720: 0.3 mm/step, e-STUDIO 850: 0.1 mm/step)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ! (Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Press [1] ! [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD in the 2nd/4th
drawer.
(3)
Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance B from the left edge
of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4)
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.
(Adjustment Mode) ! (Key in the code [411]) ! [START]
! (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
! [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
! 100% A is displayed
! Press [1] ! [FAX] ! (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.05 mm/
step).
(6)
After the adjustment for the code 411 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the
code 410.
3 - 10
[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of transfer belt motor rotation
speed (Copier/Printer))
<Procedure>
(1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ! (Adjustment mode)
(2)
Press [1] ! [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD in the 2nd/4th
drawer.
(3)
Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance C from the 6th line
at the leading edge of the paper to the 26th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
(4)
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.
Image location of all paper sources can be adjusted in the Adjustment mode (05-408)
For 4 drawers
Order for
adjustment
Paper source
Code
Paper size
Acceptable
value
1st drawer
440
A4/LT
0 to 40
2nd drawer
441
A3/LT
0 to 40
3rd drawer
444
A4/LT
0 to 40
4th drawer
428
A4/LD
0 to 40
LCF
443
A4/LT
0 to 40
Bypass feed
442
A3/LD
0 to 40
Duplexing
445
A3/LD
0 to 40
All
408
0 to 80
Remarks
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 11
Paper source
Code
Paper size
Acceptable
value
1st drawer
440
A4
0 to 40
2nd drawer
441
A3
0 to 40
Tandem LCF
429
A4
0 to 40
LCF
443
A4
0 to 40
Bypass feed
442
A3
0 to 40
Duplexing
445
A3
0 to 40
All
408
0 to 80
Remarks
<Procedure>
(1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ! (Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) ! [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)
(3)
Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance D from the leading
edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
* At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern.
(4)
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
(Adjustment Mode) ! (Key in the code shown above) ! [START]
! (Key in an acceptable value shown above)
! [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
! 100% A is displayed
! Press [1] ([3] for duplexing)! [FAX] ! (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.4 mm/step).
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 12
[E]
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ! (Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Press [3] ! [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD in the 2nd/4th
drawer.
(3)
Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4)
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
(Adjustment Mode) ! (Key in code [498]) ! [START] ! [0] ! [START]
! (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
! [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
! 100% A is displayed.
! Press [3] ! [FAX]#!#(A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (0.05 mm/step).
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ! (Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Press [3] ! [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT in the 1st
drawer/tandem LCF.
(3)
Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4)
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
(Adjustment Mode) ! (Key in the code [498]) ! [START] ! [1] ! [START]
! (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
! [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
! 100% A is displayed
! Press [3] ! [FAX] ! (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (0.05 mm/step).
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 13
C:
D:
E:
3.2.4
Make a copy, compare the result with the original and make an adjustment if the image is distorted.
[A]
Image distortion
Feeding direction
Step 1
Feeding direction
Step 2
Fig.3-13
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 14
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Carriage-2
Fig.3-14
Carriage-1
Fig.3-15
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 15
(2)
Place a ruler on the original glass (along the direction from the rear to the front of the equipment).
(3)
Press [COPY] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the distance A from 10 mm to 210 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(5)
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode) ! (Key in the code [405]) ! [START]
! (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
! Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
! (100% A is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the higher the reproduction ratio and the longer the distance A become.
(e-STUDIO 520/600/720: 0.3 mm/step, e-STUDIO 850: 0.1 mm/step)
200
250
(1)
50
100
150
Feeding direction
Fig.3-16
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 16
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ! (Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the rear side and its side
along the original scale on the left.
(3)
Press [COPY] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to 100 mm of the copied image of the
ruler.
(5)
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
50
100
150
200
Feeding direction
Fig.3-17
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 17
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ! (Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
(3)
Press [COPY] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the distance C from 10 mm to 210 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(5)
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode) ! (Key in the code [340]) ! [START]
! (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
! Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
! (100% A is displayed.)
* The smaller the adjustment value is, the lower the reproduction ratio becomes (0.46 mm/
step).
Copied image of the ruler
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
Feeding direction
Fig.3-18
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 18
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ! (Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
(3)
Press [COPY] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the
ruler.
(5)
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
10
20
30
40
Feeding direction
Fig.3-19
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 19
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ! (Adjustment Mode)
(2)
(3)
Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.
(5)
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode) ! (Key in the code [430]) ! [START]
! (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
! Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
! (100% A is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
Feeding direction
Fig.3-20
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 20
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ! (Adjustment Mode)
(2)
(3)
Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.
(5)
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode) ! (Key in the code [432]) ! [START]
! (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
! Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
! (100% A is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
Fig.3-21
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 21
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ! (Adjustment Mode)
(2)
(3)
Press the [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.
(5)
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
(Adjustment Mode) ! (Key in the code [433]) ! [START]
! (Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
! Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
! (100% A is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
Fig.3-22
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 22
3.3
3.3.1
Density adjustment
The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as
follows.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
503
(931)
501
(933)
504
(932)
505
(934)
506
(936)
507
(935)
508
(937)
509
(939)
510
(938)
514
(940)
512
(942)
515
(941)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. ! The equipment goes back to
the ready state.
(5)
Shut down (turn the power OFF), back ON, and then perform the copying job.
(6)
If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 23
3.3.2
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
593
(943)
594
(945)
595
(944)
Remarks
1 to 9: Select the gamma slope
angle. (The larger the value
is, the larger the angle
becomes.)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of
3.3.3
Background adjustment
Background of the gamma data can be adjusted with the following codes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
600
(946)
602
(947)
601
(948)
3.3.4
Background adjustment
Remarks
1 to 9: The larger the value is, the
background becomes lighter.
Sharpness adjustment
If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be
adjusted
Photo
Text/Photo
Dither process
Text
620
(922)
621-0
(924-0)
621-1
(924-1)
622
(923)
Sharpness
adjustment
Remarks
21
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 24
3.3.5
The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction can be switched to varied or
fixed in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affect the reproduction of the background density and the values of
the text peak affect that of the text density.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
570
(913)
571
(915)
572
(914)
693
(916)
694
(918)
695
(917)
Remarks
The following are the default values
set for each original mode.
Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 22
Each digit stands for:
Ones place: Automatic density mode
Tens place: Manual density mode
The setting conditions possible are
as follows:
Background peak
Text peak
1:
fixed
fixed
2:
varied
fixed
3:
fixed
varied
4:
varied
varied
3.3.6
The levels of the background peak for the range correction can be set at the following codes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
532
(919)
533
(921)
534
(920)
Remarks
When the value increases, the background (low density area) of the
image is not output.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: Text/Photo: 40, Photo: 16,
Text: 64)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 25
3.3.7
Remarks
Text/Photo
653
(928)
Adjustment of smudged/faint
spotted text
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 26
3.4
3.4.1
PCL
654
655
When the value increases, the smudged text is improved. When the value
decreases, the faint text is improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (Default: 5)
<Procedure>
(1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
(5)
Shut down (turn the power OFF), back ON, and then perform the printing job.
(6)
If the desired text density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
3.4.2
The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at the Black Mode. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Language and screen
Item to be adjusted
Smooth
(PS)
Detail
(PS)
Smooth
(PCL)
Detail
(PCL)
596-0
597-0
598-0
599-0
Low density
596-1
597-1
598-1
599-1
Medium density
596-2
597-2
598-2
599-2
High density
Remarks
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 27
<Procedure>
(1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2)
Key in the codes to be adjusted (language and screen) and press the [START] button.
(3)
Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the
[START] button.
0: Low density (L) 1: Medium density (M) 2: High density (H)
(4)
Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.)
(5)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(6)
(7)
(8)
If the image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).
3.4.3
Adjust the image density level when normal printing (Toner save: Disable) and (Toner save: Enable).
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Normal
Toner Saving
mode
PS/PCL
PS
PCL
663
664
665
Item to be adjusted
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of
Remarks
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 28
3.5
3.5.1
Density adjustment
Adjusts the center density and the variation of density adjustment button.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Item to be
adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Gray Scale
845
847
846
848
Manual density
mode center value
850
852
851
853
Manual density
mode light step
value
855
857
856
858
Manual density
mode dark step
value
860
862
861
863
Automatic density
mode
<Procedure>
(1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
(5)
Shut down (turn the power OFF), back ON, and then perform the scanning job.
(6)
If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 29
3.5.2
Sharpness adjustment
If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Gray Scale
Item to be
adjusted
865-0
867-0
866-0
868-0
865-1
867-1
866-1
868-1
865-2
867-2
866-2
600 dpi
Remarks
Key in the following values
depending on the original mode.
Ones place
Leave the value in ones place at
the fixed value.
Tens place
1 to 9: Change intensity
The larger the value is, the
sharper the image becomes.)
Example of value entry in
case the mode is Text/
Photo.
21
<Procedure>
(1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2)
(3)
Key in the sub code (0,1 or 2), and press the [START] button.
(4)
(5)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(6)
(7)
Shut down (turn the power OFF), back ON, and then perform the scanning job.
(8)
If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 30
3.5.3
The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction can be switched to varied or
fixed in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affect the reproduction of the background density and the values of
the text peak affect that of the text density.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Gray Scale
825
827
826
828
830
832
831
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of
3.5.4
Item to be
adjusted
Range correction
for original manually set on the original glass
833
Range correction
for original set on
the RADF
Remarks
The following are the default values set for each original mode.
Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text:
12, Gray Scale:12
Each digit stands for:
Ones place: Automatic density
mode
Tens place: Manual density
mode
The setting conditions possible
are as follows:
Background peak
Text peak
1: fixed
fixed
2: varied
fixed
3: fixed
varied
4: varied
varied
The levels of the background peak for the range correction can be set at the following codes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Gray Scale
835
837
836
838
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of
Item to be
adjusted
Background peak
for range correction
Remarks
When the value increases, the
background (low density area) of
the image is not output.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: text/photo: 40, photo:
16, text: 48, Gray Scale:16)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 31
3.5.5
Background adjustment
Background of the gamma data can be adjusted with the following codes.
< Adjustment Mode (05) >
Original mode
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Gray Scale
869
871
870
872
Item to be
adjusted
Background
adjustment
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
Remarks
1 to 9:
The larger the value is, the background becomes lighter.
3 - 32
3.6
The high-voltage transformer does not need to be adjusted, however, when you check each value of
the main charger bias and the developer bias, it needs to be measured.
Note:
When carrying out the operation, be careful not to touch the electronic section because it is high
voltage.
3.6.1
Measurement
[ 1 ] Preparation
Items to check
Process Unit
Digital
Tester
Main Charger
Take off from the equipment
Function switch
Full-scale (range)
Remarks
Developer Bias
1000 V
Use a digital tester with an input resistance of 10 M# (RMS value) or higher.
Attach the door switch jig and start with the adjustment mode [05] while the
front cover opened.
[ 2 ] Installing Jig
(1)
(2)
Fig.3-23
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 33
05/04
[ 3 ] Connection
(1)
Fig.3-24
(2)
Fig.3-25
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 34
[ 4 ] Operation
Connect the digital testers as described in [3] Connection, and follow the procedure on the next
page to measure the output from the main charger and developer bias charger.
<Keys to press>
<Display>
A3
XXX
A3
100%
[0][5]
[POWER]
TEST MODE
100%
Code No.
TEST MODE
[START]
YYY
Current set value
Check that the measured value satisfies the following table.
Code
Default value
Output value
Developer bias
205
113 (bit)
-39422V
Main charger
210
102 (bit)
50022V
[CANCEL]
100%
A3
TEST MODE
Return to 1 to enter the
other adjustment code.
[POWER] : OFF
Disconnect the digital testers and return the equipment to its original state.
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital keys] : 290
[START]
[POWER] : After the message "WAIT" has disappeared, turn the power OFF and then back ON.
Fig.3-26
Note:
If the output value does not reach a specified level, replace the high-voltage transformer.
Remark:
Transfer bias ON timing adjustment(Not essential)
Depending on the environmental condition or the paper type, transfer ability for the paper leading edge
may decrease slightly and the poor image transfer may occur.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 35
In this case, the image quality can be improved by adjusting the leading edge void width wider. Also, it
can be improved by changing the transfer bias ON timing using the setting code 08-841.
* When using the setting code 08-841 to improve the image quality, increase the value by one and
check the result. If the result is not sufficient, repeat the same procedure.
(The transfer ability for the paper leading edge shows a tendency as shown in the table below.)
*
The transfer ability for the paper leading edge and the paper separation ability from the photo-conductive drum are inversely related as shown in the table below.
Therefore, if the value is increased too much, this may cause the slight decrease of the paper separation ability from the photo-conductive drum. So, when adjusting the value, be sure to check the
paper feeding as well as the image quality.
e-STUDIO850
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$
Transfer ability
improves
3 - 36
3.7
3.7.1
Carriages
Idler pulley
Wire pulley
Hook
Tension spring
Fig.3-27
[Rear side]
Carriage-2
Idler pulley
Carriage wire
Bracket for carriage-1
Hook
Tension spring
Wire pulley
Fig.3-28
Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the carriage wires by the tension springs.
Note:
Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 37
(2)
Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket, make the sections A and B of the carriage2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up.
Carriage-2
Pulley bracket
[Front]
[Rear]
A
Fig.3-29
(3)
Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the sections C and D of it touch with the inside of the exit
side frame and screw up the front/rear sides of the bracket to fix it.
Note:
Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame.
Carriage-1
[Front]
[Rear]
Bracket
C
Fig.3-30
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 38
[C] Assembling carriage wires (Winding the wire around the wire pulley)
<Procedure>
(1)
Pull the 3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley. One end
of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside.
(2)
Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be
wound are as follows:
2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss
5 turns toward the boss side
Note:
Pay attention to the following when the wires are wound around the pulleys:
- Do not twist the wire.
- Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys.
- Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space
between them.
5 turns
5 turns
2 turns
2 turns
Ball terminal
Ball terminal
No space between turns
Hook
Hook
Color: Silver
[Rear]
Color: Black
[Front]
Fig.3-31
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 39
(3)
After winding the wires around the pulleys, attach the wire holder jigs not to loosen the wires.
Notes:
When the wire holder jig is attached, make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened.
The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed through between the
arm and the jig.
Arm
Fig.3-32
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 40
3.7.2
Lens unit
Fig.3-33
Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown below).
Fig.3-34
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 41
[B]
(1)
Place a ruler on the original glass (in the primary scanning direction) and make a copy on A4/LTsized paper at 100% reproduction ratio.
(2)
Feeding Direction
Copied ruler
Actual ruler
Fig.3-35
(3)
If each mark on the rulers differs, perform the adjustment with the following procedures.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
Screw
Screw
Lens unit
Fig.3-36
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 42
(3)
Slide the lens unit to the right or left direction using the marks on the lens base as a guide. (Slide
right when the copied ruler is magnified and slide left when the copied ruler is demagnified.)
The following table shows how the reproduction ratio difference between the copied ruler and
actual ruler corresponds to the movement amount of the lens unit.
Reproduction-ratio error
0.1%
0.5 mm
0.2%
0.9 mm
0.3%
1.4 mm
0.4%
1.8 mm
0.5%
2.3 mm
0.6%
2.7 mm
0.7%
3.2 mm
0.8%
3.6 mm
0.9%
4.1 mm
1.0%
4.5 mm
Lens unit
Fig.3-37
Note:
Fine adjustment can be made in the Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (printer).
on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.
(4)
(5)
Attach the lens cover and original glass. Make a copy to confirm the reproduction ratio.
(6)
Repeat the procedure 1 to 5 until the marks on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 43
3.7.3
Scan motor
When the scan motor has been installed again, adjust the belt tension in the following procedure.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
Loosen 2 screws. Then tighten these screws when the belt is tensed enough.
Screw
Scan motor
Screw
Fig.3-38
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 44
3.8
3.8.1
<Procedure>
[Rear]
[Rear]
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Center
Center
[Front]
[Front]
Fig.3-39
Fig.3-40
Bypass feeding
1) Loosen the screen.
2) Move the entire guide to the front or rear side.
3) Tighten the screw.
Drawer feeding
1) Loosen 2 screws.
2) Move the entire guide to the front or rear side.
3) Tighten the screws.
(A)
(B)
(B)
(A)
Fig.3-41
Fig.3-42
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 45
05/04
Tandem LCF
(1)
Remove the screw 1 on the left side of the Tandem LCF and the screw 2 on the right side, and
then temporarily fix it to the oblong hole. rescrew it to the oblong hole.
(2)
Loosen the screw 2 on the left side of the Tandem LCF and the screw 1 on the right side.
(3)
(4)
Move the front cover of the Tandem LCF to the front or rear side, and then tighten screw 1 and 2.
(5)
Align the surface of the covers of the 2nd drawer and Tandem LCF. If they do not align, adjust
the angle of the Tandem LCF front cover.
(6)
Tighten screw 6.
1
( A)
2
( B)
3
Fig.3-43
Note:
When the sideways deviation has been adjusted for the Tandem LCF feeding, adjust its protruding point.
If the Tandem LCF drawer cannot be closed securely, decrease the protruding amount.
(When the value decreases in increments of "1", the protruding amount decreases by 1 mm.)
(1) Move 2 screws of the bracket on the rear side in the same increments as the digit of the scale
at right on the front side.
(In case of No. 5, 6 and 7, place the bracket upside down to install it.)
Bracket
Protruded
distance
Max 7
Min 1
Screw
Fig.3-44
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 46
3.9
None of the doctor-sleeve gap, drum sleeve gap and developer sleeve pole position needs to be
adjusted.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 47
Normally, the heat roller pressure need not be adjusted. However, it must be carried out when wrinkles
frequently appear on copies made on plain paper.
<Procedure>
(1)
Open the RADF and make a copy with A3/LD size (solid copy).
(2)
(3)
Open the front cover quickly, and pull out the transfer/transport unit.
(4)
Insert the copy made in (1) into the fuser entrance guide with the image side facing down while
turning the jam release lever CCW until the center of the copy paper isnipped by the heat roller.
(5)
Leave the copy paper for about 20 seconds, and then take it out by quickly turning the jam
release lever CCW again.
(6)
Measure the width of the area nipped by the heat and pressure rollers at the front and the rear.
Rear
Nipped part
Front
Fig.3-45
(7)
(8)
If |F-R| >= 0.5mm, lift up the upper separation finger unit and loosen the fixing screw of the pressure spring on the side with the wider nip width. One half turn corresponds to narrowing the
nipped section by about 0.5mm.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 48
(9)
If |F-R|<0.5mm, the adjustment is completed. Close the RADF and make five blank copies with
A3/LD size to clean the heat and pressure rollers.
Upper separation finger unit
Fig.3-46
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 49
3.10.2
The fuser has been set (heat roller surface temperature: 200C) taking the fusing performance, wrinkling, curling and toner transfer deficiency at the leading/trailing edges of the duplex print into consideration when our company recommended paper is used. This is to allow the characteristics of the paper
to be demonstrated in a well-balanced manner. However, various types of paper are used in the field,
and factors such as the paper thickness and smoothness greatly effect the fusing performance, in particular. If the fusing performance deteriorates while using a specific type of paper, deal with that by
changing the fuser roller temperature at the setting mode "08".
Change the fuser roller temperature (in ready status, during printing).
To improve fusing efficiency, a change is made in the range of the setting value between "12" and "14"
(200C to 210C).
<Setting mode(08)>
Code
Contents
411
410
413
437
412
1804
Notes:
1. When a large value is set (to increase the temperature), the level of wrinkling, curling and
toner transfer deficiency at the leading/trailing edges of the duplex print tends to be worsened.
2. Do not set the fuser roller temperature in the ready status (08-411) higher than the one during
printing (08-410, 413, 437, 412).
3. When printing with OHP, remember that the OHP films tend to stick together if the setting
value for the fuser roller temperature (08-1804) is higher than the default value.
Change the starting temperature of the pressure roller low speed pre-running during ready in the setting
mode (08-845, 847). To improve the fusing quality, change the setting value to "12" (110C).
Note:
The frequency of pre-running is increased when the starting temperature of the pressure roller
pre-runningduring ready is increased.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 50
05/04
3.10.3
Check the gap between the fuser entrance guide and the press roller when the following troubles occur:
Stain on the paper back side
Jam at the fuser entrance
Paper wrinkling
Adjust the fuser entrance guide following the procedure below until the troubles are cleared.
The gap is 0.8 mm when the screw is at position 1. (Default value)
0.5 mm
1.0 mm
Scale
3
Fig.3-47
<Adjustment procedure>
(1)
Move the screw to the screw hole 2 and check the gap. (Fixed value of the gap is 1.3 mm.)
(2)
Move the screw to the screw hole 3 and check the gap. (Fixed value of the gap is 1.8 mm.)
(3)
Move the screw to the oblong hole 4 and adjust the gap. (Adjust it with o.4<gap<1.7.)
* The scale is marked off in 1 mm (Also adjust the leveling of the fuser entrance guide after
the screw has been moved to the oblong hole 4 and the adjustment has been made)
Gap
Gap
3
2
Pressure roller
Pressure roller
Fig.3-48
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 51
3.10.4
High-fusing mode
When the fusing level needs to be raised, it can be set at the setting mode 08.
(1)
<Setting mode(08)>
Code
(2)
Contents
440
441
439
417
526
Note:
08-417 of (1) and 08-433 of (2) can be combined.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 52
3.10.5
When the fuser roller temperature drops drastically during the continuous printing, the printing may be
stopped to increase the fuser roller temperature because the shortage in supply to the fuser unit,
depending of the use condition (use environment, power voltage condition, heat reserve condition of
the fuser unit).
To prevent the printing from stopping or to decrease its frequency, enable the setting of changing the
printing speed when the temperature drops, at the setting mode "08".
<Setting mode(08)>
Code
Contents
Default
Values
858
859
860
861
Notes:
1. This adjustment is valid for e-STUDIO600/720/850.
2. When the setting value "1" is selected, the printing speed slows down if the fuser roller temperature drops for only 5 minutes after the warming-up time.
3. When the setting value "2" is selected, the printing speed slows down if the fuser roller temperature drops.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 53
It is mainly performed at the installation. It is also required when the RADF is dislocated for some reason such as moving the equipment.
Remove the platen sheet during adjustment.
<Procedure>
(1)
Fig.3-49
(2)
Positioning pin
Fig.3-50
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 54
(3)
3
Fig.3-51
(4)
Fig.3-52
(5)
Fig.3-53
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 55
(6)
(7)
Fig.3-54
Fig.3-55
(8)
Fig.3-56
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 56
(9)
Screw of the
adjustment plate
3
Fig.3-57
Fig.3-58
Fig.3-59
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 57
3.11.2
It is mainly performed at the installation. It is also required when the RADF is dislocated for some reason such as moving the equipment.
Perform the following adjustment by using the screw of the left and right hinge.
Note:
Perform this adjustment after 3.11.1 Adjustment of RADF position.
Turn the exposure lamp ON during the gap check. (Test Mode: 03-267)
<Procedure>
(1)
Adjustment standard
Adjust the height so that the platen guide holder touches the ADF original glass.
(Adjust after removing the top left cover.)
0 mm
0 mm
Fig.3-60
(2)
Adjust the height of the hinge by turning the height adjusting screw on the hinge.
CW: The height of the hinge becomes high.
CCW: The height of the hinge becomes low.
Adjustment screw
Fig.3-61
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 58
3.11.3
Skew adjustment
When an image skew occurs, adjust it according to the following steps, Step 1 ! Step 2 ! Step 3.
Note:
Perform this adjustment after confirming that the equipment has been adjusted properly.
Prior to this adjustment, of RADF position and height are needed to be adjusted.
(1)
Step 1
Case A:
Shift the screw to an oblong hole, and then move the plate towards the side A to adjust the image
skew.
Case B:
Shift the screw to an oblong hole, and then move the plate towards the side B to adjust the image
skew.
Paper
Original
Fig.3-62
Simplex
Duplex (reverse)
(A)
(A )
(B)
(B)
Fig.3-63
Fig.3-64
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 59
(2)
Step 2
Case C:
Loosen 2 fixing screws and then turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise.
Case D:
Loosen 2 fixing screws and then turn the adjustment screw clockwise.
Note:
When adjusting, refer to the hinge position (scribed line) and be sure not to move it from the
hinge position 0.5 mm or further. Otherwise, image failures such as a jitter may occur.
D
Paper
Original
Fig.3-65
Adjustment screw
Fig.3-66
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 60
(3)
Step 3
Case E:
Shift the screw to an oblong hole, and then move the plate towards the side B to adjust the image
skew.
Case F:
Shift the screw to an oblong hole, and then move the plate towards the side A to adjust the image
skew.
E
F
Paper
Original
Fig.3-67
(A)
(B)
Fig.3-68
3.11.4
When the PC board is replaced with a new one, make sure to perform the EEPROM initialization (352),
the automatic sensor adjustment (356) and the tray width adjustment (367, 368) in the Adjustment
Mode (05).
Perform them after removing all originals on the sensor and closing the RADF.
Also, when any of the original length detection sensor (S63), read sensor (S69), small original reverse
sensor (S66), large original exit sensor (S68) is replaced with a new one, make sure to perform the
automatic sensor adjustment in the Adjustment Mode (05).
When the original tray width sensor (S54) is replaced with a new one, make sure to perform the tray
width adjustment in the Adjustment Mode (05).
Refer to
P.2-40 "2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05)" for the details.
Error such as paper jamming or miss detection for paper size may occur if the automatic sensor adjustment and the tray width adjustment are not performed after the above mentioned parts were replaced.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 61
3.11.5
Refer to "16.13 Disassembly and Replacement [F] Solenoid" for the procedure to disassemble the solenoid.
[A] Large original exit roller release solenoid
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
When the large original exit driven roller contacts the large original exit roller, tighten the
screw B, move the screw A to position C,
temporarily fix it, and shift the solenoid downward..
(3)
Ends faced-up
Fig.3-69
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 62
(2)
(3)
Ends faced-up
Fig.3-70
(3)
Ends faced-up
Fig.3-71
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 63
3.11.6
Adjust the bracket position so that the switch is turned ON when the height A becomes 40-45 mm
(within the empty weight falling limit).
A
Glass surface
Fig.3-72
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 64
3.11.7
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Fig.3-73
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Fig.3-74
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 65
Perform the following adjustments whenever you have replaced the finisher controller PCB or the
height sensor (PS1).
(1)
Fig.3-75
(2)
(3)
Press SW1 on the finisher controller PCB. This causes the finisher to execute automatic adjustment, in which the tray unit will shift.
At the end of adjustment, trays will return to their home positions.
During adjustment, LED1 flashes. At the end of adjustment, LED1 turns and remains.
If automatic adjustment fails, the mechanism stops while the tray in question is being adjusted
(at the same time, LED1 turns OFF).
(4)
Shift all bits on SW3 to OFF, and turn OFF the host machine once. This causes the finisher to
execute automatic adjustment, in which the tray unit will shift.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 66
3.12.2
If you have replaced the finisher controller PCB or if an alignment fault occurs, adjust as follows. Performing the steps will affect all paper sizes.
(1)
(2)
3
Fig.3-76
(3)
If you are using A4 paper, press SW1 on the finisher controller PCB. If you are using LT paper,
press SW2 on the finisher controller PCB.
Pressing SW1/2 will open the swing guide and cause the alignment plate to move to A4/LT
positions.
(4)
WPlace 10 sheets of A4/LT paper between the alignment plate and the guide plate, butting them
against the stoppers.
(5)
Press SW1 or SW2 on the finisher controller PCB, and butt the alignment plate, against the
sheets.
Pressing SW1 will shift the alignment plate to the front in 0.35 mm increments.
Pressing SW2 will shift the alignment plate to the rear in 0.35 mm increments.
(6)
Press SW1 and SW2 simultaneously to store the adjustment value (this will lower the swinging
guide).
(7)
Shift all bits of SW3 OFF, and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 67
3.12.3
Adjust as follows if you have replaced the finisher controller PCB. Performing the steps will affect all
paper sizes and all stapling positions.
(1)
(2)
Fig.3-77
(3)
If you are using A4 paper, press SW1 on the finisher controller PCB. If you are using LT paper,
press SW2 on the finisher controller PCB.
Pressing SW1/2 will open the swing guide and cause the feed belt to rotate.
(4)
Within 5 seconds after pressing the switch, place one sheet of A4/LT paper between the alignment plate and the guide plate, butting it against the stoppers.
When the finisher detects the paper, it will lower the swing guide and execute stapling (rear, 1position). Take out the stapled paper manually as delivery will not be executed.
Alignment
plate
Stapler
Stopper
Stopper
Guide plate
Fig.3-78
(5)
If the stapling position is correct, set all bits on SW3 to OFF to end the adjustments. If you need
to change the stapling position,on the other hand, go to the next step.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 68
(6)
To suit the position of the staple on the paper, press SW1 or SW2 on the finisher controller PCB
as many times as necessary.
Pressing SW1 will shift the stapling position to the front in 0.3 mm increments.
Pressing SW2 will shift the stapling position to the rear in 0.3 mm increments.
2912mm (A4)/
2732mm (LT)
Staple
Paper
Shift by SW2
Shift by SW1
Feeding direction
Fig.3-79
(7)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 69
3.12.4
Third sheet
Winding
amount
First sheet
Fig.3-80
(1)
Fig.3-81
(2)
(3)
Set the mode setting on the host machine to "1" and the number of originals (A4 or LT) to "3" in
the staple mode.
(4)
(5)
Remove the stack of sheets from the finisher delivery taking care to prevent the offset of the output sheets from changing.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 70
(6)
Measure the winding amount (shift) of the stack of sheets, and compare this amount with the
standard amounts.
This amount should be measured at the center of the paper leading edge.
3
Third sheet
Second sheet
First sheet
Fig.3-82
(7)
If the amount is within the standard, turn the host machine OFF, and then set all bits of SW3 to
OFF. If the amount is outside the standard, perform the following.
(8)
Turn the host machine OFF, and set SW3 on the finisher contoroller PCB as indicated. If
EEPROM (Q2) on the finisher controller PCB has been replaced, proceed to step 10.
ON
Fig.3-83
(9)
Turn the host machine ON, and then press SW2 on the finisher controller PCB.
The current setting values are displayed at LED1.
Adjustment value 0
Adjustment value +N
Adjustment value -N
Fig.3-84
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 71
Paper
delivery
direction
Third sheet
Second sheet
First sheet
Movement of
direction of
1st sheet by SW2
Movement of
direction of
1st sheet by SW1
Fig.3-85
(12) Repeat steps 1) though 6) twice. Check that the winding amount is within the standard in both
times.
(13) Turn the host machine OFF, and set all bits of SW3 to OFF. This completes the adjustment.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 72
The folding position is adjusted by changing the settings of bits 6 through 8 of DIPSW1 on the saddle
stitcher controller PCB to match the stitching position (i.e.,adjusting the distance over which the paper
positioning plate is moved to the folding position from the stitching position.)
If you have replaced the saddle stitcher controller PCB, be sure to set the new DIPSW1 so that the settings will be the same as those on the old DIPSW1. If, for any reason, you must change the following
position, perform the following steps:
(1)
Remove the PCB cover, and set bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1 on the saddle stitcher controller
PCB as indicated.
ON
Do not change
bits 5 through 8.
Fig.3-86
(2)
Remove the rear cover of the saddle stitcher unit, and tape the actuator of the inlet cover sensor
(PI9S) and the inlet cover switch (MS1S) of the saddle stitcher unit in place.
(3)
Before inserting the paper, mark the top of the paper (you will be using two sheets of A3 or LD
paper).
Mark
A3/LD paper
Insert direction
Fig.3-87
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 73
(4)
Press SW2 on the saddle stitcher controller PCB so that the feed motor (M1S) starts to rotate.
(Press SW2 three seconds or more if LD paper is used).
(5)
Open the inlet cover, and insert two sheets of paper (push them in by hand until the leading edge
of the sheets butts against the paper positioning plate).
Sheets
Mark
(6)
Close the inlet door while holding it down with your hand.
(7)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 74
(8)
Measure the distance (L) between the stitching position and the folding position. Then, perform
"positive width adjustment" or "negative width adjustment" to suit the relationship between the
stitching position and the folding position.
If the stitching position is below the folding position, perform "positive width adjustment."
If the stitching position is above the folding position, perform "negative width adjustment."
Mark
Positive Width Adjustment
3
L
Folding position
Stitching position
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 1 mm, provide +1 mm.
Mark
Negative Width Adjustment
Stitching position
Folding position
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide -0.5 mm.
Fig.3-88
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 75
(9)
Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on DIPSW1 referring to the table below.
If the width adjustment is "0",
The stitching position and the folding position match, requiring no change.
If for "positive width adjustment," Set DIPSW1 so that the difference resulting from subtraction
of the interval from the appropriate setting in the table is provided.
For instance, if the DIPSW1 is currently set to +2 and the interval is +1 mm, set DIPSW1 to
reflect -2.
If for "negative width adjustment" Set DIPSW1 so that the sum resulting from addition of the
interval from the appropriate setting is provided.
For instance, if the DIPSW1 is currently set to -1 and the interval is +0.5 mm, set DIPSW1 to
reflect +1.
DIPSW1 bit settings
bit 6
bit 7
bit 8
Settings
(in units of 0.5 mm)
OFF
ON
ON
+3
OFF
ON
OFF
+2
OFF
OFF
ON
+1
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
-1
ON
ON
OFF
-2
ON
ON
ON
-3
bit 7
bit 8
ON
OFF
OFF
3.13.2
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 76
Perform this adjustment when the punch driver PCB, transmission sensor (photosensor PCB/LED
PCB) or reflection sensor (scrap full detection PCB unit) has been replaced.
(1)
(2)
ON
3
2
Fig.3-89
(3)
Press SW1 on finisher controller PCB. Pressing this switch automatically adjusts sensor output.
(4)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 77
3.14.2
This operation registers which puncher unit is attached to the IC on the punch driver PCB so that the
puncher unit can be identified by the finisher. For this reason, this operation must be performed when
the punch driver PCB has been replaced.
(1)
(2)
Fig.3-90
(3)
Set bits 7 and 8 on DIPSW3 on the finisher controller PCB to match the number of punch holes of
the attached puncher unit according to the table.
(4)
Press SW1 on the finisher controller PCB. Press SW2 when setting a 2-/3-hole model (MJ6003N). Pressing this switch registers the number of punch holes to the punch driver PCB.
DIPSW3 bit settings
Number of Punch Holes
(5)
Push switch
bit 7
bit 8
OFF
OFF
SW1
OFF
OFF
SW2
ON
OFF
SW1
ON
ON
SW1
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 78
3.14.3
How dirty the transmission sensor (photosensor PCB/LED PCB) can be checked by the number of
times that LED1 on the finisher controller PCB lights. For this reason, how dirty the transmission sensor
is serves as a guide for when to perform cleaning during periodic maintenance.
(1)
(2)
Fig.3-91
(3)
Press SW1 on the finisher controller PCB. Pressing this switch lights LED1 on the finisher controller PCB as indicated in the table so that you can check the sensitivity level of the transmission
sensor.
Sensitivity Level
(4)
Lit 1X
Lit 2X
Sensor dirty
Lit 3X
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 79
LED1
LED2
LED3
Punch key
3.15.1
LED4
Mode key
Start LED
Start key
When replacing boards and volumes and disassembling or installing the tray unit, make sure to follow
these adjustments.
(1)
Turn ON the power with pressing the control panel mode key and start key. (The start LED blinks
in green.)
(2)
Press the mode key and set up only the mode LED3 to light ON, and press the start key. (The
start LED lights ON in green.)
* With pressing the mode key for more than 1 sec., all the mode LEDs light OFF and become
able to be reset.
(3)
(4)
Move the tray guide to the position where its width becomes the narrowest, and press the start
key.
(5)
(6)
Move the tray guide to the position where its width becomes the broadest.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 80
(7)
The mode LED1~4 light OFF and the writing operation of the tray width adjustment data into the
EEPROM is finished.
* When the writing into the EEPROM has been finished, make sure to check the result with the
following table.
Mode LED display
Writing result
LED1
Success
LED2
LED3
LED4
3
Failure (both maximum ) and minimum
positions)
Blinking
Light ON
- :
Light OFF
3.15.2
Input check 1
This is a mode at which the checking of each motor, solenoid and clutch operation is carried out.
(1)
Turn ON the power with pressing the control panel mode key and start key. (The start LED blinks
in green.)
(2)
Press the mode key and set up the LED1 to blink and LED2~4 to light OFF, and press the start
key. (The start LED lights ON in green.)
* With pressing the mode key for more than 1 sec., all the mode LEDs light OFF and become
able to be reset.
(3)
Press the mode key and check the operations referring to the following table. The operational
mode is switched at every time the mode key is pressed.
* Num (at the right table): the number of times which the key is pressed
* At the operational mode 7~36, the motor rotation speed is switched whenever the start key is
pressed. The motor rotation speed can be checked by referring to the mode LED blinking
speed.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 81
*Num.
Operation
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
Pickup clutch ON
Reverse solenoid ON
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Fan motor ON
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 82
*Num.
38
Operation
LED2
LED3
LED4
Blinking
Light ON
- :
LED1
Light OFF
3.15.3
3
(1)
Turn ON the power with pressing the control panel mode key and start key. (The start LED blinks
in green.)
(2)
Press the mode key and set up the mode LED2 to blink and mode LED1, 3, 4 to light OFF, and
press the start key. (The start LED lights ON in green.)
* With pressing the mode key for more than 1 sec., all the mode LEDs light OFF and become
able to be reset.
Check the ON/OFF status of each sensor through the mode LED display.
* The display is switched whenever the start key is pressed.
(3)
LED display
When the start switch is OFF:
Mode LED
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
Display
Sensor status
Light OFF
Light ON
Separation sensor ON
Light OFF
Light ON
Light OFF
Light ON
Transport sensor ON
Light OFF
DC 24V supplied
Light ON
LED2
Display
Sensor status
Light OFF
Light ON
Empty sensor ON
Light OFF
Light ON
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 83
3.15.4
Turn ON the power with pressing the control panel mode key and start key. (The start LED blinks
in green.)
(2)
Press the mode key and set up the mode LED1, 2 to blink and mode LED3, 4 to light OFF, and
press the start key. (The start LED lights ON in green.)
* With pressing the mode key for more than 1 sec., all the mode LED light OFF and become
able to be reset.
Check the ON/OFF status of each sensor through the mode LED display.
* The display is switched whenever the start key is pressed.
(3)
LED display
When the start switch is OFF:
Mode LED
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
Display
Sensor status
Light OFF
Light ON
Joint sensor ON
Light OFF
Light ON
Light OFF
Light ON
Light OFF
Light ON
LED2
LED3
LED4
Display
Sensor status
Light OFF
Dip-switch 1 OFF
Light ON
Dip-switch 1 ON
Light OFF
Dip-switch 2 OFF
Light ON
Dip-switch 2 ON
Light OFF
Dip-switch 3 OFF
Light ON
Dip-switch 3 ON
Light OFF
Dip-switch 4 OFF
Light ON
Dip-switch 4 ON
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 84
When the center of the printed image shifts to the front side or rear side, adjust the tray position taking
the following procedure.
<Procedure>
(1)
(2)
Loosen 3 screws and move the adjustment board to the right position. Then screw it shut.
3
A
Adjustment board
Fig.3-92
Feeding direction
Center
[Front]
Fig.3-93
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 85
Feeding direction
Center
[Front]
Fig.3-94
Note:
After the tray position adjustment, re-adjust the front cover position. Adjustment: loosen 4
screws and slide the front cover to adjust the gap between the front and upper cover, and the
front and right cover to 3 mm respectively.
Front cover
Fig.3-95
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 86
3.16.2
(2)
Fig.3-96
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 87
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 88
4.
4.1
PM Support Mode
4.1.1
General description
The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages ever printed after
they were replaced before. However, the life span of them changes depending on the general use of
users and the environment in which the equipment is placed. Therefore, it is necessary to consider not
only the number of output pages but also the drive counts when deciding the timing for the parts
replacement in order to utilize the parts and materials effectively.
This equipment has the PM support mode, which makes it possible to see the general use of each part
(the number of output pages, drive counts) and replacement record and to do a counter clearing operation more efficiently when replacing.
The replacement record can be printed out in the list printing mode (9S-103).
4.1.2
[ 1 ] Operational flow
[1]
[2]
Adjustment finished
Auto-toner automatic
adjustment performed
( Chapter 3.1)
[START]
Main unit chosen
[SUB UNIT] pressed
Main screen
Main unit list displayed
[CANCEL] pressed
[START]
[RETURN] pressed
Sub screen
Sub unit list displayed
Clear finished
Clear screen
[CANCEL] pressed
Counter clear
confirmation displayed
Fig.4-1
The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is executed or the [CANCEL]
button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after
moving from the sub screen.
4-1
[ 2 ] Operational screen
1) Main screen
10
Fig.4-2
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
and
4-2
Notes:
When the value of the output pages or the drive counts among the sub units (parts) is different, _ is displayed at the value section of the main unit and CHECK SUB UNIT is displayed
at the top.
is always displayed at the drive counts section for the reversing automatic document
feeder (RADF) and feed unit.
The paper source differs depending on the structure of options, however, 0.0k is displayed
in OUTPUT PAGES (k) and its standard number of output pages is displayed in PM OUTPUT PAGES (k) even for the installed paper source.
4-3
2) Sub screen
8
Fig.4-3
Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit (parts) counters
Displaying of the standard number of output pages counts (x 1,000) to replace the sub unit
(parts)
Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x 1,000) to replace the sub unit (parts)
Displaying of the number of output pages counts, drive counts and previous replacement date
for a chosen sub unit
4-4
3) Clear screen
2
Fig.4-4
When the [CANCEL] button is pressed, the counter is not cleared and the display returns to
the main or sub screen.
When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, Present number of output pages counts and
Present driving counts are cleared and Previous replacement date is updated.
4-5
Sub-screen
Drum/cleaner unit
[CLEANER/DRUM]
Drum [DRUM]
Drum cleaning blade [DRUM BLADE]
Drum cleaning brush [DRUM BRUSH]
Drum separation finger [SEPARATION FINGER(DRUM)]
Developer [DEVELOPER]
Filter [FILTER]
4-6
05/06
4.1.3
The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages ever made after
they were replaced before. However, its drive counts time is also to be considered when replacing the
parts. Even if the number of output pages has reached the level of replacement, for instance, the part
may still be usable with its drive counts not reaching the specified drive counts. On the other hand, the
part may need replacement even if the number of output pages has not reached the level of replacement with its driving time exceeding the specified drive counts. The life span of some parts such as feed
roller is heavily dependent on the number of output pages rather than the drive counts.
The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of output pages and the drive counts.
Example 1:
When the number of output pages has reached the specified level
The parts in RADF
The parts in feeding system
The parts in the fuser unit
Yes
No
The part is still usable.
Example 2:
When the image failure occurred before the number of output pages has reached the specified
level
Check the drive counts of all parts at PM support mode.
4-7
4.2
Preparation
Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down.
Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them.
See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode (6S2) or list printing mode (9S-103).
6S-2
: [6] + [START] + [POWER] ON ! [2] ! [START]
9S-103 : [9] + [START] + [POWER] ON ! [103] ! [START]
OUTPUT PAGES
DRUM
DRUM BLADE
GRID
MAIN CHARGER WIRE
SEPARATION FINGER (DRUM)
81813
81813
81813
81813
81813
PM OUTPUT PAGE
150000
150000
150000
150000
150000
DRIVE COUNTS
PM DRIVE COUNTS
119758
119758
119758
119758
119758
220000
220000
220000
220000
220000
Fig.4-5
Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.
(2)
Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the
Service Manual if necessary.
(3)
Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and
make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.
4-8
4.3
4-9
4.4
Lubrication
L
Launa 40
Coating
SI
W
Silicon oil
White grease
(Molykote X5-6020)
Alvania No.2
AV
Replacement
Operation check
The number of
sheets consumed
before replacement
(Value x 1,000)
R Replace if
deformed or
damaged
C After cleaning or
replacement,
confirm there is
no problem.
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
B or A
P35-I12
*1
P34-I2
Cleaning
A1
Original glass
A2
A3
Mirror-1
A4
Mirror-2
A5
Mirror-3
A6
Reflector
A7
Lens
A8
Exposure lamp
A9
Automatic original
detection sensor
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
P34-I1
R
B or A
P36-I3
P38-I7
Cleaning
B1
B2
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
*2
P32-I2
*3
4 - 10
C. Feed unit
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
C1
200
P7-I38
*4
C2
200
P7-I38
*4
C3
Separation roller
(drawer)
200
P7-I52
*4
C4
Transport roller
P2-I2,
P7-I17
C5
C6
Drive gear
(tooth face and shaft)
C7
C8
Registration roller
(rubber)
P16-I8
C9
Registration roller
(metal)
P16-I10
C10
P16-I19
C11
C12
Pickup roller
(Tandem LCF)
400
P7-I38
C13
Feed roller
(Tandem LCF)
400
P7-I38
C14
Separation roller
(Tandem LCF)
400
P7-I52
*5
4
*26
*26
Cleaning
Lubrication
Operation
Replacement
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
Parts list
<P-I>
D1
Pickup roller
100
P10-I36
D2
Feed roller
100
P10-I35
D3
Separation roller
100
P11-I35
D4
Transport roller
P11-I8
D5
Bypass tray
D6
Drive gear
(tooth face and shaft)
D7
AV
Remarks
*25
Cleaning
E1
Discharge LED
E2
Drum shaft
E3
Ozone filter
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
*22
450/500/575/
600
P33-I25
4 - 11
F. Main charger
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
Parts list
<P-I>
F1
Charger case
F2
Charger wire
F3
F4
450/500/575/
600
P40-I9
F5
Grid
450/500/575/
600
P40-I27
Remarks
*6
450/500/575/
600
P40-I19
*6
G. Drum/Cleaner
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
G1
Photoconductive drum
450/500/575/
600
G2
G3
450/500/575/
600
P49-I9
*8
G4
450/500/575/
600
P48-I38
*8
G5
Recovery blade
G6
G7
G8
G9
*7
R
450/500/575/
600
*9
C
P49-I4,I21
*10
*11
P50-I16
*7
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
H. Developer unit
Items to check
H1
H2
H3
Developer material
H4
Front shield
H5
H6
Guide roller
H7
Toner filter
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
B
W
*21
450/500/575/
600
*12
R
AV
900/1000/1150/
1200
B or A
*13
R
450/500/575/
600
P42-I24
4 - 12
I. Toner recycle
Items to check
I1
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
*14
J. Transfer belt
Items to check
J1
Transfer belt
J2
J3
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
Parts list
<P-I>
450/500/575/
600
P22-I18
P22-I6
P22-I9
J4
P22-I2
J5
450/500/575/
600
P23-I31
J6
450/500/575/
600
P23-I10
J7
Flicker periphery
Remarks
*15
*16
*16
K. Toner bag
Items to check
K1
Cleaning
Lubrication
Toner bag
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
900/1000/1150/
1200
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
P203-I3
*20
Parts list
<P-I>
Remarks
L. Fuser unit
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
L1
Fuser roller
450/500/575/
600
P25-I14
L2
Pressure roller
450/500/575/
600
P25-I12
L3
450/500/575/
600
P27-I22
L4
P27-I9
L5
Cleaning web
450/500/575/
600
P27-I11
*18
L6
450/500/575/
600
P27-I12
*18
L7
Thermistor (4 pcs.)
P27-I6,I28
*19
L8
L9
*17
4 - 13
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
Remarks
Parts list
<P-I>
P28-I3,I23
450/500/575/
600
P27-I35
M. Exit/Reverse section
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
Parts list
<P-I>
M1
Exit/Reversal guide
M2
Exit roller
M3
Drive gear
M4
Reverse section
transport roller
(upper, lower)
M5
P14-I24
M6
Horizontal transport
section transport
roller (4 pcs.)
P20I13,I14
M7
Horizontal transport
section follower
roller (8 pcs.)
P20-I8
M8
Reverse section
mylar (2pcs.)
M9
M10
Bearing of plastic
bushing
M11
Paper guide
SI
P14I4,I19,I30
Remarks
*23
*24
P13-I6,I7
B or A
4 - 14
N. RADF
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
Parts list
<P-I>
N1
Pickup belt
600
P81-I20
N2
Separtaion roller
600
P82-I22
N3
Feed roller
600
P81-I21
N4
N5
Registration roller
N6
1st roller
N7
2nd roller
N8
Read sensor
N9
Read guide
N10
Read roller
N11
3rd roller
N12
4th roller
N13
Reverse sensor
N14
Exit roller
N15
Reverse roller
N16
Platen sheet
Remarks
B or A
O. LCF (MP-4004)
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
Parts list
<P-I>
Items to check
Cleaning
O1
Pickup roller
500
P5-I28
O2
Feed roller
500
P4-I20
O3
Separation roller
500
P4-I31
O4
Drive gears
(tooth face)
O5
Brush unit
O6
Remarks
P. Finisher (MJ-1027/1028)
Items to check
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement
Operation
(x 1,000 sheets)
check
Parts list
<P-I>
P1
Feed belt
P15-I2
P2
Paddle
P16-I33
Remarks
4 - 15
A4 A3 A8 A6 A2 L5
G9
A1 G8 G4 G3 E1 F5 F1 A7
F4
F3
F2
G1
E2
B1
B2
A5
H6
L14,L6
H3
H1,H5
L7
L12,L1
L3
L13
D5
D4
H4
G5
G6
G2
M2
L4
L2
M1
L7
M4
L8
D2
D1
D6, D7
M6
J1
J2
J8
J6
J3
J5
J7
M6 M6
M5
D3
C8
J4
C9 C11
M6
C10
C4
C4
M7
M8
M7
M11
M7
M7
C1
C2
C3
C5
M4
C4
C2
C1
M10,M9
C3
C4
C2
C1
C3
C4
C1
C2
C3
C7
4 - 16
A4 A3 A8 A6 A2
L5
A1 G9
G8
G4 G3 E1 F5 F1
A7 F4
F3
F2
G1 B1
E2
B2
A5
H6
L14, L6
L7
H3
H1,H5
L12, L1
D5
L3
L13
D4
H4
G5
M2
G2
D2
G6
L8
D1
D6,D7
L4
L2
M1
L7
M4
M5
M6
M8
M7
J1
J2
J8
J7 J6 J3 J5
M6 M6
M11
M7
M7
D3
C8
J4
C9 C11
M6
C10
C4
C4
M7
C1
C2
C3
C5
C4
M4
C1
M10, M9
C2
C3
C4
C12
C13
C14
C7
Fig.4-7 Front side (TWD, ASD, ASU, AUD, MJD, CND and KRD models)
4 - 17
G7
H2
E3
L9
C6
L10,L11
M3
H7
K1
4 - 18
N5
N4
N2
N3
N1
N6
N14
N7
N9
N15
N8
N7
N10
N11
N12
N16
N13
4 - 19
O5
O2
O1
O4
O6
O3
4 - 20
P1
P2
4 - 21
2.
Fig.4-12
3.
Fig.4-13
4 - 22
Fig.4-14
4.
Pickup roller
Oneway clutch
Idler gear
shaft
Torque
limiter
Separation roller
Feed roller
Fig.4-15
5.
Drive gears in the paper feeding section (teeth face and shafts)
Apply some white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to the teeth faces and shafts of the drive
gears.
Note:
Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the
clutch after applying molykote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of
molykote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts.
4 - 23
6.
Note:
Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 363mm).
- Insert the wire securely into the V-grooves of the front and rear sides.
- Do not twist the wire.
- Do not touch the wire with your bare hand.
*
7.
Connected to earth
Fig.4-16
Fig.4-17
8.
9.
Recovery blade
Replace the recovery blade regardless the number of copies if the edge of the blade get
damaged.
10.
4 - 24
Notes:
1. Wipe the tip of the finger lightly with a dry cloth trying not to deform it.
Do not leave the lint on the tip.
2. Apply patting power to the tip of the fingers and drum surface after replacing or cleaning them.
*
11.
Fig.4-18
12.
Developer material
After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment and
then enforced erforming of image quality control.
( P.3-3 "3.2 Image Dimensional Adjustment")
When removing the developer material from the developer unit with a vacuum cleaner or
air blower, be sure to ground the bracket of the developer unit to prevent the auto toner
sensor from being damaged by static electricity.
Connected to earth
Fig.4-19
13.
Oil seal
Mixer shaft .......................................................4 pcs.
Paddle shaft ....................................................2 pcs.
Upper developer sleeve (rear side) .................1 pc.
Lower developer sleeve (rear side) .................1 pc.
Transport sleeve (front side) ............................1 pc.
4 - 25
05/06
During replacement, coat the oil seal with grease (Alvania No.2).
(1)
(2)
(3)
Push in a new oil seal parallel to the mounting hole section of the developer frame or
outside of the nozzle mixer.
* Pay attention to the direction in which the
oil seal is attached. (See figure on right.)
Apply an even coat of grease to the inside of
the oil seal.
Amount: About two small drops
Wipe off any grease the exudes from the
inside.
Developer frame
(Nozzle mixer)
Outside
Grease
Inside
Oil seal
Fig.4-20
Mixer Shaft
Apply a coating of grease (Alvania No.2) to the entire periphery of the mixer shaft before attaching the
bearing.
Mixer Shaft
Bearing
Fig.4-21
4 - 26
14.
(1)
(2)
Fig.4-22
(3)
Supply section
Fig.4-23
(4)
(5)
Cover
Auger section
Fig.4-24
4 - 27
Note:
When cleaning the auger section with a vacuum cleaner, be sure to ground the motor
bracket to prevent the motor from being
damaged by static electricity.
Connected to earth
Fig.4-25
15.
Blot
Fig.4-26
16.
Flicker
periphery
Fig.4-27
17.
4 - 28
05/06
18.
4 - 29
Notes:
1. When the web pushing roller has been replaced, reel the web for 3 to 5 turns by hand.
2. Check if the cleaning web is tightly reeled after it has been installed in the fuser unit.
3. Turn the jam access knob of the fuser unit for 10 to 15 times to fit the web and the fuser roller.
At this time, check if there is no installation defect in the unit.
4. Check the secure installation of the cleaning web as follows:
- Be sure that the cleaning web does not hang out of the space between the upper entrance
guide and the fuser roller when it is seen from the fuser unit entrance side.
- Open the fuser unit cover and make sure that there are no slacks or creases on the cleaning web.
Fig.4-28
5. Start the PM Support mode (6S) to reset the counter of the cleaning web when the web has
been replaced, otherwise the cleaning ability of the web may be narrowed.
At the first power-ON after this counter reset, the web motor rotates for 65 seconds.
6. Turn the power of the equipment ON. Then confirm that the message "READY" has appeared
on the touch panel.
7. Perform the final check of the cleaning web (same as Step 4 above).
8. When the web motor is rotated at the output check in the Test mode (03-124), the cleaning
web may be slackened. Do not rotate the motor for more than 10 seconds to prevent the web
from being slacked.
9. It is recommended to replace all the supplies for the fuser unit at the same time. If it is necessary to replace the cleaning web before it is finished for any reason, set the counters manually for the newly replaced web according to its previous usage.
Counter related to the life span control of total feeding amount of the cleaning web
Present output pages for control: 08-1252-6
Total feeding amount for control: 08-1252-7
PM support screen related counter
Cleaning web counter: 08-1252-3
Also, when replacing the web pushing roller or one-way clutch which is half-way used, set the
following counters manually.
Web pushing roller: 08-1254-0, 08-1254-3
One-way clutch: 08-1338-0, 08-1338-3
Additionally, when the present output pages for control (08-1252-6) has reached the setting
value to display that the cleaning web is consumed (08-405), the time to replace the cleaning
web appears on the screen and the feeding amount becomes small.
If the cleaning web which has exceeded its life span is used continuously, this could damage
the fuser roller. Replace the cleaning web as soon as possible when it is finished.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 30
05/04
19.
Thermistor
Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is adhered on it while the fuser unit is
reassembled or disassembled, such as the case the fuser roller is replaced.
Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the thermistor with a
new one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree.
20.
Toner bag
Be sure to check the amount of the used toner in the toner bag before starting the preventive maintenance. Tap the toner bag to even out the surface of the used toner, and if this
top surface is higher than 180 mm from the bottom of the toner bag, replace the bag.
Photoconductive drum defects may increase the used toner amount. Therefore be sure to
check the used toner amount in the bag when the drum has been replaced.
In addition, whenever fogging on the photoconductive drum increases, be sure to check
the used toner amount in the toner bag.
21.
(2)
Pulley
E-ring
Fig.4-29
4 - 31
05/04
(3)
B
A
Fig.4-30
22.
Discharge LED
Clean with soft pads or cloth. Do not use a vacuum cleaner.
23.
Exit roller
Remove the pin from the exit roller (upper), and then apply a few drops of silicon oil over
the hole of the exit roller.
24.
25.
26.
4 - 32
05/05
4.5
PM KIT
KIT name
PM-KIT-6000
PM-KIT-6000C
MO-KIT-6000
MA-KIT-6000
FR-KIT-6000
DF-KIT-8110
ROL-KIT-81CST
ROL-KIT-4004
Component
Part name
Qty.
MO-KIT-6000
MA-KIT-6000
FR-KIT-6000
MO-KIT-6000
MA-KIT-6000
WIRE-CH-060*398
GRID-340
K-BASE-PAD-CH-M
BL-6000D
B-6000
K-CLAW-DRUM
ASYS-CLAW-DRUM-C
Developer material
D-6000
Transfer belt
BT-6510TR
BL-6510TR
B-6510TR
Ozone filter
FLTR-OZN-800-390
Toner filter
FILTER-DEV-F300
Fuser roller
HR-6000-U
Pressure roller
HR-6000-L
Cleaning web
CW-6000
PR-6000W
BRG-ONEWAY-6-H
SCRAPER-212
Feed roller
FEED-ROLLER
Separation roller
SEP-ROLLER
Pickup roller
ROL-BELT-PICK
Feed roller
ASYS-ROL-FEED
Separation roller
ASYS-ROL-SPT
Pickup roller
ASYS-ROL-FEED
Feed roller
ASYS-ROL-FEED-LCF
Separation roller
ASYS-ROL-SPT-LCF
Pickup roller
ASYS-ROL-PICK-L
4 - 33
4.6
Jig List
Parts list
Item
Page
Item
201
Area sheet
201
201
201
201
201
202
202
202
202
202
4 - 34
P201-I1
P201-I5
P201-I2
P201-I6
P201-I4
P201-I7
P202-I1
P202-I2
P202-I3
P202-I4,I5
Fig.4-31
4 - 35
4.7
Grease List
Parts list
Grease name
Part name
Volume
Container
Page
Item
SI
Silicon oil
ASM-SILICON-1M
100cc
Bottle
201
Launa 40
OIL-LAUNA40-100
100cc
Oiler
201
MOLYKOTE-100
100g
Tube
201
12
AV
Alvania No.2
ASM-PG-ALV2
100g
Tube
201
11
4 - 36
4.8
4.8.1
1) Toner / Developer
Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10C to
35C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation.
2) OPC drum
Like the toner and developer, OPC drums should be stored in a dark place where the ambient temperature is between 10 to 35C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where drums may be
subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
3) Drum cleaning blade / Transfer belt cleaning blade
This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10 to 35C, and
should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
4) Fuser roller / Pressure roller / Cleaning web / Transfer belt / Drum cleaning brush / Transfer belt
cleaning brush
Avoid places where the heat rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their
fumes.
5) Copy Paper
Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.
4.8.2
1) Use of gloves
If fingerprints or oil adhere to the drum surface, the characteristics of the photosensitive drum may
degrade, affecting the quality of the copy image. So, do not touch the drum surface with your bare
hands.
2) Handling precautions
As the drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when installing and
removing it so as not damage its surface.
Be sure to apply patting powder (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum and separation claws
on the cleaner before installing the drum into the machine. When the drum has been replaced, reset
the drum counter in the PM Support mode (6S).
Then perform "Image quality control enforcement" in the Adjustment mode (05-290).
Notes:
Application of the patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum, cleaning blade,
and separation fingers. If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and cleaning blade may be damaged.
When paper fibers adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning efficiency and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers
found adhering to the blade.
3) Installation of Copier and Storage of Drum
Avoid installing the copier where it may be subjected to high temperature, high humidity, chemicals
and/or their fumes.
Do not leave drums in a brightly lit place for a long time. Otherwise the drum will fatigue, and will not
produce sufficient image density immediately after being installed in the machine. However, this
effect may decrease as time elapses.
4 - 37
4.8.3
1) Handling precautions
Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition of its
edge:
- Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge. Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft
pad.
- Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge.
- Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade.
- Do not allow loose thread or dirt to contact the blade edge.
- Do not place the blade near a heat source.
2) Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.
4.8.4
4.8.5
1)
2)
3)
4)
4.8.6
1) Handling precautions
- Do not leave oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the fuser roller.
- Be extremely careful not to allow a hard object to hit or rub against the rollers because the thin
teflon layer coated on the aluminum substrate is easily damaged and, if damaged, will result in
defective drum cleaning.
4 - 38
2) Checking
- Check for stain and damage to the fuser and pressure rollers and clean or replace if necessary.
If marks made by the separation fingers have become distinct, open the fuser unit cover and
move the position of the E-ring by sliding the upper separation finger unit to the direction of the
thick arrow in the figure. The separation fingers thus contact with the different position on the
fuser roller. In case there is any scratch which may cause a printing problem or the coating of the
roller is removed, replace the roller.
E-ring
Upper separation
finger unit
Fig.4-32
Clean the upper/lower separation fingers and check for chipped claws.
Check the cleaning condition of the cleaning web (kinks, lines and slacks on the cleaning web).
Clean the thermistor and check proper contact with the fuser roller.
Check the fused condition of the toner image.
Check the gap between the lower entrance guide and pressure roller (do not make them touch
each other).
Check the gap between the fuser roller and thermostat (2~2.5mm).
Check the fuser and pressure rollers for proper rotation.
Check the fuser and pressure rollers for bearing.
Check the fuser roller drive gear and cleaning web drive gear
Check the web motor lubrication to the warm gear (white molykote).
4 - 39
4.8.7
1) Handling precaution
Never allow solvents such as paint thinner to adhere to the cleaning roller.
2) Defective cleaning and countermeasures
Defective cleaning should be judged by the toner deposited on the fuser and pressure rollers.
When the fuser roller has heavy toner deposits, replace the cleaning web and web pushing roller.
The cleaning web and cleaning rollers will be gradually degraded due to the subjection to the heat
from the heat roller over a long period of time. Replace them preferably after a specified number of
copies have been made.
3) Precaution when installing cleaning web
- Fully confirm that the cleaning web has no slacks, which may cause a cleaning defect by generating kinks and lines.
- Be sure to replace both of the cleaning web and the web pushing roller at the same time.
- Be sure to reset the counter of the cleaning web counter in the PM Support mode (6S) when the
cleaning web roller has been replaced.
4 - 40
5.
TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1
5.1.1
YES "
NO
Is the fuser transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[C])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the transfer belt working?
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the drum separation finger solenoid working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-111,161)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-1
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
YES
Is the registration motor working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-108/158)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Check if there is any abnormality in the space between the registration motor and the registration roller (metal).
Check if the registration roller (rubber) is rotating smoothly.
Check the condition of the registration roller at the horizontal transport section and clean or
replace it.
*
If the error [E010] caused by a paper jam underneath the drum cleaner often occurs due
to an insufficient paper separation from the photoconductive drum, set a smaller value in
the code 08-841, and see what happens. At this time, however, pay attention to the
transferability at the leading edge of the paper since this transferability can be slightly
narrowed depending on the environments and conditions under which the equipment is
placed or the media type of the paper used. (Refer to 3.6.1 in this manual about the
details of the code 08-841.)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-2
05/04
NO "
YES
Is the reverse motor driving?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-126)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
1) Check if the separation finger for the fuser unit is working normally.
2) Replace the LGC board
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-3
YES "
NO
Is the sensor in the jamming area working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: refer to the following table.)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the LGC board.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors and covers
Jamming area
Sensor
Registration area
Registration sensor
03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E]
Exit/Reverse area
Exit sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[B]
Reverse sensor-1
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E]
Reverse sensor-2
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[C]
03-[FAX]OFF/[9]/[F]
03-[FAX]OFF/[9]/[G]
03-[FAX]OFF/[9]/[H]
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[3]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[C]
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[C]
03-[FAX]OFF/[3]/[C]
03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[C]
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[A]
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-4
Paper size detection is performed at the first sheet of paper when the drawer is opened
or closed, or when the power of the equipment is turned ON.
[E200] 1st drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor)
[E210] 2nd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor)
[E300] 3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor)
[E330] 4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor)
[E3C0] Tandem LCF transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor)
(First page of printing)
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor?
!
YES "
NO
Is the registration sensor(S18) working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
1) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-5
YES "
If the paper is damaged, remove the paper and check the followings
1) Check if the paper is skewed, and correct it if it is skewed.
2) Check the paper amount.
3) Check if the paper is not the one with printing on its back side.
4) Check if the width of the side guides of the drawer is too narrow.
5) Check the motor-related adjustment value.
NO
Is the intermediate transport sensor (S17) working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[A])
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the transport motor (M17) rotating?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-133,183)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Check if the spring of the follower roller of the intermediate transport roller is working properly.
Check if the registration roller (rubber) is rotating smoothly.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-6
[E220] 2nd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 1st drawer transport sensor)
[E310] 3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 1st drawer transport sensor)
[E340] 4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 1st transport sensor)
[E3D0] Tandem LCF transport jam (paper not reaching 1st drawer transport sensor)
(First page of printing)
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the 1st drawer transport sensor?
!
YES "
NO
Is the 1st drawer transport sensor (S33) working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[C])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Are the transport clutches (CLT5,7,9,11) working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-210/225/229/230/231)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and clean or replace them.
2) Check the transport roller. Clean or replace it.
(Second page or later of printing)
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper on the transport path?
l
l
l
l
l
!
YES "
If the paper is damaged, remove the paper and check the followings:
1) Check if the paper is skewed, and correct it if it is skewed.
2) Check the paper amount.
3) Check if the paper is not the one with printing on its back side.
4) Check if the width of the side guides of the drawer is too narrow.
5) Check the motor-related adjustment value.
NO
Check if the spring of the follower roller of the intermediate transport roller is working properly.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-7
[E201] 1st drawer transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor)
[E211] 2nd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor)
[E301] 3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor)
[E331] 4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor)
[E3C1] Tandem LCF transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor)
[E261] Option LCF transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor)
[E2A1] Transport jam during duplex printing (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor)
(First page of printing)
Is the intermediate transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[A])
l
NO "
Open the jam access cover. Remove the paper and check the followl
ings.
l
1) Check if the connector of the intermediate transport sensor is disconl
nected.
l
2) Check if the connector CN327 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l
l
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
5)
Replace
the LGC board.
!
YES
Is the transport motor rotating?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-133,183)
l
NO "
Check if the bearing of the transportation roller is locked.
l
Replace the transport motor.
l
1) Check if the connector of the transport motor is disconnected.
l
2) Check if the connector CN327 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l
3) Check if the connector on the transport motor driving PC board is disl
l
connected.
l
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
5)
Check
if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open
circuited.
l
l
6) Check if the conductor pattern on the transport motor driving PC
l
board is short circuited or open circuited.
l
7) Replace the LGC board.
!
8) Replace the transport motor driving PC board.
YES
Is the 1st drawer transport clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-210/225/229/230/231)
l
NO "
1) Check if the connector of the 1st drawer transport clutch is disconl
nected.
l
2) Check if the connector CN305 on the LGC board is disconnected.
l
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
l
open circuited.
l
l
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
l
open circuited.
l
5) Replace the 1st drawer transport clutch.
!
6) Replace the LGC board.
Check if the spring of the follower roller of the intermediate transport roller is working properly.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-8
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5-9
[E230] 1st drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 1st drawer transport sensor)
[E240] 2nd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 2nd drawer transport sensor)
[E250] Option LCF transport jam (paper not reaching Option LCF transport sensor)
[E370] 3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport sensor)
[E380] 4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 4th drawer transport sensor)
[E3F0] Tandem LCF transport jam (paper not reaching 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport sensor)
(First page of printing)
Is the intermediate transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[A], OFF/[1]/[C], OFF/[2]/[C],
OFF/[3]/[C], OFF/[4]/[C])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
Open the jam access cover. Remove the paper and check the followings.)
1) Check if the connector of the transport sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
open circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or opencircuited.
5) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the reversed paper transport clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-210/225/229/230/231)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Check the conditions of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of the drawer in
use, and replace them if necessary
YES "
Is there any damage on the paper? (Remove the paper and check the
followings.)
1) Check if the paper is skewed, and correct it if it is skewed.
2) Check the paper amount.
3) Check if the paper is not the one with printing on its back side.
4) Check if the width of the side guides of the drawer is too narrow.
NO
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 10
NO "
1)
2)
3)
4)
YES
Check the conditions of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of the drawer in
use, and replace them if necessary.
[E260] Option LCF transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor)
Is there any paper before the registration sensor when the bypass unit cover is opened?
!
YES "
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the external LCF transport motor driving?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-122/172)
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the external LCF feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-272)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 11
YES
Is the external LCF transport clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-273)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
1) Check if the connector of the external LCF feed clutch is not disconnected.
2) Check if the connectors J851 on the LCF board are not disconnected.
3) Check if the connector CN346 on the LGC board is not disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
not open circuited.
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LCF and LGC boards is not
short circuited or open circuited.
6) Replace the external LCF feed clutch.
7) Replace the LCF board.
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Leading edge of paper not reaching the fuser exit sensor.
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
YES "
Is there any damage on the paper? (Remove the paper and check the
followings.)
1) Check if the paper is skewed, and correct it if it is skewed.
2) Check the paper amount.
3) Check if the paper is not the one with printing on its back side.
4) Check if the width of the side guides of the drawer is too narrow.
NO
Is the intermediate transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[A], OFF/[1]/[C], OFF/[2]/[C],
OFF/[3]/[C], OFF/[4]/[C])
l
l
l
!
NO "
1)
2)
3)
4)
YES
1) Check the conditions of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of the drawer in
use, and replace them if necessary.
2) Check if there is any abnormality at the transport drive unit.
3) Check the condition of the external LCF feed roller and separation roller and clean or
replace them.
Check if the registration roller (rubber) is rotating smoothly.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 12
[E320] 3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 2nd drawer transport sensor)
[E350] 4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 2nd drawer transport sensor)
[E3E0] Tandem LCF transport jam (paper not reaching 2nd drawer transport sensor)
Open the feed cover. Is there paper in front of the 2nd drawer transport sensor?
l
l
l
l
!
YES "
If the paper is damaged, remove the paper and check the followings
1) Check if the paper is skewed, and correct it if it is skewed.
2) Check the paper amount.
3) Check if the paper is not the one with printing on its back side.
4) Check if the width of the side guides of the drawer is too narrow.
NO
Is the 2nd drawer transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[C]
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Are the transport clutches working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-210/225/231)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and clean or replace them.
2) Check the transport roller. Clean or replace it.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 13
[E360] 4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport sensor)
Open the feed cover. Is there any paper in front of the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor?
l
l
l
l
!
YES "
If the paper is damaged, remove the paper and check the followings
1) Check if the paper is skewed, and correct it if it is skewed.
2) Check the paper amount.
3) Check if the paper is not the one with printing on its back side.
4) Check if the width of the side guides of the drawer is too narrow.
NO
Is the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
1) Check if the connector of the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor
is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN328 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
open circuited.
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC board is short circuited or
open circuited.
5) Replace the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF drawer feed sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the 4th drawer transport clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-225)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and clean or replace them.
2) Check the PFP transport roller. Clean or replace it.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 14
[E510] Transport jam during duplex printing (paper not reaching reverse sensor-2)
Open the exit cover. Is there any paper in front of the reverse sensor-2?
!
YES "
NO
Is the reverse sensor-1 working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[G])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the horizontal transport section driving clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-222)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the Mylar at the reverse section normal?
!
NO "
YES
Check the condition of the roller at the horizontal transport section and clean or replace it.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 15
[E511] Transport jam during duplex printing (paper not reaching horizontal transport sensor-1)
Is there any paper at the reverse section when the exit cover is opened?
!
YES "
NO
Is the Horizontal transport sensor-1 working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[9]/[F])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the transport roller 1/2 at the horizontal transport section rotating?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-110/220)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
1) Check if the connectors of the and horizontal transport section driving clutch-1 and horizontal transport section driving clutch-2 are not
disconnected.
2) Check if the connectors of the and horizontal transport section driving clutch-1 and and horizontal transport section driving clutch-2 are
not misconnected (drive clutch: black-black, transport clutch 1:
bluepurple).
3) Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is not disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are not disconnected and the harness is
not open circuited.
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is not short- or
open circuited.
6) Replace the transport drive clutch and transport clutch 1.
7) Replace the LGC board.
8) Check if the front side timing belt is put on properly.
9) Check the installation state of the horizontal transport section driving
clutch-1.
YES
Check the condition of the rollers at the horizontal transport section and clean or replace
them.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 16
[E512] Transport jam during duplex printing (paper not reaching horizontal transport sensor-2)
Is there any paper at the reverse section when the exit cover is opened?
!
YES "
NO
Is the Horizontal transport sensor-2 working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[9]/[G])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the transport roller 3/4 at the horizontal transport section rotating?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-110/221)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Check the condition of the rollers at the horizontal transport section and clean or replace
them.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 17
[E540] Transport jam during duplex printing (paper not reaching horizontal transport sensor-3)
Is the Horizontal transport sensor-3 working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[9]/[H])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Check the condition of the roller at the horizontal transport section and clean or replace it.
YES "
NO
Is the sensor in the jamming area working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: refer
to the following table)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO"
YES
1) Check if any multiple paper is fed from the drawer.
2) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 18
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors and covers
Jamming area
Sensor
Registration area
Registration sensor
03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E]
Exit/Reverse area
Exit sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[B]
Reverse sensor-1
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E]
Reverse sensor-2
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[C]
03-[FAX]OFF/[9]/[F]
03-[FAX]OFF/[9]/[G]
03-[FAX]OFF/[9]/[H]
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[3]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[C]
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[C]
03-[FAX]OFF/[3]/[C]
03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[C]
03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[A]
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 19
[E570] Transport jam during duplex printing (paper not reaching reverse sensor-1)
Is there any paper before the registration sensor when the exit cover is opened?
!
NO "
YES
Is the reverse sensor 1 working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the reverse motor driving?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-126)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the gate solenoid working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-274)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
1) Check if there is no mechanical loading at the exit/reversal gate.
2) Check the myler at the reverse section and clean or replace it.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 20
NO "
YES
Is the reverse sensor- 1/2 working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[D], [7]/[E])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
1) Check if the setting of the paper size is correct.
2) Check the condition of the roller at the reverse section and clean or replace it.
3) Check if there is no mechanical loading at the follower roller and no abnormality at the
myler.
4) Check if the adjustment of the reverse motor speed (05-453/454/456) is appropriate.
5) Replace the reverse sensor-2 if it is drastically damaged.
NO "
YES
Is the exit motor driving?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-120)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
1) Check if the setting of the paper size is correct.
2) Check if there is no abnormality and extraneous material at the guide and myler in front
of the exit roller.
3) Check if there is no mechanical loading at the exit follower roller.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 21
NO "
YES
<Simple discharging>
Is the gate solenoid working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-274)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the LGC board.
<Reversal discharging>
1) Check if the setting of the paper size is correct.
2) Check if there is no abnormality and extraneous material at the guide and myler in front
of the exit roller.
* Perform 05-447 for thick paper to increase the value by 2 to 4.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 22
YES "
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Check the rollers. Clean or replace them.
5
In case the paper is fed from the 2nd drawer, 3rd drawer, 4th drawer, Tandem LCF
Open the bypass unit cover. Is there any paper in front of the 1st drawer transport sensor?
l
l
!
YES "
NO
Are the 1st drawer transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[C])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
If any paper remains in the equipment or drawer, remove it.
Check the rollers. Clean or replace them.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 23
YES "
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[E])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Check the rollers. Clean or replace them.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 24
5.1.2
Paper misfeeding
[E110] Transport jam during duplay printing (paper not reaching registration sensor)
(First page of printing)
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor?
!
YES "
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the transport motor (M17) rotating?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-133,183)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Check if the spring of the follower roller of the intermediate transport roller is working properly.
YES
Check the transport roller. Clean or replace it.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 25
YES "
If the paper is damaged, remove the paper and check the followings.
1) Check if the paper is skewed, and correct it if it is skewed.
2) Check the paper amount.
3) Check if the paper is not the one with printing on its back side.
4) Check if the width of the side guides of the drawer is too narrow.
5) Check the motor-related adjustment value.
NO
Is the intermediate transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[A])
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the transport motor rotating?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-133,183)
NO "
YES
Check if the spring of the follower roller of the intermediate transport roller is working properly.
Replace the registration roller(rubber) if not solved.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 26
YES "
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[E])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the width of the side guides of the bypass unit too narrow?
Is the paper skewed?
!
YES "
Match the width of the side guides and that of the paper.
NO
Is the bypass feed clutch working? (Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-204)
Is the bypass feed sensor working? (Perform the input check in the test mode: 03[FAX]OFF/[6]/[G])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed clutch and bypass feed
sensor are disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN327 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
open circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or
open circuited.
5) Replace the bypass feed clutch and bypass feel sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the bypass transport roller, feed separation and separation rollers.
Clean or replace them.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 27
[E130] 1st drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching 1st drawer feed sensor)
Open the feed cover. Is there any paper in front of the 1st drawer transport sensor?
!
YES "
NO
Is the 1st drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[D])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the width of the side guides of the 1st drawer too narrow?
Is there any paper skewing?
!
YES "
NO
Is the 1st drawer feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-201)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Check the 1st drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller.
Clean or replace them.
* Check if the paper weight is within the specified range.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 28
[E140] 2nd drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching 2nd drawer feed sensor)
Open the drawer feed cover. Is there any paper in front of the 2nd drawer transport sensor?
!
YES "
NO
Is the 2nd drawer transport sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the width of the side guides of the 2nd drawer too narrow?
Is there any paper skewing?
!
YES "
NO
Is the 2nd drawer feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-202)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Check the 2nd drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller.
Clean or replace them.
* Check if the paper weight is within the specified range.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 29
[E150] 3rd drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching 3rd drawer feed sensor)
[E190] Tandem LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching feed sensor of 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF )
Open the feed cover. Is there any paper in front of the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor?
!
YES "
NO
Is the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[3]/[D])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
1) Check if the connector of the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor
is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN328 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
open circuited.
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board
are short circuited or open circuited.
5) Replace the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the width of the side guides of the 3rd drawer too narrow?
Is there any paper skewing?
!
YES "
NO
Is the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-226)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
1) Check if the connector of the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed clutch is
disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN328 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
open circuited.
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board
are short circuited or open circuited.
5) Replace the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed clutch.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller.
Clean or replace them.
* Check if the paper weight is within the specified range.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 30
[E160] 4th drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching 4th drawer feed sensor)
Open the feed cover. Is there any paper in front of the 4th drawer feed sensor?
!
YES "
NO
Is the 4th drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the width of the side guides of the 4th drawer too narrow?
Is there any paper skewing?
!
YES "
NO
NO "
YES
Check the 4th drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller.
Clean or replace them.
* Check if the paper weight is within the specified range.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 31
[E180] Option LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching Option LCF feed sensor)
Open the LCF front cover. Is there any paper in front of the LCF feed sensor?
!
YES "
NO
Is the LCF feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[D])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the external LCF transport motor driving?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-122/172)
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the LCF feed clutch working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-272)
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
1) Check if there is any abnormality at the transport drive unit.
2) Check the LCF feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller.
Clean or replace them.
* Check if the paper weight is within the specified range.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 32
5.1.3
YES "
NO
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX] ON/[9]/[H])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the LGC board.
YES "
NO
Is the side door switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 33
YES "
NO
Is the LCF side cover opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[B])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
1) Replace the LCF board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
[E460] Right center cover (bypass feed unit cover) open jam
Is the bypass feed unit cover open?
!
YES "
Remove the paper if there is any, then close the bypass feed unit cover.
NO
Is the bypass feed unit cover sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[ENERGY SAVER]OFF/[6]/[H])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed unit cover sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
open-circuited.
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC board are short- or opencircuited.
5) Replace the bypass feed unit cover sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 34
YES "
NO
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX] ON/[9]/[H])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Is the exit cover switch working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[A]
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 35
5.1.4
Note:
If any of the ADF board, original length detection sensor, read sensor, small original reverse
sensor and large original exit sensor has been replaced in an RADF-related troubleshooting,
perform Automatic adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization (05-356) in the
Adjustment mode. If EEPROM initialization (05-352) had been performed, be sure to perform RADF original guide width adjustment (05-367/368) consecutively.
YES "
NO
Is the transport force of the pickup belt, feed roller and separation roller insufficient?
!
YES "
NO
Is the original excessively curled or folded?
!
YES
Flatten and set it again.
NO "
1)
2)
3)
4)
YES
Replace the ADF board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 36
05/06
YES "
NO
Is the connector of the tray lift motor or the connector CN5 on the ADF board disconnected?
!
YES "
NO
Is the harness connecting the ADF board and tray lift motor open circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the connector CN12 or CN15 on the ADF board disconnected?
!
YES "
NO
Are the harnesses connecting the ADF board and the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor
or the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor open circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Replace the ADF board.
YES
Clean the rollers.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 37
[E723] Original not reaching small original reverse sensor (during scanning)
[E751] Original stopping at original intermediate transport sensor
[E752] Original not reaching original intermediate transport sensor
[E728] Original not reaching small original exit sensor (during scanning)
[E732] Original stopping at small original exit sensor
[E741] Original stopping at small original reverse sensor
[E742] Original not reaching small original reverse sensor (during reverse feeding)
[E743] Original not reaching small original exit sensor (during reverse feeding)
Are the registration roller, read roller and small original reverse roller stained?
!
YES "
NO
Are the small original exit flapper and small original reverse flapper operating normally?
!
NO
Adjust the small original exit solenoid.
[E725] Original stopping at read sensor (while its back side is being scanned)
Are the read roller and registration roller stained?
!
YES "
NO
Replace the rollers.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 38
05/05
[E733] Original not reaching large original exit sensor (exit section)
Are the read roller and reverse roller stained?
!
YES
NO
Is the reverse flapper working properly?
!
YES
NO
Adjust the reverse solenoid.
YES "
NO
Are the connector on the ADF board disconnected?
(CN11,CN13,CN15,CN16)
!
YES "
NO
Are the sensors working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX] OFF/[8]/[E], OFF/[7]/[H], OFF/[8]/[F],
OFF/[8]/[G], OFF/[8]/[H], OFF/[7]/[G], OFF/[7]/[F], OFF/[8]/[D], OFF/[8]/[C], OFF/[7]/[E])
!
YES "
NO
Are the connector of the sensors disconnected?
!
YES "
NO
In case of [E761],[E764],[E766],[E768], perform the automatic adjustment of RADF sensor.
In case of [E762],[E763],[E765],[E767], replace the sensor.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 39
NO "
YES
If the RADF opening / closing switch open circuited?
!
YES
Adjust the RADF opening switch.
YES "
NO
Is the jam access cover sensor working improperly?
!
YES "
NO
Is the harness between the ADF board and jam access cover opening/closing switch open
circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the jam access cover opening/closing switch working improperly?
!
YES "
NO
Is the harness between the ADF board and RADF opening/closing switch open circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the RADF opening/closing switch working improperly?
!
YES "
NO
Is 24V supplied from the copier?
!
YES "
NO
Check if the power at the copier is ON.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 40
YES "
NO
Is the harness between the ADF board and RADF open/close sensor open-circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the RADF open/close sensor working improperly?
!
YES "
NO
Is the harness between the ADF board and APS operation sensor open-circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the APS operation sensor working improperly?
!
YES "
NO
Replace the ADF board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 41
5.1.5
Finisher jam
YES "
NO
Is the connector J1 on the punch driver PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the punch driver PC board and punch home position sensor
(PI3P) open circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the punch home position sensor working properly?
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the punch driver PC board.
YES "
NO
Is the connector J17 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the inlet sensor working normally? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 42
YES "
NO
Is any of the connectors J17, J24, J9 and J11 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and buffer path inlet paper sensor
(PI17) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and buffer path paper sensor
(PI14) open circuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stapling tray sensor (PI4)
open circuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and delivery sensor (PI3) open
circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the buffer path inlet paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the buffer path paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the stapling tray sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the delivery sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 43
YES "
NO
Is any of the connectors J17, J24 and J11 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and buffer path inlet paper sensor(PI17) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and buffer path paper sensor
(PI14) open circuited?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and delivery sensor (PI3) open
circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the buffer path inlet paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the buffer path paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the delivery sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 44
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 45
YES "
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
!
YES "
End.
NO
Is the connector J8 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stapling home position sensor (PI22) open circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the stapling home position sensor working properly?
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES "
NO
Is the connector J17 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 46
YES "
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staples stuck in the stapling unit?
!
YES "
End
NO
Is the connector J8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and stitcher home position
switch (rear: MS5S, front: MS7S) open-circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Are the stitcher home position switches working properly?
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 47
YES "
NO
Is the saddle stitcher door closed?
!
NO "
YES
Is either of the connectors J10 or J11 on saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Are the harnesses connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and cover opening
sensors (PI2S: front door opening/closing sensor, PI3S:delivery cover sensor, PI9S: inlet
cover sensor) open-circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Are the cover opening sensors working properly?
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 48
YES "
NO
Is any of the connectors J10, J13 and J9 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and No.1 paper sensor
(PI18S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and No.2 paper sensor
(PI19S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and No.3 paper sensor
(PI20S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and vertical path paper
sensor (PI17S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and delivery sensor
(PI11S) open-circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the No.1 paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the No.2 paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the No.3 paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the vertical path paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the delivery sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 49
YES "
NO
Is the connector J17 on finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open-circuited?
Is either of the connectors J10 or J9 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and No.1 paper sensor
(PI18S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and No.2 paper sensor
(PI19S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and No.3 paper sensor
(PI20S) open-circuited?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and delivery sensor
(PI11S) open-circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the No.1 paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the No.2 paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the No.3 paper sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
Is the delivery sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 50
YES "
NO
Is the connector J17 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI1) open-circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
l
l
!
NO "
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 51
NO
Is the harness between the inserter control board and separation sensor open-circuited?
!
NO
Is the separation sensor working improperly?
!
NO
Replace the inserter control board.
YES "
NO
Is the harness between the inserter control board and separation sensor open-circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the separation sensor working improperly?
!
YES "
NO
Replace the inserter control board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 52
NO
Is the harness between the inserter control board and reverse path sensor is open-circuited?
!
NO
Is the reverse path sensor working improperly?
!
NO
Replace the inserter control board.
YES "
NO
Is the harness between the inserter control board and transport sensor is open-circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Is the transport sensor working impropely?
!
YES "
NO
Replace the inserter control board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 53
YES "
NO
Are the separation sensor, reverse path sensor and transport sensor working improperly?
!
YES "
NO
Replace the inserter control board.
NO "
YES
Is the separation sensor working improperly?
!
YES "
NO
Perform the width adjustment of the inserter tray side guide.
NO
1) Replace the copier LGC board.
2) Replace the IPC board.
3) Replace the inserter control board.
NO
1) Check the installation state of the cover.
2) Replace the cover switch and plate spring.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 54
NO
1) Replace the SYS board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
YES "
NO
1) Check if the voltage (24V) is being supplied to the finisher.
2) Check the connection of the LGC board and IPC board.
3) Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and finisher I/F connector of the equipment side is open circuited.
4) Check if the harness connecting the I/F connector of the finisher side and finisher controller PC board is open circuited.
5) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO "
YES
Are the IPC board and LGC board properly connected to each other?
!
NO "
YES
Is the harness securely connected to the IPC board?
!
NO "
YES
Is any of the connector pins of the harness connecting the equipment and finisher disconnected or any of those harnesses open circuited?
!
NO "
YES
1) Replace the IPC board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
3) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 55
5.1.6
NO "
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[E], /[2]/[E], /[3]/[E] ,/[4]/[E])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
1)
2)
3)
4)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 56
NO "
YES
Are the 3rd drawer/tandem LCF tray-up sensor and tandem LCF bottom sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[3]/[E], /[8]/[F])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
1) Check if the driving mechanism is abnormal.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 57
NO "
1) Check if the connector of the Tandem LCF end fence motor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are
open circuited.
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are
short circuited or open circuited.
5) Replace the Tanden LCF end fence motor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Are the LCF end fence stop position sensors working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G], /[8]/[H])
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
1)
2)
3)
4)
YES
1) Check if the driving mechanism is abnormal.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 58
NO "
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX] OFF/[5]/[E]
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
1) Check if the tray lifting mechanism has no abnormality.
2) Replace the LCF board.
3) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 59
5.1.7
YES "
1) Check if the connectors on the CCD and SLG boards are disconnected.
2) Check if the shading correction plate is detached or dirty.
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the CCD board is short circuited or
open circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or
open circuited.
5) Replace the lens unit.
6) Replace the SLG board.
NO
1) Check if the connectors of the exposure lamp and inverter are disconnected.
2) Check the SLG board if the connector pin CN1 is disconnected and the harness is short
circuited or open circuited.
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
4) Replace the SLG board.
5) Replace the inverter.
6) Replace the exposure lamp.
[C270] Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a specified period of time
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the
power and check the following items.
Are the carriages slightly moved to the feeding direction? Are the carriages staying at a
position other than home position?
l
l
!
YES "
NO
1) Check if the connector pin is disconnected and the harness is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the SLG board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 60
[C280] Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a specified period of time
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the
power and check the following items.
Do the carriages make a big noise after they arrive at the home position?
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
YES "
NO
The carriages are stopped at the home position and do not move.
1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are short circuited or
open circuited.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the SLG board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 61
5.1.8
Caution
Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the IH control circuit
and IH coil.
The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged after a while
the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough before checking.
Check if the power voltage is normal.(Is the voltage during the operation 10% of the rated voltage?)
Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
Key in "400", then press [START].
Change the current status counter value "1" or "2" to "0", then press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
(to cancel [C411/C412]).
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready
state.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 62
5
2. Check the LGC board
(1)
(2)
(3)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 63
Check if the AC input connector on the IH control board, the LGC I/F connectors CN455 is disconnected?
Check if the fuse on the IH control board has blown.
Replace the IH control board.
[C480] IH abnormality
1. Check the IH control board
(1)
(2)
(3)
Check if the IGBT or IGBT radiation plate are normal. (Is the radiation plate securely attached?)
Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short- or open-circuited.
Replace the IH control board.
Check if the IGBT or IGBT radiation plate are normal. (Is the radiation plate securely attached?)
Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short- or open-circuited.
Replace the IH control board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 64
Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if NVRAM is mounted.
Replace the LGC board.
Check if the connector of the web motor and connector pins are not disconnected.
Check if the harness at the fuser unit is not open-circuited.
Check if the connector of the LGC board and connector pins are not disconnected.
Check if the harness between the connector of the LGC board and the fuser unit is not open circuited.
Replace the LGC board.
Replace the fuser unit.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 65
5.1.9
Check if the harness connecting the ADF board and SLG board is disconnected or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the ADF board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the ADF board.
Replace the SLG board.
Check if the conductor pattern around IC57 and IC58 is not short- or open-circuited.
Replace the LGC board.
Check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected properly.
Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
Replace the IPC board.
Replace the LGC board.
Check if the harness between the LGC board and PLG board is not disconnected or open-circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern around IC13, IC55, IC125 and CN342 on the LGC board is not
short circuited or open circuited.
Check if the conductor pattern around IC9, IC25, IC32 and CN204 on the PLG board is not shortor opencircuited.
Check if the connector CN103, CN104 on the SYS board is disconnected.
Replace the LGC board.
Replace the PLG board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 66
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 67
5.1.10
Note:
If any of the ADF board, original length detection sensor, read sensor, small original reverse
sensor and large original exit sensor has been replaced in an RADF-related troubleshooting,
perform Automatic adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization (05-356) in the
Adjustment mode. If EEPROM initialization (05-352) had been performed, be sure to perform RADF original guide width adjustment (05-367/368) consecutively.
Check the ADF board, mainly IC3, for short circuits and open circuits.
Replace the ADF board.
Check if there is any foreign matter between the read sensor and the reflecting mirror. Check if
the reflecting mirror is dirty.
Check if the harness connecting the read sensor and the ADF board is open circuited.
Check the circuits and connectors on the ADF board, mainly IC6, IC11 and CN11 and CN15, for
short circuits and open circuits.
Replace the read sensor.
Replace the ADF board.
Check if there is any foreign matter between the original length detection sensor and reflecting
mirror. Check if the reflecting mirror is dirty.
Check if the harness connecting the original length detection sensor and the ADF board is open
circuited.
Check the circuits and connectors on the ADF board, mainly IC6, IC11 and CN15, for short circuits and open circuits.
Replace the original length detection sensor.
Replace the ADF board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 68
YES "
NO
Is the reflective mirror tainted?
!
YES "
NO
Is the conductor pattern around IC6, IC11 and CN16 on the ADF board short- or open-circuited?
!
YES "
NO
Replace the small original reverse sensor.
NO "
NO "
YES
Is the power voltage for CN5-5 and CN6 on the ADF board 24V?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the lifting tray motor.
YES
Is the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor working properly when the lifting tray is lifted?
!
NO "
YES
Is the lifting tray lowered when originals are removed from the original tray?
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
l
l
l
!
NO "
YES
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 69
YES "
NO
Is the reflective mirror tainted?
!
YES "
NO
Is the conductor pattern around IC6, IC11 and CN11 on the ADF board short circuited or
open circuited?
l
l
!
YES "
NO
1) Replace the large original exit sensor.
2) Perform the sensor automatical adjustment of ADF
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 70
5.1.11
NO "
(e-STUDIO520,e-STUDIO600,e-STUDIO720)
1) Check if the connector CN209 on the PLG board is disconnected.
2) Check if the harness is open circuited and the connector pin is disconnected.
3) Check if the following signals are transmitted on the pins of the connector CN209 on the PLG board.
Pin 1: 271V, Pin 2: GND, Pin 3: Less than or equal to 1V (Lo),
Pin 4: Less than or equal to 0.7 V (Lo), Pin 5: Do not touch.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the PLG board is short circuited or
open circuited.
5) Replace the laser optical unit.
6) Replace the PLG board.
(e-STUDIO850)
1) Check if the connector CN206 on the PLG board is disconnected.
2) Check if the harness is open circuited and the connector pin is disconnected.
3) Check if the following signals are transmitted on the pins of the connector CN206 on the PLG board.
Pin 1: 271V, Pin 2: GND, Pin 3: Less than or equal to 1V (Lo),
Pin 4: Less than or equal to 0.7 V (Lo), Pin 5: Do not touch.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the PLG board is short circuited or
open circuited.
5) Replace the laser optical unit.
6) Replace the PLG board.
YES
Is the deformed image output?
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 71
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
(e-STUDIO520,e-STUDIO600,e-STUDIO720)
1) Check if the connector CN209 on the PLG board is about to be disconnected.
2) Check if the harness is about to be open circuited and the connector
pin is disconnected.
3) Check if the following signals are transmitted on the pins of the connector CN209 on the PLG board.
Pin 1: 271V, Pin 2: GND, Pin 3: Less than or equal to 1V (Lo),
Pin 4: Less than or equal to 0.7 V (Lo), Pin 5: Do not touch.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the PLG board is short circuited or
open circuited.
5) Check if the laser unit cooling fan is not stopped.
6) Check if the intake area of the laser unit cooling fan is not blocked.
7) Replace the laser optical unit.
8) Replace the PLG board.
(e-STUDIO850)
1) Check if the connector CN206 on the PLG board is about to be disconnected.
2) Check if the harness is about to be open circuited and the connector
pin is disconnected.
3) Check if the following signals are transmitted on the pins of the connector CN206 on the PLG board.
Pin 1: 271V, Pin 2: GND, Pin 3: Less than or equal to 1V (Lo),
Pin 4: Less than or equal to 0.7 V (Lo), Pin 5: Do not touch.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the PLG board is short circuited or
open circuited.
5) Check if the laser unit cooling fan is not stopped.
6) Check if the intake area of the laser unit cooling fan is not blocked.
7) Replace the laser optical unit.
8) Replace the PLG board.
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the PLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Check if the grounding wire of the high-voltage unit (e.g. developer unit, transfer unit) is
grounded securely.
3) Check if the bias contact point of the high-voltage unit is contacted securely. (Check if
the point is not stained either.)
4) Check if the metal plates of the transport system are grounded securely.
5) Check if the equipment is grounded securely?
6) Check if the laser unit cooling fan is not stopped.
7) Check if the intake area of the laser unit cooling fan is not blocked.
8) Replace the laser optical unit.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 72
NO "
(e-STUDIO520,e-STUDIO600,e-STUDIO720)
1) Replace the harness. Reconnect the connector.
2) Check if the connector(J207) on PLG board hold the harness
securely?
3) Check if the following signals are transmitted on the pin of the connector(CN1) on the PLG board?
Pin 1: 5V, Pin 3: 0V
4) Replace the laser optical unit.
(e-STUDIO850)
1) Replace the harness. Reconnect the connector.
2) Check if the connector(J207,J208) on PLG board hold the harness
securely?
3) Replace the laser optical unit.
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the PLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Check if the grounding wire of the high-voltage unit (e.g. developer unit, transfer unit) is
grounded securely.
3) Check if the bias contact point of the high-voltage unit is contacted securely. (Check if
the point is not stained either.)
4) Check if the metal plates of the transport system are grounded securely.
5) Check if the equipment is grounded securely?
6) Replace the laser optical unit.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 73
YES "
NO
1) Replace the PLG board.
2) Replace the laser optical unit.
YES "
NO
1) Replace the PLG board.
2) Replace the SYS board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 74
5.1.12
NO "
YES
Is the shutter securely attached to the shutter upper/lower bars?
!
NO "
Attach it securely.
YES
Turn the feed roller-2 in reverse by hand. Do the shutter upper/lower bars move up and
down?
l
!
NO "
Fix the mechanism including the shutter upper/lower bars and gears of
the feed roller-2.
YES
Is the shutter closed detecting switch (MS4) working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[Procedure 2]
Is second feed motor (M8) rotating in reverse at the fixed timing?
!
NO "
YES
Is the shutter securely attached to the shutter upper/lower bars?
!
NO "
Attach it securely.
YES
Turn feed roller-2 in reverse by hand. Do the shutter upper/lower bars move up and down?
l
!
NO "
Fix the mechanism including the shutter upper/lower bars and gears of
the feed roller-2.
YES
Is the shutter open sensor (PI5) working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 75
[Procedure 3]
Check the safety zone switch (MS3). Is the switch working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Is the safety zone switch (MS3) correctly pressed?
!
NO "
YES
Is the shutter closed detecting switch (MS4) working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Is the shutter closed detecting switch (MS4) correctly pressed?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO "
YES
Is the delivery motor clock sensor (PI10) working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Does the voltage between J11-4 and -5 on the finisher controller PC board become 24V
when the delivery motor starts rotating?
!
NO "
YES
Is the wiring between the delivery motor and finisher controller PC board correct?
!
YES "
NO
Replace the motor.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 76
NO "
YES
Is the tray 1 lifting mechanism working properly?
!
NO "
YES
Is 24V supplied to the tray1 lifting motor (M5) from the finisher control board at the timing of
tray driving?
!
NO "
YES
Is the harness between the finisher control board and tray 1 lifting motor normal?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the tray 1 lifting motor.
[Procedure 2]
YES "
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and tray 1 lifting
motor normal?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the tray 1 lifting motor.
NO
Is the power supplied to the motor from the finisher control board at the timing of tray 1 lifting?
!
NO "
YES
Is there any abnormality at the tray 1 lifting mechanism?
!
YES "
YES
Correct the defect of the mechanism.
[Procedure 3]
Is the tray 2 home position sensor (PI25) working properly?
!
NO "
YES
Is the tray 2 lifting mechanism working properly?
!
NO "
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 77
YES
Is 24V supplied to the tray 2 lifting motor (M10) from the finisher control board at the timing
of tray driving?
!
NO "
YES
Is the harness between the finisher control board and tray 2 lifting motor normal?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the tray 2 lifting motor.
[Procedure 4]
Is the tray 2 lifted/lowered?
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
YES "
Is the harness between the finisher control board and tray 2 lifting motor
normal?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the tray 2 lifting motor.
NO
Is the power supplied to the motor from the finisher control board at the timing of tray 2 lifting?
!
NO "
YES
Is there any abnormality at the tray 2 lifting mechanism?
!
YES "
NO
Replace the tray 2 lifting motor.
[Procedure 5]
Is the tray lifting mechanism working properly?
!
NO "
YES
Is the tray coming close detection switch working properly?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 78
NO "
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the alignment motor (M5S) correct?
!
YES "
NO
Is there any mechanical problem with the alignment guide movement path?
!
YES "
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the alignment motor?
!
NO "
YES
END
5
[CB50] Staple motor abnormality
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler normal?
!
NO "
YES
Is the problem solved by replacing the stapler?
!
YES "
END
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 79
NO "
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler shift motor (M4) correct?
!
YES "
NO
Is there any mechanical problem with the stapler stand motion path?
!
YES "
NO
Try replacing the staple shift motor. Is the problem corrected?
!
YES "
END
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 80
YES "
END
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the height sensor (PS1) correct?
!
YES "
NO
Is the voltage between J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the finisher controller PC board 5V DC?
!
NO "
YES
Re-adjust the height sensor. Replace the height sensor if it still causes the problem.
[Procedure 2]
Is the connector J6 on the finisher controller PC board, J114 of the height sensor (PS1) or
relay connector J212 and J213 disconnected?
!
YES "
NO
Is the voltage between J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the finisher controller PC board 5V DC?
!
NO "
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and height sensor correct?
!
YES "
NO
Replace the height sensor.
[Procedure 3]
Is the problem solved by readjusting the DIP switch?
!
YES "
END
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and height sensor (PS1) correct?
!
YES "
NO
Is the voltage between J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the finisher controller PC board 5V DC?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the height sensor.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 81
YES "
End.
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
Replace tha punch driver PC board.
NO "
YES
Is the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) operating at the fixed timing?
!
YES "
NO
Is the paper pushing plate drive mechanism normal?
!
NO "
YES
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper pushing plate motor (M8S)?
!
NO "
YES
END
[Procedure 2]
Is the paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15S) working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Is the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) operating at the fixed timing?
!
YES "
NO
Is there any problem with the paper pushing plate drive mechanism?
!
YES "
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper pushing plate motor (M8S)?
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 82
NO "
YES
END
[Procedure 3]
Is the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1S) working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Is the paper pushing plate motor (M8S) operating at the fixed timing?
!
YES "
NO
Is there any problem with the pushing plate drive mechanism?
!
YES "
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper pushing plate motor (M8S)?
!
NO "
YES
END
NO "
YES
Are the stitcher home position switches (MS7S/MS5S) on the front and rear stitchers working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Are the front and rear stitchers operating at the fixed timing?
!
NO "
YES
Check the wiring between the stitcher and saddle stitcher controller PC board. If there is no
problem, replace the controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 83
NO "
YES
Is the alignment motor (M5S) operating at the fixed timing?
!
YES "
NO
Is the alignment plate drive mechanism normal?
!
NO "
YES
Is the problem solved by replacing the alignment motor (M5S)?
!
NO "
YES
END
NO "
YES
Is the guide motor (M3S) operating at the fixed timing?
!
YES "
NO
Is the guide plate drive mechanism normal?
!
NO "
YES
Is the problem solved by replacing the guide motor (M3S)?
!
NO "
YES
END
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 84
NO "
YES
Is the paper folding motor (M2S) operating at the fixed timing?
!
YES "
NO
Is the paper folding roller drive mechanism normal?
!
NO "
YES
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper folding motor (M2S)?
!
NO "
YES
END
5
[CBF0] Paper positioning plate motor abnormality
Is the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S) working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Is the paper positioning plate operating at the fixed timing?
!
YES "
NO
Is the paper positioning plate drive mechanism normal?
!
NO "
YES
Is the problem solved by replacing the paper positioning plate motor (M4S)?
!
NO "
YES
END
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 85
NO "
YES
Is the wiring between the sensor and the saddle stitcher correct?
!
YES "
NO
Is 5V DC being supplied from J9-7 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board?
!
NO "
YES
Is J9-11 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board correctly connected to the ground?
!
NO "
YES
END
[Procedure 2]
Is the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14S) connected to the saddle stitcher
controller PC board?
!
NO "
YES
Is the wiring between the sensor and the saddle stitcher correct?
!
YES "
NO
Is 5V DC being supplied from J9-10 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board?
!
NO "
YES
Is J9-11 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board properly connected to the ground?
!
NO "
YES
END
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 86
[Procedure 3]
Is the paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15S) connected to the saddle stitcher controller PC board?
!
NO "
YES
Is the wiring between the sensor and the saddle stitcher correct?
!
YES "
NO
Is 5V DC being supplied from J9-13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board?
!
NO "
YES
Is J9-14 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board properly connected to the ground?
!
NO "
YES
END
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 87
NO "
YES
Is the inlet cover switch (MS1S) working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Measure the voltage of J10-8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board when the inlet door
is open. Is it 5V?
!
NO "
YES
Measure the voltage between J1-1 (+) and J1-2 (-) on the saddle stitcher controller PC
board. Is it 24 V?
!
NO "
YES
Check the wiring between J19 on the finisher controller PC board and J1 on the saddle
stitcher controller PC board. If there is no problem, replace the saddle stitcher controller PC
board.
[Procedure 2]
Is the switch actuator for the front door working properly?
!
NO "
YES
Is the front cover switch (MS2S) working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Measure the voltage of J11-12 on the saddle switcher controller PC board when the front
door is opened. Is it 5V?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 88
[Procedure 3]
Is the switch actuator for the delivery door working properly?
!
NO "
YES
Is the delivery cover switch working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Measure the voltage of J11-9 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board when the delivery
door is opened. Is it 5V ?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES "
END
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the saddle stitcher controller PC
board connected?
!
YES "
NO
Measure the voltage between J3-2 (+) and J3-1 (-) on the finisher controller PC board. Is it
DC 5V?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 89
NO "
YES
Is the swing guide closed detection switch-2 (MS6) working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Is the swing guide open sensor (PI18) working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Is the swing motor (M7) rotating in reverse at the fixed timing?
!
NO "
YES
END
[Procedure 2]
Is the safety zone switch (MS3) working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Is the safety zone switch (MS3) correctly pressed?
!
NO "
YES
Is the swing guide closed detection switch-2 (MS6) working normally?
!
NO "
YES
Is the swing guide closed detection switch-2 (MS6) correctly pressed?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[Procedure 3]
Is the swing motor clock sensor (PI20) working normally?
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 90
NO "
YES
Does the voltage between J11-6 and -7 on the finisher controller PC board become 24V
when the swing motor starts rotating?
!
NO "
YES
Is the wiring between the swing motor and finisher controller PC board correct?
!
YES "
NO
Replace the swing motor.
NO "
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and horizontal registration home position sensor (PI1P) correct?
!
NO "
YES
Is there any problem with the horizontal registration mechanism?
!
YES "
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the horizontal registration motor (M2P)?
!
YES "
END
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch motor?
!
YES "
END
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 91
NO "
YES
Is the wiring between the punch home sensor (PI3P) and finisher controller PC board correct?
!
NO "
YES
Is the punching mechanism normal?
!
YES "
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch motor (M1P) ?
!
YES "
END
NO
Is the problem solved by replacing the punch driver board?
!
YES "
END
NO
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO "
YES
Is 5V output to CN13-5 on the inserter control board?
!
YES "
NO
Replace the inserter control board.
YES
1) Replace the inserter control board.
2) Perform the inserter tray volume adjustment.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 92
NO "
YES
Is the conductor pattern around Q11, Q16 and CN8 on the inserter control board short circuited or open circuited?
!
NO "
YES
Replace the inserter control board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 93
5.1.13
Is the transport belt unit working normally? (there is no extraneous material or toner clod).
Check if the connector of the transfer belt cam motor is not disconnected.
Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is disconnected.
Check if the fuse on the LVPS has blown.
Check if the transfer belt release detection sensor and transfer belt contact detection sensor is
working properly.
Replace the transfer belt cam motor.
Replace the LGC board.
NO "
YES
1) Check if the circuit pattern between the Engine-CPU and FROM is short circuited or
open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board if this error occurs frequently.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 94
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Check if the cleaning brush, recovery toner transport auger and recycle toner transport auger are
not locked (no extraneous material or toner clod in both the toner transport sections at the
cleaner unit and recycle toner unit).
Is the cleaning brush drive motor (M13) disconnected?
Check if the connector (CN337) on the LGC board and connector pins are not disconnected.
Replace the cleaning brush drive motor and recycle toner transport motor (M8).
Replace the LGC board.
Check if the transport auger is not locked (there is no extraneous material or toner clod).
Is the toner bag full detection sensor (S11) working normally?
Is the used toner transport motor (M9) disconnected?
Check if the connector (CN333) on the LGC board and connector pins are not disconnected.
Replace the used toner transport motor.
Replace the LGC board.
Check if the recycle toner transport auger is not locked (no extraneous material or toner clod in
both the transport sections at the toner recycle unit).
Is the Recycle toner transport motor (M8) disconnected?
Check if the connector (CN337) on the LGC board and connector pins are not disconnected.
Replace the recycle toner transport motor.
Replace the LGC board.
(3)
(4)
(5)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 95
YES "
NO
1)
2)
3)
4)
YES "
NO
1) Replace the drum thermistor.
2) Replace the LGC board.
Check if the transport auger and paddle are not locked (no extraneous material or toner clod in
both the toner transport sections at the cleaner unit).
Is the new toner transport motor disconnected?
Check if the connector of the LGC board and connector Pins are not disconnected.
Replace the new toner transport motor.
Replace the LGC board.
Check if the recycle toner transport motor is not locked (no extraneous material or toner clod in
both the toner transport sections at the recycle toner unit).
Is the disconnected?
Check if the connector of the LGC board and connector Pins are not disconnected.
Replace the hopper motor.
Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 96
Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
When the message SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE? is displayed on the LCD, press [INITIALIZE]. (SRAM is cleared.)
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the SYS board.
Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
When the message FRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE? is displayed on the LCD, press [INITIALIZE]. (FRAM is initialized.)
Note:
When the FRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are
also initialized. Readjust them after the FRAM initialization.
(3)
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the FRAM on the
SYS board.
5
(1)
(2)
Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
When the message FRAM/SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE? is displayed on the LCD,
press [INITIALIZE]. (SRAM is cleared and FRAM is initialized.)
Note:
When the FRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are
also initialized. Readjust them after the FRAM initialization.
(3)
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the FRAM on the
SYS board.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 97
Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
Key in 662 and press the [START] button. (Partition clearing is performed.)
Restart the equipment.
Access TopAccess. Click the [Administration] tab, and then click the Maintenance Menu to open.
Then install the Point and Print driver.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 98
05/11
5.1.14
Notes:
1. When initializing the Electronic Filing (Setting Mode (08-666)), all data in the Electronic
Filing are erased. Back up the data in the Electronic Filing by using the Electronic Filing Function of TopAccess before the initialization.
2. When initializing the shared folder (Setting Mode (08-667)), all data in the shared folder
are erased. Back up the data in the shared folder by using Explorer before the initialization.
3. When formatting the HDD (Setting Mode (08-690)), all data in the shared folder, Electronic Filing, Address Book, template, etc. are erased. Back up these data before the
initialization. Note that some of data cannot be backed up refer to
P.5-150 "5.3.1
Replacing HDD" for the details.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 99
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 100
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 101
05/05
[1C82] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
Reset the Received Fax Forward.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 102
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 103
05/05
[2B32] Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of client's access (being edited, etc.)
Check if the specified document exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified document.
Perform the job in error again.
If the specified document can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08666).
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 104
Reduce the number of inserting pages and perform the job again.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 105
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 106
5
[2C64] Terminal mail address unset
Reset the Terminal mail address.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 107
05/05
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 108
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 109
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 110
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 111
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 112
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 113
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 114
5
[4036] User authentication error
Perform the authentication or register as a user, and then perform the printing again.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 115
5.1.15
NO "
YES
Is the printout blank?
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
YES "
Check the output of 05-205 (developer bias) and 05-210 (main charger
grid bias). The output reference value of the developer bias is -50022V
and that of the main charger grid bias is -39422V. If the output is outside of the range, replace the high-voltage transformer. If it is within the
allowance range, replace the PLG board or LGC board (See " Troubleshooting for the Image"). When the equipment is ready for printing, perform image quality control enforcement / condition check (image check;
described later).
NO
Is the image density of the image uneven or remarkably low?
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
1) Perform the test print (04-113) again. If the printout is blank, return to
the previous step " Is the printout blank?".
2) If the test print is normal, check the surface of the image quality sensor, clean it or replace it, and then perform the image quality control
enforcement / condition check (image check; described later).
YES
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 116
05/04
(The following procedure is for the normal image printing. See " Troubleshooting for the
Image".)
Is the developer unit inserted securely and locked properly?
l
l
!
NO "
Insert the developer unit securely until it locks. When the normal image
is able to be output, perform the image quality control enforcement /
condition check (image check; described later).
YES
Is developer material in the developer remarkably low or any foreign matter in the developer?
l
l
!
YES "
Replace the developer material and the developer unit if needed. When
the normal images is able to be output, perform the image quality control
enforcement / condition check (image check; described later).
NO
Is the main charger wrongly installed or the main charger grid stained?
l
l
l
!
YES "
Install the main charger properly. Clean the main charger grid. If the
main charger grid is damaged, replace it. When the normal image is
able to be output, perform image quality control enforcement / condition
check (image check; described later).
NO
Is there any stain or dent on the surface of the photoconductive drum?
l
l
l
!
YES "
Clean the photoconductive drum or replace it. Replace the cleaner unit
and developer unit if needed. When the normal image is able to be output, perform the image quality control enforcement / condition check
(image check; described later).
NO
Replace the LGC board, and perform the image quality control enforcement / condition
check (image check; described later).
Replace the laser unit, and perform the image quality control enforcement / condition check
(image check; described later).
Replace the HVT board, and perform the image quality control enforcement / condition
check (image check; described later).
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 117
YES "
Clear the problem so that the correct image is printed. See " Troubleshooting for the Image" for details. When the correct image is able to be
output, perform the image quality control enforcement / condition check
(image check; described later).
NO
Is there any stain or dent on the surface of the photoconductive drum?
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
YES "
NO
Is the image quality sensor wrongly installed to the cleaner?
l
l
!
YES "
Install the image quality sensor to the cleaner unit properly, and perform
the image quality control enforcement / condition check (image check;
described later).
NO
Is the surface of the image quality sensor stained?
l
l
!
YES "
NO
Is the connector of the image quality sensor, connector of the LGC board CN337, CN342 or
connector of the SYS board CN103 disconnected?
l
!
YES "
Plug the connector again, and then perform the image quality control
enforcement / condition check (image check; described later).
NO
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor, the LGC board and
the SYS board or LGC board and the switching power supply open-circuited?
l
!
YES "
Replace the open-circuited harness, and then perform the image quality
control enforcement / condition check (image check; described later).
NO
Is the power voltage for the 12V power normal?
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 118
l
l
!
NO "
Check the power system, replace the switching power supply, and then
perform the image quality control enforcement / condition check (image
check; described later).
YES
Is the value for the image quality sensor output value (Light source off) 05-292 outside the
range between 50 and 230?
Is the value for the image quality sensor light amount adjustment result 05-296 "0 "or "255"?
Is the value for the image quality sensor light amount adjustment result 05-296 other than "0
"or "255"?
Is the power voltage output (Vout2) that is created in the sensor outside the range?
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
YES "
1) Is toner adhered to the connector that connects the cleaner unit and
this equipment and the connector almost short-circuited or disconnected? Replace the harness if needed, and then perform the image
quality control enforcement / condition check (image check;
described later).
2) Replace the LGC board, and perform the image quality control
enforcement / condition check (image check; described later).
3) Replace the image quality sensor, and perform the image quality
control enforcement / condition check (image check; described later).
NO
Replace the LGC board, and perform the image quality control enforcement / condition
check (image check; described later).
<<Procedure of the "enforced performing of image quality control"/"control status check">>
Set the value for the number of times of sensor abnormality (08-800) to "0".
Set the value for the Image quality closed-loop control (08-1809), (08-1810) to "0" (valid).
Perform the "enforced performing of image quality control" (05-290).
Check the control status of the image quality control (05-291) and number of times of sensor abnormality (08-800).
Are both values for 05-291 and 08-800 "0"?
Perform the test print (04-113: Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps). Is the
image printed properly?
!
YES "
END
NO
See " Troubleshooting for the Image" and clear the problem.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 119
YES "
END
NO
See " Troubleshooting for the Image" and clear the problem.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 120
5.1.16
YES "
After removing, if any, dust and correcting the defect, perform the "surface potential sensor control check" (described later).
NO
Is the connector of LGC board CN337, CN342 or that of SYS board CN103 disconnected?
l
!
YES "
Connect them properly again, and perform drum surface potential sensor control / condition check (described later).
NO
Is the main charger wrongly installed?
Are the main charger grid/wire wrongly installed?
Is the charger leakage, etc. occurring?
l
l
!
YES "
Remove the dusts or toner stains if any, and then install them properly.
Perform the drum surface potential sensor control / condition check
(described later)
NO
Check the value for 05-244. Is the value for 05-244 within the range between 400 and 800?
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
1) Perform the charging transformer output (05-210) and check that the
value is within the range of -50012V. If the voltage is outside the
range, replace the HVT board and perform the drum surface potential sensor control / condition check (described later).
2) When the charging transformer output is within the range of 50012V, replace the drum surface potential sensor, and perform the
drum surface potential sensor control / condition check (described
later).
3) If the problem still occurs, replace the LGC board, and perform the
drum surface potential sensor control/condition check (described
later).
YES
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 121
Check the value for 05-268 and 05-269. Is the value which is subtracted the value for 05268 from the one for 05-269 "400" or more?
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
!
NO "
1) Replace the HVT board, and perform the drum surface potential sensor control / condition check (described later).
2) Replace the photoconductive drum, and perform the drum surface
potential sensor control / condition check (described later).
3) Replace the surface potential sensor, and perform the drum surface
potential sensor control / condition check (described later).
4) If the problem still occurs, replace the LGC board, and perform the
drum surface potential sensor control / condition check (described
later).
YES
Replace the LGC board and perform the drum surface potential sensor control / condition
check (described later).
<<Procedure of the "surface potential sensor control check">>
1) Set the value for the number of detected abnormalities of the drum surface potential
control (08-1812) to "0".
2) Set the value for the drum surface potential setting (08-1813) to "0" (valid).
3) Perform the "enforced performing of image quality control" (05-290).
4) Check the status of drum surface potential sensor control (05-242) and number of drum
surface potential sensor control abnormality (08-1812).
Are both values for 05-242 and 08-1812 "0"?
Perform the test print (04-113: Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps). Is there
any problem with the image?
!
YES "
End
NO
See " Troubleshooting for the Image" to clear the problem.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 122
5.1.17
When a message notifying the toner cartridge needs to be replaced is displayed and the cartridge is
replaced accordingly, but the message remains displayed
When a message notifying the toner cartridge needs to be replaced is displayed and the equipment
simultaneously stops its operation during the process of a job (The equipment should keep its operation for a while even if such message is displayed.)
The Auto Supply Order function does not work.
Countermeasure
1) Check if the connector or connector pins on the toner drive are disconnected.
2) Replace the remaining toner detection sensor.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 123
5.2
If any abnormal image occurs in the test copying, perform trouble shooting for the image.
1) Abnormality of image density / Gray balance
Gray balance
Feeding direction
Image density
Fig.5-1
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Density/Gray balance
Printer section
Scanner
Clean them.
Printed image
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 124
Feeding direction
2) Background fogging
Fig.5-2
Defective area
Step
Check items
Density reproduction
Printer section
Parameter adjustment
value
Scanner
Clean them.
Developer material/Toner/
Photoconductive drum
Prescription
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 125
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Developer unit
10
11
12
13
14
Note:
1. Toner density correcting method
Change the setting value 'Toner density life correction setting (08-414)' (6 is the default setting.)
0: Appox. 0.75% lower than the current value
1: Appox. 0.50% lower than the current value
2: Appox. 0.25% lower than the current value
3: The current value (Default setting)
4: Appox. 0.15% higher than the current value
5: Appox. 0.25% higher than the current value
6: Appox. 0.50% higher than the current value
7: Appox. 0.75% higher than the current value
<Caution for correction>
When increasing or decreasing the toner density too much, the image may become poor or the
life of developer material, cleaner, photoconductive drum and fuser unit, etc. may shorten. Therefore it is not recommended to correct (to shift) the toner density basically. If it is shifted, make
sure that the image may be improper in a few minutes after shifting.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 126
3) Moire/lack of sharpness
Feeding direction
Fig.5-3
Moire
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Density reproduction
Parameter adjustment
value
Printer section
Lack of sharpness
Defective area
Step
Check items
Density reproduction
Parameter adjustment
value
Printer section
Prescription
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 127
Feeding direction
Approx.188mm
4) Toner offset
Fig.5-4
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 188 mm toward the dark image.)
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Density
Fuser unit
Is the pressure of the fuser roller nor- Check the pressure releasing parts
mal?
and pressurization mechanism.
Check the drive system of the cleaning web. Check and correct setting
(08-403, 1252-6 1252-7)
10
11
12
Fuser unit
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 128
Defective area
Step
Check items
13
14
15
Developer material/Toner
16
Scanner
17
Clean them.
Paper
Prescription
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 129
Feeding direction
5) Blurred image
Fig.5-5
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Paper
Bedewed scanner
Drum
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 130
Feeding direction
6) Poor fusing
Fig.5-6
Defective area
IH electric power
Step
Check items
Prescription
Developer material/Toner
Thermistor
Paper
10
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 131
Feeding direction
7) Blank copy
Fig.5-7
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
High-voltage transformer
(Transfer charger, Developer bias)
Check and correct the engaging condition of the developer unit gears.
Drum
Developer unit
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 132
Feeding direction
8) Solid copy
Fig.5-8
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Scanner
Remove it.
Main charger
Install it securely.
High-voltage transformer
(Main charger)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 133
Feeding direction
Fig.5-9
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Developer unit
Drum
Transport path
Discharge LED
Scanner
10
Clean them.
11
Cleaner
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 134
Feeding direction
Fig.5-10
Defective area
Main charger
Step
Check items
Prescription
Drum
Discharge LED
Developer unit
Check the drive system of the developer unit, or clean the sleeve surface.
Drive system
High-voltage transformer
(Main charger / Developer
bias / Transfer charger)
Feed system
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 135
Feeding direction
Fig.5-11
Defective area
Drawers
LCF
Step
Check items
Prescription
Feed roller
Rollers
Alligning amount
Registration roller
Is the spring detached from the regis- Attach the spring correctly. Clean the
tration roller?
roller if it is dirty.
Pre-registration guide
Correct it.
Carriage-1
10
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 136
Feeding direction
Fig.5-12
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Scanner
Main charger
Drum
11
12
13
Cleaner
10
Fuser unit
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 137
Feeding direction
Fig.5-13
Defective area
Fuser unit
Step
Check items
Prescription
Clean them.
Replace them.
High-voltage transformer
(Main charger / Developer
bias / Transfer charger)
Drum
Scanner
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 138
Feeding direction
14)White spots
Fig.5-14
Defective area
Toner empty
Developer material/Toner/
Photoconductive drum
Step
Check items
Prescription
10
11
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 139
Defective area
Main charger
Step
Check items
Prescription
12
Remove it.
13
14
15
Transfer belt
16
Remove it.
Note:
1. Toner density correcting method
Change the setting value 'Toner density life correction setting (08-414)' (6 is the default setting.)
0: Appox. 0.75% lower than the current value
1: Appox. 0.50% lower than the current value
2: Appox. 0.25% lower than the current value
3: The current value (Default setting)
4: Appox. 0.15% higher than the current value
5: Appox. 0.25% higher than the current value
6: Appox. 0.50% higher than the current value
7: Appox. 0.75% higher than the current value
<Caution for correction>
When increasing or decreasing the toner density too much, the image may become poor or the
life of developer material, cleaner, photoconductive drum and fuser unit, etc. may shorten. Therefore it is not recommended to correct (to shift) the toner density basically. If it is shifted, make
sure that the image may be improper in a few minutes after shifting.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 140
Feeding direction
Fig.5-15
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Paper
Registration roller
High-voltage transformer
(Transfer charger)
Note:
Refer to 3.6.1 of chapter 3 for the poor image transfer at the paper leading edge.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 141
Feeding direction
Fig.5-16
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Main charger
Discharge LED
Developer unit
Scanner section
Clean them.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 142
Feeding direction
Fig.5-17
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Developer material/Toner/
Photoconductive drum
Toner Cartridge
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 143
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
10
11
12
Main charger
13
Note:
1. Toner density correcting method
Change the setting value 'Toner density life correction setting (08-414)' (6 is the default setting.)
0: Appox. 0.75% lower than the current value
1: Appox. 0.50% lower than the current value
2: Appox. 0.25% lower than the current value
3: The current value (Default setting)
4: Appox. 0.15% higher than the current value
5: Appox. 0.25% higher than the current value
6: Appox. 0.50% higher than the current value
7: Appox. 0.75% higher than the current value
<Caution for correction>
When increasing or decreasing the toner density too much, the image may become poor or the
life of developer material, cleaner, photoconductive drum and fuser unit, etc. may shorten. Therefore it is not recommended to correct (to shift) the toner density basically. If it is shifted, make
sure that the image may be improper in a few minutes after shifting.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 144
Feeding direction
Fig.5-18
Defective area
Step
Check items
Scanner/Printer adjustment
Registration roller
Is the registration roller working prop- Adjust or replace the gears if they are
erly?
not engaged properly.
Feed clutch
Pre-registration guide
Prescription
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 145
Feeding direction
19)Jittering image
Fig.5-19
Defective area
Step
Check items
Registration roller
Drum
Operation of carriage
Scanner
Secure it.
10
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
Prescription
5 - 146
Feeding direction
20)Poor cleaning
Fig.5-20
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Developer material/Toner/
Photoconductive drum
Fuser unit
10
11
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 147
05/04
Feeding direction
Fig.5-21
Defective area
Step
Check items
Prescription
Original glass
Main charger
Discharge LED
Scanner
Exposure lamp
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 148
Feeding direction
22)Blotched image
Fig.5-22
Defective area
Paper
High-voltage transformer
(Transfer charger)
Step
Check items
Does the transfer belt exceed its nor- Replace the transfer belt.
mal life span?
Prescription
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 149
05/04
5.3
5.3.1
Replacing HDD
Ask users to back up the data in the HDD. See the following for the item of data, and the possibility
and the measure of the backup.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Data in the shared folder (Scanned data, Saved data of copy / FAX transmission)
Copy them to the client computer via the network. (The data which have been copied to the client
computer cannot be copied to the shared folder.)
(6)
Print waiting data (Copying data and FAX reception data that are waiting to be printed due to the
paper run-out and jam, etc.)
Finish printing them after the paper supply and the jam release, etc. (The data cannot be kept.)
(7)
(8)
(9)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 150
[B]
Print out the FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE (content of Function Mode (13) setting) list.
(1)
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and then the [USER] button.
(2)
(3)
Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. " The list is outputted.
(2)
Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
(3)
(4)
(1)
Create partitions. (In case of using the download jig, this is not necessary.)
While pressing [3] and [CLEAR] button, turn the power ON.
When Firmware Version Up Mode appears on the LCD, key in [3] and press the [START] button.
(2)
(3)
[F]
Ask users to reset the user's setting items and to restore the data/information. See the following
for the reset and the restore.
(1)
Printer driver
Upload them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess.
(2)
(3)
(4)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 151
[G] Referring to the FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE list which was printed beforehand, perform the re-setting.
(1)
Print out the FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE list after the formatting. (Refer to the procedure of (2).)
(2)
While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Function Mode)
(3)
Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting items
having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.
(4)
[H] Referring to the FUNCTION list which was printed beforehand, perform the re-setting of the
default setting of the FAX function.
(1)
(2)
Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
(3)
Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item.
(4)
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 152
5.3.2
Install DIMM (main memory) to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(2)
Install FRAM to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(3)
Update the version of system ROMs (System Firmware, OS data, UI data) (The ROMs had been
used for the old SYS board).
* See
P.6-1 "6. FIRMWARE UPDATING" for the details of System ROM update.
(4)
Turn the power OFF and start up with the Setting Mode (08).
(5)
When the message SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE? is displayed on the LCD, press the
[INITIALIZE] button.
* SRAM is cleared
* If SRAM is not performed, F090 error occurs when starting up.
Notes:
When SRAM is cleared, following items need to be re-set, so make sure the contents of settings are kept as a record.
<FAX settings>
Terminal ID
Default setting of fax
<E-mail settings>
Setting of properties for E-mail message
<Internet Fax>
Setting of properties for Internet Fax
When SRAM is cleared, the toner cartridge consumed count of Automatic ordering function of
supplies becomes 0, however, it cannot be re-set.
(6)
(7)
(8)
Check the serial number after performing 08 Code 995. If the number is different from the number on the label attached on the rear cover of the machine, re-input the correct number with 08
Code 995.
(9)
If the FAX board has not been installed, skip to step (14).
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 153
05/04
5.3.3
[ADMIN]
[FAX]
[INITIAL SETUP]
When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is installed, follow the cautions below.
<<Cautions when disposing of the HDD>>
Before disposing of the HDD of the equipment, be sure to perform 08-1426 (forcible HDD data clearing)
and confirm that deleting of the HDD data is completed.
Check that the percentage is 100% and HDD Erase [OK] appears on the upper left of the screen.
Check that the version (SYS V1.0) is displayed on the lower right of the screen.
When the scrambler board is installed, data in the HDD are overwritten with encrypted data and
erased.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 154
05/11
5.3.4
Replacing FRAM
(2)
(3)
Check the serial number after performing 08-995 (Equipment number display). If the number is
different from the one on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment, enter the correct
serial number again with 08-995.
Note:
The MAC address of the equipment is generated based on this serial number. Entering the incorrect serial number may result in an inability to access the network due to an invalid MAC
address.
(4)
(5)
Perform 1: Electrical counter -> Backup counter of 08-257 (Counter copy) to recover the total
counter.
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
[ADMIN]
[FAX]
[INITIAL SETUP]
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 155
05/11
5.3.5
This code displays the HDD operation history, which is recorded in the HDD, on the control panel. HDD
failure can be diagnosed or predicted with the information displayed.
1) Display
The following screen is displayed with setting code 08-670.
HDD manufacturer
Model name
2) Usage
The combination of the values of ID=05 and c5 is used to diagnose whether or not the HDD has a
physical failure when HDD failure is suspected (service call F100-180 or 120 occurred).
ID
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
Result
VALUE
0
0
From 1 to 999
0
Any value
1 or more
Either one is at
least 1000.
All values are displayed as "-------".
Description
Diagnosis
HDD replacement
is not required.
HDD replacement
is not required.
HDD replacement
is recommended.
HDD replacement
is recommended.
HDD replacement
is recommended.
3) ID=05 and c5
ID
Name
Description
Remarks
05
c5
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 156
05/11
4) Description of each ID
ID
Name
Meaning
01
02
Throughput Performance
03
Spin Up Time
04
05
07
08
This attribute is a measure of a drive's seek performance during normal online operations.
09
Power-On Hours
0a
0c
c0
c1
c2
Temperature
c3
c4
c5
c6
This attribute is a measure of the total number of uncorrectable sectors found during the off-line scan.
c7
c8
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 157
05/11
5.4
Other errors
1) Operation cannot be performed (operation from the control panel is not successful) after installing
the option(s) such as Wireless LAN module, Scrambler board and/or Parallel board.
- Check if the optional board is installed properly.
2) The connection to the Wireless LAN cannot be made even though it is set to Enabled.
- The connection state and settings of the Wireless LAN can be checked with [USER FUNCTIONS]! [ADMIN]! [WIRELESS LAN] ![SETTING CHECK].
Confirm the settings with the administrator.
* NIC INITIALIZING does not disappear at the time of the power being turned ON and it disappears after 6 minutes with the NIC initializing time-out. In this case, the connection to the
Wireless LAN did not succeed even though NIC INITIALIZING disappears.
* The connection to the Wireless LAN cannot be made if the Access Point to be connected is
not found or security settings are not correct.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 158
05/06
6.
FIRMWARE UPDATING
Stored
Master data
(HDD program data, UI data)
Hard disk
System ROM
(System firmware, OS data, UI data)
Engine ROM
(Machine firmware)
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
Scanner ROM
(Scanner firmware)
Laser ROM
(Printer firmware)
PFC ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
RADF ROM
(RADF firmware)
Finisher ROM
(Finisher firmware)
Finisher ROM
(Saddle stitcher firmware)
FAX ROM
(FAX firmware)
FAX board
(GD-1170)
Inserter ROM
When you want to update the firmware above or the equipment becomes inoperative status due to
some defectives of the firmware, updating the firmware is available by the following actions.
6-1
05/05
6.1
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware automatically by connecting the download jig
using the dedicated connector and turning ON the equipment.
The download jig consists of the ROM, in which the program is written, and the jig board.
And two types of the download jigs are available for each type of the firmware.
For updating the firmware, in addition to the current ways such as updating each firmware individually,
the batch update of the firmware of the equipment is available (except the hard disk and the option).
Download jig
Firmware
Stored
Individual update
Batch update
-
Master data
Hard disk
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
(48 MB)
System ROM
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
(48 MB)
Engine ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
K-PWA-DLM-320
or
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
(48 MB)
Scanner ROM
K-PWA-DLM-320
or
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
(48 MB)
Laser ROM
K-PWA-DLM-320
or
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
(48 MB)
PFC ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
K-PWA-DLM-320
or
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
(48 MB)
RADF ROM
K-PWA-DLM-320
Finisher ROM
(Finisher firmware)
K-PWA-DLM-320
Finisher ROM
(Saddle stitcher firmware)
K-PWA-DLM-320
FAX ROM
K-PWA-DLM-320
Inserter ROM
K-PWA-DLM-320
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
(48 MB)
Refer to the following for the details to update with each download jig.
P.6-4 "6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) <Master data>"
P.6-10 "6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) <System ROM / Engine ROM / Scanner ROM /
Laser ROM / PFC ROM>"
P.6-22 "6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320"
6-2
05/05
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB)
Connector
(for SYS board
connection)
Connector
(for ROM writer
adapter connection)
ROM4 ROM1
ROM5 ROM2
ROM6 ROM3
Important:
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the
board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the data to
these Flash ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data.
P.6-20 "6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
K-PWA-DLM-320
Connector
LED
6
ROM
Important:
Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.
6-3
05/05
6.1.1
The master data written on the hard disk can be updated. Update the master data according to the
need such as the case of replacing the hard disk.
The data to be overwritten are as follows.
HDD program data (RIP data, list data, Web data, filing box control data)
UI data (fixed section data, common section data, the language 1 to 7 data, the language 1 to 6 data
for Web)
[A]
Update procedure
Important:
Use the download jig PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB).
Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig.
Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be operated properly.
(1)
(2)
(3)
Fig.6-3
(4)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN107) on the SYS board.
Connector
Fig.6-4
6-4
05/05
(5)
(6)
Update Completed!! is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
Fig.6-5
Fig.6-6
6-5
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and
clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning.
Fig.6-7
(7)
Turn OFF the power, and then remove the download jig.
(8)
6-6
6-7
6-8
If an error occurs, the following error message is displayed and the update is interrupted.
6-9
6.1.2
The firmware of the equipment except the hard disk and the option can be updated individually or in a
batch. Update the ROM data written on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing
the system control PC board, logic PC board or scanning section control PC board.
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.
<Updating System ROM>
System firmware (System firmware data, FROM internal program data)
OS data (FROM basic section software)
UI data (fixed section data, common section data, UI data in FROM displayed at power ON)
<Updating Engine ROM>
Engine ROM data
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Scanner ROM data
<Updating Laser ROM>
Laser ROM data
<Updating PFC ROM>
PFC ROM data
[A]
Update procedure
Important:
Use the download jig PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB).
Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig.
Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be operated properly.
(1)
(2)
6 - 10
05/05
(3)
Fig.6-8
(4)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN107) on the SYS board.
Connector
Fig.6-9
6 - 11
05/05
(5)
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. * is displayed next to the items to
be updated. (All items are selected in the default settings.)
(6)
Fig.6-10
6 - 12
05/05
Example:
Fig.6-11
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)
(7)
Fig.6-12
OS Update
.......
OS Update
.......
Completed
UI Data Update
.......
UI Data Update
.......
Completed
SysFirm Update
SysFirm Update
.......
LSR Update
.......
PFC Update
.......
.......
Completed
.......
Completed
PFC Update
.......
Completed
..
..
Completed
..
..
Completed
6 - 13
05/05
(8)
Update Completed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
Fig.6-13
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Failed appears next to the failed item on the status display.
Fig.6-14
(9)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate.
6 - 14
05/05
6 - 15
System ROM
Laser ROM
Scanner ROM
0. OS Update
PFC ROM
1. UI Data Update
Update Completed
Fig.6-15
6 - 16
05/05
6 - 17
05/05
6 - 18
05/05
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. Failed appears next to the failed item on the status display.
6 - 19
05/05
6.1.3
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the board
directly. The ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write data to these Flash ROMs.
Connect the download jig with the ROM writer via ROM writer adapter to write data.
For the procedure to write data, refer to the download procedure, instruction manual of each ROM
writer, or others.
Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
ROM writer adapter
(PWA-DL-ADP-350)
PC
ROM writer
Fig.6-16
Note:
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
ROM writer
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881
(model 1881)
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931
(model 1931)
model 1881
model 1931
( LV 6 50 )
model 1881
model 1931
( LV 6 50 )
Fig.6-18 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931
Fig.6-17 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881
6 - 20
05/05
Master Data
System, Engine,
Scanner, Laser and PFC data
Flash ROM
hdos.bin
firmImage0.bin
ROM1
firmImage1.bin
ROM2
firmImage2.bin
ROM3
N/A
ROM4
N/A
ROM5
N/A
N/A
ROM6
Note:
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM
version is different.
6 - 21
05/11
6.1.4
K-PWA-DLM-320
The firmware of the equipment (engine ROM, scanner ROM) and the option (RADF ROM, Finisher
ROM, FAX ROM) can be updated individually by using K-PWA-DLM-320. Update the ROM data written
on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the board.
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.
<Updating Engine ROM, PFC ROM>
Engine ROM data
PFC ROM data
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Scanner ROM data
<Updating Laser ROM>
Laser ROM data
<Updating RADF ROM>
RADF ROM data
<Updating Finisher ROM>
Finisher firmware
Saddle stitcher firmware
<Updating Inserter ROM>
Inserter ROM data
<Updating FAX ROM>
FAX ROM data
(2)
6 - 22
(3)
Connector cover
Fig.6-19
(4)
Connect the downloading jig with the jig connector (Engine ROM: CN324, PFC ROM: CN325) on
the LGC board (ROM attached side upward).
Jig connector for
Engine ROM
6
Jig connector for
PFC ROM
Fig.6-20
(5)
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7)
When the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts
blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does
not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the
following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the connector cover.
(9)
6 - 23
(2)
(3)
Fig.6-21
(4)
Fig.6-22
6 - 24
(5)
Cover plate
Fig.6-23
(6)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN6) on the scanning section control PC board
(SLG board).
Connector
Fig.6-24
(7)
(8)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(9)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(10) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate, the right upper cover
and the top right cover.
(11) Close the front cover.
March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 25
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Connect the downloading jig with the jig connector (J213) on the PLG board (ROM attached side
upward).
Jig connector
Fig.6-25
(6)
(7)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(8)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 15 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(9)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the connector cover.
6 - 26
(2)
(3)
(4)
Connect the downloading jig with the jig connector (J3) on the ADF board (ROM attached side
upward).
Jig connector
Fig.6-26
(5)
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 15 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the connector cover.
(9)
6 - 27
(1)
(2)
(3)
To update the finisher firmware, take off the finisher rear cover. To update the saddle stitcher firmware, take off the saddle stitcher PCB cover.
* Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment.
(4)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector of the finisher control PC board or saddle stitcher
control PC board.
Download jig
Download jig
[Finisher]
[Saddle stitcher]
Fig.6-27
(5)
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
6 - 28
(7)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly. The LED starts
blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does
not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed, or LED flashes fast. In this case, turn OFF the
power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the
beginning.
(8)
(9)
(10) Install the finisher rear cover and the saddle stitcher PCB cover.
6 - 29
(2)
(3)
Connect the inserter to the equipment after the inserter rear cover removed.
* At this time, do not connect the finisher interface cable to the inserter.
(4)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector of the inserter main board (ROM attached side to
the left).
Jig connector
Fig.6-28
(5)
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly. The LED starts
blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does
not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed, or LED flashes fast. In this case, turn OFF the
power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the
beginning.
(8)
(9)
6 - 30
(2)
(3)
Cover plate
Fig.6-29
(4)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN602) on the FAX board.
Connector
Fig.6-30
(5)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. Updating starts
automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
6 - 31
(6)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(7)
Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate.
(8)
6 - 32
6.2
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware by connecting the USB storage device on which
the firmware data is written to the USB connector mounted on the system control PC board and turning
ON the power.
The type of firmware to be updated can be selected on the LCD screen in this method. This allows to
update only the necessary firmware individually or to update all firmware in a batch.
The type of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below. Also, the
data file of each firmware can be used commonly in the updating methods with USB storage device and
Download jig.
Firmware
Model specific
folder name
Stored
Master data
Hard disk
System ROM
Engine ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
Scanner ROM
Laser ROM
PFC ROM
520_800
firmImage0.bin, firmImage1.bin
firmImage2.bin
6 - 33
05/11
Important:
Only the USB storage device which meets the following conditions should be used for updating. Be careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.
- A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the
USB port) and its capacity is between 64 MB to 512MB (or 1GB).
- Operation of the USB storage device used for updating has been confirmed at the input
check of this equipment (Test mode 03).
( P.2-28 "2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03)")
- A USB storage device which is complied with the following standards regulated by USB-IF
(USB Implementers Forum)
Class number:
8 (=08h)
(Mass-storage class)
Sub-class number: 6 (=06h)
(SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
* Most common USB storage devices are complied with the specification above and can be
used for updating. However, the operation in all the Multi Functional Digital Color Systems
and Multi Functional Digital Systems is not necessarily guaranteed since the most of these
devices are developed based on the use in PC environment (Windows or Macintosh).
Therefore, confirm thoroughly that the device is operational in the equipment for which the
updating will be performed when purchasing the device.
The data file for updating is stored in the model specific folder.
Never change the model specific folder name since it is used for discriminating the data file
when the updating data files for multiple models are stored in the USB storage device.
Store the model specific folder in the root directory of the USB storage device.
Storing the data file directly in the root directory is possible when the updating data files for
one specific model is stored in the USB storage device.
However, if the model specific folder for the same model as that of the data file stored in the
root directory already exists, the model specific folder will have the priority.
The USB storage device complied with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating. However, the update is performed in the speed of USB1.1 when the device complied with USB2.0
is used.
Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk) since it is never guaranteed.
6 - 34
05/11
[A]
Update procedure
Important:
The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format. Be careful since
the devices formatted in FAT32 or NTFS format will not be operated. The file system can be
confirmed on the properties in applications such as Explorer of Windows.
Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not to be
operated properly.
(1)
Connect the USB storage device to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data
file is stored.
Confirm the model specific folder name and data file name before writing the data (
P.6-33
"6.2 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device").
The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format.
Windows 95 and NT do not support USB. Be careful since the data can not be written on the
devices in the PCs with these operating systems.
(2)
(3)
Cover plate
Fig.6-31
(4)
Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector(host)
Fig.6-32
6 - 35
05/11
Notes:
Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
In case the printer kit (GM-1050), printer/scanner kit (GM-2040) and scanner kit (GM-4010)
are used, the update must be performed after all the "dongles" are disconnected from the
USB connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
6 - 36
05/05
(5)
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed after 3 minutes. * is displayed
next to the items to be updated. (All items other than "0. OS Update" are selected in the default
settings.)
Fig.6-33
Note:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
storage device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage
device in the following conditions.
Item
0. OS Update
Condition
firmImage0.bin is written.
1. HDD Update
2. UI Data Update
firmImage0.bin is written.
firmImage2.bin is written.
firmImage2.bin is written.
firmImage2.bin is written.
firmImage2.bin is written.
6 - 37
05/05
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed. In this
case, turn OFF the power of the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the
procedure from (5).
Fig.6-34
If the updating data file does not exist or a data file for other model is stored, the following message is displayed. In this case, turn OFF the power of the equipment and confirm if the data file
stored in the USB storage device is correct. Then repeat the procedure from (5).
Fig.6-35
6 - 38
05/11
(6)
Fig.6-36
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)
6 - 39
05/05
(7)
Fig.6-37
OS Update
.......
OS Update
.......
Completed
HD Data Update
.......
HD Data Update
.......
Completed
UI Data Update
.......
UI Data Update
.......
Completed
SysFirm Update
.......
LSR Update
.......
PFC Update
.......
Flash Update
SysFirm Update
.......
Completed
LSR Update
.......
Completed
PFC Update
.......
Completed
..
Flash Update
..
Completed
..
Flash Update
..
Completed
6 - 40
05/05
(8)
Update Completed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
Fig.6-38
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Failed appears next to the failed item on the status display. Turn OFF the
power, and then check the following items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart
updating from the beginning.
Does the USB storage device meet the conditions to be used for updating (
P.6-33 "6.2
Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device")?
Is the data file written properly on the USB storage device?
Is the USB storage device installed properly?
Do the USB storage device and equipment operate properly?
Fig.6-39
(9)
Turn OFF the power, remove the USB storage device and install the cover plate.
6 - 41
6 - 42
05/05
System ROM
Master data
Laser ROM
Scanner ROM
0. OS Update
1. HDD Update
4. LSR Firmware
Update
7. Scanner Firmware
Update
PFC ROM
5. PFC Firmware
Update
2. UI Data Update
Engine ROM
3. System Firmware
Update
6. Engine Firmware
Update
Update Completed
Fig.6-40
6
Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update. Note that the screen order may
be different from the actual one, because a parallel update is performed in the process.
6 - 43
05/05
6 - 44
05/05
6 - 45
05/05
6 - 46
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed and the
update is interrupted.
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. Failed appears next to the failed item on the status display.
6 - 47
Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously.
The following screen is displayed.
Fig.6-41
(2)
Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.
6 - 48
7.
7.1
The following are 3 output channels for the main switch line.
(1)
+3.3 V
+3.3VA
+3.3VB :
+3.3VC :
+3.3VD :
(2)
+5.1 V
+5.1VA
+5.1VB :
+5.1VC :
+5.1VD :
+5.1V E :
+5.1VF
+5.1V G :
(3)
+12 V
+12VA
+12VB
+12VC
+12VD
+12VE
+12VF
The following are 3 output channels for the cover switch line.
(1)
+5.1 V
+5.1VH :
CN403 Pin 5
Output to the PLG board
7-1
(2)
(3)
+24 V
+24VA
+24VB
+24VC
+24VD
+24VE
+24VF
+24VG
+36 V
+36VA
+36VB
+36VC
+36VD
CN402 Pin 1
Output to the LGC board
CN402 Pin 2
Output to the LGC board
CN402 Pin 3
Output to the LGC board, external LCF (via LGC board)
CN403 Pin 1
Output to the PLG board
CN404 Pin 3
Output to the SLG board
CN409 Pins 3 and 4
Output to the finisher
CN404 Pins 5 and 7
Output to the ADF board (RADF)
CN402 Pin 7
Output to the LGC board
CN402 Pin 8
Output to the LGC board
CN403 Pin 3
Output to the PLG board
CN404 Pin 1
Output to the SLG board
Destination
For the SYS board
For the LGC board, external LCF (via LGC board),
finisher (via LGC board)
For the PLG board
For the SLG board
For the finisher
For the FAX board
Voltage
+3.3VA, +5.1VA, +5.1VB, +12VA, +12VB
+3.3VD, +5.1VC, +12VE
Destination
For the LGC board, external LCF (via LGC board)
For the PLG board
For the SLG board, ADF board (RADF)
For the finisher
Voltage
+24VA, +24VB, +24VC, +36VA, +36VB
+5.1VH, +24VD, +36VC
+24VE, +24VG, +36VD
+24VF
7-2
7.2
Fuse
When the power supply secondary fuse is blown out, confirm that there is no abnormality with each part
using the following table.
Voltage
+24VA
+24VB
Board/unit
Part
LGC board Developer unit motor
Fuser cooling fan
Duct in fan
Developer unit fan
Laser unit cooling fan
Switching regulator cooling fan-1
Switching regulator cooling fan-2
Drum separation finger solenoid
Copy key card
LGC board Web motor
New toner supply motor
New toner transport motor
Hopper motor
Recycle toner trans port motor
Used toner transport motor
Wire cleaner drive motor
Cleaning brush drive motor
Transfer belt cam motor
Transport motor
Exit motor
Reverse motor
Auto-toner sensor
Drum surface potential sensor
Main switch
High-voltage transformer
Discharge LED
M10
M28
M30
M31
M32
M34
M35
SOL1
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M12
M13
M15
M17
M18
M19
S12
S13
SW6
HVT
ERS
Fuse type
F4 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
F3 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
7-3
Voltage
+24VC
+24VD
+24VE
+24VF
+24VG
+36VA
+36VB
+36VC
+36VD
Board/unit
Part
LGC board Registration motor
Tray-up motor-1
Tray-up motor-2
Reverse section cooling fan-1
Reverse section cooling fan-2
IH board cooling fan
Duct out fan
Exit section cooling fan
Tandem LCF tray-up motor
Tandem LCF end fence motor
Horizontal transport section driving clutch-1
Horizontal transport section driving clutch-2
Horizontal transport section driving clutch-3
Bypass feed clutch
1st drawer transport clutch
1st drawer feed clutch
2nd drawer transport clutch
2nd drawer feed clutch
3rd drawer transport clutch
3rd drawer feed clutch
4th drawer transport clutch
4th drawer feed clutch
Gate solenoid
Bypass pickup solenoid
Tandem LCF pickup solenoid
Tandem LCF end fence solenoid
External LCF
PLG board Polygonal motor
(Only for e-STUDIO850 model)
SLG board SLG board cooling fan
Lamp inverter board
Finisher
ADF board Read motor
Document feed motor
Tray lift motor
Large original exit motor
Small original exit motor
RADF opening/closing switch
Jam access cover opening/closing switch
Small original exit solenoid
Large original exit solenoid
Large original exit roller release solenoid
LGC board Fuser motor
Feed motor
LGC board Drum motor
Transfer belt motor
PLG board Polygonal motor
(Only for e-STUDIO520/600/720 model)
SLG board Scan motor
M16
M21
M22
M24
M25
M26
M27
M29
M41
M42
CLT1
CLT2
CLT3
CLT4
CLT5
CLT6
CLT7
CLT8
CLT9
CLT10
CLT11
CLT12
SOL2
SOL3
SOL7
SOL8
Fuse type
F3 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
M2
F4 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
M23
INV-EXP
F4 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
F5 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
F6 : 4A (Semi time-lag)
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
SW9
SW10
SOL4
SOL5
SOL6
M3
M20
M11
M14
M2
F7 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
M1
F7 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
F7 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
F7 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
7-4
LIVE
NEUTRAL
Breaker
7-5
Cover interlock switch
1
2
CN2
1
2
CN1
CN401
F1
F2
Harmonic
reactor
Harmonic
reactor
Switching regulator
Noise
filter
Noise
filter
Regulator
Switching regulator
cooling fan-2
Switching regulator
cooling fan-1
Noise
filter
Main switch
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
SYS board
LGC board
PLG board
SLG board
CN402
CN402
CN403
CN404
LGC board
LGC board
PLG board
SLG board
CN409 Finisher
+36VA
+36VB
+36VC
+36VD
+24VG
+24VF
+24VA
+24VD
+24VE
+24VB
+24VC
+5.1VH
SYS board
SYS board
PLG board
SLG board
LGC board
FAX board
CN405
CN405
CN407
CN408
CN406
CN410
+12VA
+12VB
+12VC
+12VD
+12VE
+12VF
SYS board
PLG board
SLG board
LGC board
+5.1VD
+5.1VE
+5.1VF
+5.1VG
CN405
CN407
CN408
CN406
+5.1VA
+5.1VB
+5.1VC
+3.3VA
+3.3VB
+3.3VC
+3.3VD
PWR-DN CN405
CN406
CN407
CN408
7.3
Configuration of Power Supply Unit
Regulator
Fig.7-1
7-6
8.
REMOTE SERVICE
8.1
8.1.1
Outline
FAX
Installation of the FAX board is required.
If the FAX board has not been installed, it is regarded as OFF setting.
2) Order Intervals
When the toner empty occurs, the number of occurrences is counted. And when it reaches the specified number for CONDITION, the order is placed automatically.
With regard to the used toner container, it is done according to the number of the used toner container full detection.
The number of the CONDITION can be set respectively for the toner and used toner container.
3) If Order Failure Occurs
If some problems occur and the order cannot be placed after registering an order as a job, refer to
the standard countermeasure for the FAX/E-mail transmission failure.
8-1
05/06
8.1.2
Setting Item
8-2
Basic setting
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [ORDER INFORMATION]
FAX NUMBER
CUSTOMER
Customer information
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
ADDRESS
SUPPLIER
Supplier information
NAME
ADDRESS
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
NUMBER
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
PART NUMBER
CONDITION
QUANTITY
AUTO ORDER
8-3
*1 The order is placed when the number of replacement reaches the number specified for the
CONDITION.
-
FROM ADDRESS
FROM NAME
*1 When sending an E-mail, validity of the address is checked. If the address is invalid, it is not
sent.
-
ID NAME
FAX NUMBER
8.1.3
Setting procedure
(1)
Start up the self-diagnosis setting mode 08-765, and then change the setting value to 0.
(2)
(3)
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button to enter the user function screen.
8-4
(4)
Fig.8-1
(5)
Press the [PASSWORD] button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then key in the
Administrator Password and press the [ENTER] button.
* Confirm the password to the administrator.
Fig.8-2
(6)
8-5
(7)
Fig.8-3
(8)
Fig.8-4
(9)
8-6
Fig.8-5
(11) Press the buttons on the screen of ORDER INFORMATION to set the required item.
[FAX]/[MAIL]/[OFF] --Select the [FAX] or the [MAIL] button for the transmitting way of order.
(HTTP has not been supported yet.)
[OFF]: Turn off the AUTO SUPPLY ORDER function.
[FAX NUMBER] --- Input the FAX number of supplier.
(To transmit by FAX, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not input the number.)
[E-MAIL] --- Input the E-mail address of supplier.
(To transmit by E-mail, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not input the address.)
(12) Press the [NEXT] button.
(Press the [ENTER] button to register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen.
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel this register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen.)
(13) The CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER screen is displayed.
Fig.8-6
8-7
(14) Press the buttons of the screen of CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER to set the required item.
CUSTOMER
[NAME] --- Input the name of customer.
[TEL NUMBER] --- Input the telephone number of customer.
[E-MAIL] --- Input the E-mail address of customer.
[ADDRESS] --- Input the address of customer.
SUPPLIER
[NAME] --- Input the name of supplier.
[ADDRESS] --- Input the address of supplier.
(15) Press the [NEXT] button.
(16) The SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING screen is displayed.
Fig.8-7
(17) Press a button on the screen of SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING to set the required
item.
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NUMBER] --- Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[NAME] --- Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[TEL NUMBER] --- Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[E-MAIL] --- Input the E-mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[DESCRIPTION] --- Input the remarks if you want to register.
RESULT PRINTING
[OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR]--- Whichever you press, the result list is printed.
(18) Press the [ENTER] button to register and complete the order information setting.
8-8
Fig.8-8
Fig.8-9
8-9
Fig.8-10
Fig.8-11
8 - 10
Fig.8-12
(27) Press the [USER TONER CONTAINER] button, and then input the order information of USED
TONER CONTAINER in the same way of TONER.
Fig.8-13
(30) Press the [USER FUNCTION] button to be switched from the ADMIN screen on touch panel and
returned to the BASIC screen, so that the setting of Auto Supply Order is finished.
8 - 11
Note:
Auto Supply Order setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).
Items
08 code
Contents
732
0: Ordered by FAX
1: Ordered by E-mail
2: Ordered by HTTP
3: OFF
SUPPLIER
[FAX NUMBER]
733
Maximum 32 digits
SUPPLIER
[E-MAIL]
734
CUSTOMER
[NAME]
738
Maximum 50 letters
CUSTOMER
[TEL NUMBER]
739
Maximum 32 letters
CUSTOMER
[E-MAIL]
740
CUSTOMER
[ADDRESS]
741
SUPPLIER
[NAME]
746
Maximum 50 letters
SUPPLIER
[ADDRESS]
747
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NUMBER]
742
Maximum 5 digits
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NAME]
743
Maximum 50 letters
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[TEL NUMBER]
744
Maximum 32 digits
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[E-MAIL]
745
Remarks
[DESCRIPTION]
748
RESULT PRINTING
[OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR]
764
0: OFF
1: Always
2: ON Error
TONER
[PART NUMBER]
758
Maximum 20 digits
TONER
[CONDITION]
760
1-99
TONER
[QUANTITY]
759
1-99
761
Maximum 20 digits
763
1-99
762
1-99
8 - 12
8.1.4
:99-99-'99 99:99
:XXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PART NUMBER
TONER CARTRIDGE
BLACK
USED TONER CONTAINER
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
QUANTITY
99
(*1)
99
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTAL
PRINT COUNTER
999999999
SCAN COUNTER
999999999
Fig.8-14
8 - 13
2) E-MAIL (TIFF image attached with the E-mail is the same format with that of the FAX order sheet.)
SUBJECT: SUPPLY ORDER REQUEST
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
Date&Time: '05-03-10 00:17
Customer Number: svc02
MachineName: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO720
SerialNumber: CV
Device FAX Number: 1122
Device Email: sss@linux.nam1.local
OrderInformation:
BLACK PartNumber: kuro-01
(*1)
Quantity: 1
CounterInformation:
PrintCounter(Small) FullColor: 0 TwinColor:0 Black:5
PrintCounter(Large) FullColor: 0 TwinColor:0 Black:0
ScanCounter FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 0
Fig.8-15
3) Result list
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
ORDER XXXXXXXXX
:99-99-'99 99:99
:XXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
PART NUMBER
TONER CARTRIDGE
BLACK
USED TONER CONTAINER
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
QUANTITY
99
(*1)
99
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTAL
PRINT COUNTER
999999999
SCAN COUNTER
999999999
Fig.8-16
8 - 14
8.2
8.2.1
Service Notification
Outline
This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or
FAX. The following three are the items to be notified.
PM Counter Transmit
When this function is effective, it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count
has reached to its setting value, or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value.
8.2.2
Setting
Note:
When using this function, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails or FAXes are available. Confirm the details to the administrator.
[ 1 ] Preparation
The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting.
Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08).
08-774 Setting of notification display
0: Invalid (Default)
1: Valid
8 - 15
[ 2 ] Setting procedure
(1)
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] button. Then enter the password
and press the [ENTER] button.
Confirm the password to the administrator.
Fig.8-17
(2)
Fig.8-18
8 - 16
(3)
Fig.8-19
(4)
Fig.8-20
8 - 17
(5)
Fig.8-21
Press the [FAX NUMBER] button, key in the FAX number and then press the [ENTER] button.
Fig.8-22
8 - 18
(6)
Press the [ON] button to notify or [OFF] button not to notify of each item for E-mail and FAX.
When the Total Count Transmit is set ON, the screen to set the notification date is displayed.
Then set the notification date with the following procedure. (The information is notified on the set
date and time every month.)
Fig.8-23
Key in the date (acceptable values: 1-31) in Date and press the [SET] button. (Correct the
value by pressing the [CLEAR] button if the [SET] button is not yet pressed. Correct the value
by pressing the [RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be corrected if the
[SET] button is already pressed.)
Press the [ENTER] button to set all. The display returns to the screen at procedure (5)
08 code
Contents
767
E-mail address 1
768
E-mail address 2
777
E-mail address 3
778
FAX number
1145
Maximum 32 digits
769
770
1 to 31
776
00:00-23:59
775
771
8 - 19
05/06
8.2.3
Items to be notified
1
2
3
4
Date
Machine Model
Serial Number
Total Counter
5
6
ChargeCounterFormat:
LargeSizeChargeCount
1
LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1
7
8
PMCounterFormat:
LargeSizePMCount
LargeSizePMPaperDefinition
:
:
:
:
03/10/2005 13:47
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO720
1234567890
00300000
1
1
Charge Counter:
Large
Small
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
9
10
11
12
<Print Counter>
Copy
Print
List
FAX
13
14
15
<Scan Counter>
Copy Scan
00000000 00000000
FAX Scan
00000000 00000000
Net Scan
00000000 00000000
16
17
<FAX Counter>
Transmit
Receive
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
Set PM
Current PM
Set PMTime
Current PMTime
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
Fig.8-24
8 - 20
1 Date
2 Machine model name
3 Serial number
4 Total counter value
5 Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
6 Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
8 - 21
DATE
MACHINE MODEL
SERIAL NUMBER
TOTAL COUNTER
:
:
:
:
05/03/10 13:47
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO720
1234567890
00004787
PM COUNTER FORMAT
7
8
CHARGE COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER
9
10
11
12
SCAN COUNTER
LARGE
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
COPY
PRINT
LIST
FAX
SMALL
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
13
14
15
FAX COUNTER
16
17
22
COPY SCAN
FAX SCAN
NET SCAN
LARGE
00000000
00000000
00000000
SMALL
00000000
00000000
00000000
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
LARGE
SMALL
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
18
19
20
21
SET PM
CURRENT PM
SET PM TIME
CURRENT PM TIME
:00000000
:00000000
:00000000
:00000000
DATE
TIME
ERROR CODE
(*2)
Fig.8-25
8 - 22
05/06
1 Date
2 Machine model name
3 Serial number
4 Total counter value
5 Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
6 Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
8 - 23
4
5
6
Function: Print
Severity: Error
ErrorCode: XXXX
Message:
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Fixed at Print
5 Severity:
Fixed at Error
6 Error code
7 Error message: The content of error is displayed.
8 History of error
8 - 24
9.
In this equipment, the user data, setting items and SRAM data can be backed up / restored by turning
the power ON after connecting the USB storage device on which the data cloning programs have been
written to the USB connector mounted on the SYS board.
The type of data to be backed up/restored can be selected on the LCD screen in this method.
This allows you to back up/restore only the necessary data individually or to back up/restore all data in
a batch.
Programs needed for data cloning with this method are given in the following table.
Storage location
Root directory
Important:
It is assumed that data cloning is to be performed when equipment is installed or options are
installed. If the address book has been registered, do not perform data cloning. Registered /
set data are lost.
The USB storage device for the data cloning must meet the following conditions. A data cloning operation with any devices other than the following will not be guaranteed.
- A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the
USB port) and its capacity is between 128 MB and 512 MB (or 1 GB).
- A device compliant with the following specifications established by USB-IF (USB Implementers Forum)
Class number:
8 (=08h)
(Mass storage class)
Sub-Class number: 6 (=06h)
(SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number:
80 (=50h)
(Bulk-only)
*
Most of the common USB storage devices are compliant with the above specifications and
are therefore applicable to this data cloning. However, most of these devices were originally developed to be used in an environment for PCs (e.g. Windows or Macintosh) and
thus operations exclusively with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed. Therefore,
the user must thoroughly check in advance whether there will be any problem in operating
with this equipment when adopting one of these devices.
The USB storage devices compliant with both USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 can be used for this data
cloning. However, the operating speed when using a device compliant with USB 2.0 is equivalent to the one with a device compliant with USB 1.1.
Data cloning with any storage devices other than a flash memory (e.g. USB-connectable
memory card reader, CD/DVD drive, hard disk) will never be guaranteed. Therefore never use
them for this operation.
Be sure to unplug the LAN cable and Fax line before data are backed up / restored. Also, do
not use the RADF and open the cover, drawer, etc. during the data cloning.
Data can be backed up / restored only for the same model and version. If the version is different, update the firmware and back up / restore data in the same version.
Restore data to equipment which has the same options as when the data are backed up.
If "Department management" or "User management information" is restored, the counter values are copied as well, so clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied.
Delete the backed up data in the USB storage device after the data cloning.
9-1
05/11
Connect the USB storage device to the PC and delete all data in the USB storage device.
The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format.
Windows95 and NT do not support USB. The data cannot be written into the device with the
PC in which these OS are installed.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector(host)
Fig.9-1
Notes:
Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
In case the printer kit (GM-1050), printer/scanner kit (GM-2040) and scanner kit (GM-4010)
are used, the data must be backed up after all the "dongles" are disconnected from the USB
connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
9-2
05/11
Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig.9-2
(6)
(7)
Fig.9-3
9-3
05/11
(8)
Fig.9-4
9-4
05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are backed up.)
(9)
Fig.9-5
(10) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly completed.
Fig.9-6
(11) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
9-5
05/11
<Setting Backup>
(12) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(13) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig.9-7
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
(14) Press the [3] button.
The screen to select the setting backup item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be backed
up are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig.9-8
9-6
05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are backed up.)
(16) Press the [Start] button.
The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig.9-9
9-7
05/11
(17) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly completed.
Fig.9-10
(18) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
Fig.9-11
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
9-8
05/11
Fig.9-12
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are backed up.)
(23) Press the [Start] button.
The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig.9-13
9-9
05/11
(24) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly completed.
Fig.9-14
(25) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
9 - 10
05/11
(1)
(2)
Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector(host)
Notes:
Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
In case the printer kit (GM-1050), printer/scanner kit (GM-2040) and scanner kit (GM-4010)
are used, the data must be restored after all the "dongles" are disconnected from the USB
connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
9 - 11
05/11
Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig.9-16
(4)
(5)
Fig.9-17
9 - 12
05/11
(6)
Fig.9-18
9 - 13
05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are restored.)
(7)
Fig.9-19
(8)
"Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly completed.
Fig.9-20
(9)
Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(10) Clear the counter (in case of restoring "Department Code" and "User Info").
Since the counter values are also copied, clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied.
<Procedure>
Press the buttons as follows: [USER FUNCTION]
[ADMIN]
Enter the password
[COUNTER]
[DEPARTMENT SETTING]
Enter the password
[RESET ALL COUNTERS]
* Enable the department management when the [RESET ALL COUNTERS] button is set to be
disabled.
9 - 14
05/11
<Setting Restore>
(11) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(12) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig.9-21
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
(13) Press the [4] button.
The screen to select the setting restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be restored
are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig.9-22
9 - 15
05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are restored.)
(15) Press the [Start] button.
The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig.9-23
9 - 16
05/11
(16) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly completed.
Fig.9-24
(17) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
Fig.9-25
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
9 - 17
05/11
Fig.9-26
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are restored.)
(22) Press the [Start] button.
The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig.9-27
9 - 18
05/11
(23) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly completed.
Fig.9-28
(24) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
9 - 19
05/11
Fig.9-29
Error number
ERROR 1
ERROR 2
ERROR 3
ERROR 4
ERROR 5
ERROR 6
ERROR 7
ERROR 8
ERROR 9
ERROR 10
ERROR 11
Error content
Copy error
I/F error
USB memory full error
Working folder error
File not found error
Security error
Checksum error
Model check error
Version check error
Destination check error
Serial number check error
9 - 20
05/11
File name
BACKUP_ADDR.sct
BACKUP_MBOX.sct
BACKUP_TEMP.sct
BACKUP_ALL.sct
BACKUP_Department.sct
BACKUP_User.sct
File name
network.sct
scan.sct
notice.sct
ldap.sct
fax.sct
wl.sct, bl.sct
File name
SRAM
sram.sct
In addition to the backed up data, the following files are created in each folder.
Back up item
File name
user_data.txt
setting_data.txt
sram_data.txt
User data
Setting item data
SRAM data
<Contents of file>
Version: VTD08.100 J
Serial Number: 0123456789
Date: MON SEP 26 18:34:40 2005
9 - 21
05/11
9 - 22
FG
N
G
L
LIVE
Black
Breaker
10A
White
Black
2
Noise
Filter
4
3
Black
White
Breaker
20A
White
Black
Noise
Filter
White
Black
FIL board
CN440
4
Black
White
J657
1
2 2
J657
1 1
Brown
Blue
Brown
Blue
Blue
White
Brown
Black
Brown
Blue
10 - 1
05/11
1
J654
3
White
Black
I
J
Brown
J654
4
Blue
Black
White
Brown
Blue
J611
2 2
1 1
3 3
1 2 3 4
J655
1 2 3 4
Blue
Black
Brown
J638
White
1 1
Black
2 2
Brown
Blue
White
F1
F2
CN454
IH coil control
circuit
CN453
Center IH coil
DC
DC
CN451 J608
N 1
Side
IH coil
Fuser roller
side thermostat
IH board
White
Switching regulator
(Cover switch line)
Switching regulator
(Main switch line)
Fuser roller
center thermostat
Finisher
(Option)
MJ-1029 only
Switching regulator
J658
1
2
CN401
1
CN452
CN607 CN450
1 L
Side
IH coil
Fuser roller
Fuser
Brown
Blue
Black
White
White
Black
White
Black
Black
White
FUS board
White
Black
Black
J34 J28
DH-SCN-N
1 1
DH-SCN-L
2 2
J840
1 1
2 2
J839
2 2
1 1
J32
J31
Black
White
J637
DH-DRM-N
3 3
2 2
DH-DRM-L
1 1
J33
1 1
2 2
1 1
White
Black
Blue
White
Brown
Black
J645
4 4
G
E
H
F
Main switch
White
4 3
J523
4 3
Black
White
1 2
1 2
3
2
6
5
Black
White
3
2
6
5
4 4
J521
1 1
1 2
J652
1 2
Black
White
Brown
Blue
FG
N NEUTRAL
G
L LIVE
Black
CN441
1
Inlet
(AC IN)
NEUTRAL
Black
Blue
Brown
Blue
10
Fig.10-1
10 - 2
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
MODEM board
PC interface (IEEE1284)
Speaker
+
-
CN503
1
2
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
RD-0
A[0]
A[2]
A[4]
A[6]
A[8]
A[10]
A[12]
A[14]
A[16]
A[18]
SG
SG
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
BOOTCS-0
A[1]
A[3]
A[5]
A[7]
A[9]
A[11]
A[13]
A[15]
A[17]
ROMDET0-0
+5.1VA
LEDDL-0
CN602
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
HRNS-HDD-DES-390
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
TXB2
RXIN2
CML2-1
LD2
SG
ATT3DB2-1
RLADJ12
RLADJ22
SG
AG
-12VA
AG
+12VA
NC
+5.1VA
AG
CI2-0
ANSDET2
REVA2-0
REVB2-0
NC
NC
+5.1VA
AG
+5.1VA
-12VA
AG
+12VA
NC
NC
TXOUT1
RXIN1
CML1-1
LD1
EXTRG
ATT3DB1-1
RLADJ11
RLADJ21
RGCLK
AG
-12VA
AG
+12VA
+12VF
20Hz/16Hz
AG
CI1-0
ANSDET1
REVA1-0
REVB1-0
INTHOOK-0
EXTHOOK-0
+5.1VA
AG
+5.1VA
-12VA
AG
+12VA
+12VF
AG
CN401
SG
8
AG
7
NC
6
NC
5
NC
4
-12VA
3
+12VA
2
NC
1
CN702
+12VF
1
AG
2
NC
3
CN812
1
2
3
4
CN9 or CN4
CN502
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
CN9 or CN4
CN501
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
CN805
CN701
+5.1VA
1
1
DA1
2
2
+5.1VA
3
3
DD0
4
4
+5.1VA
5
5
DD3
6
6
+5.1VA
7
7
DD6
8
8
+5.1VA
9
9
DD9
10
10
SG
11
11
DD12
12
12
SG
13
13
SG
14
14
SG
15
15
SG
16
16
SG
17
17
SG
18
18
+3.3VA
19
19
INTRQ-1
20
20
+3.3VA
21
21
+5.1VA
22
22
-12VA
23
23
SG
24
24
+12VA
25
25
DA0
26
26
DA2
27
27
IDECS1-1
28
28
DD[1]
29
29
DD[2]
30
30
DD[4]
31
31
DD[5]
32
32
DD[7]
33
33
DD[8]
34
34
DD[10]
35
35
DD[11]
36
36
DD[13]
37
37
DD[14]
38
38
DD[15]
39
39
DIOR-0
40
40
DIOW-0
41
41
DMACK-0
42
42
DLDCS0-1
43
43
RESET-0
44
44
DMARQ-1
45
45
NC
46
46
WAKEUP-1
47
47
SG
48
48
SG
49
49
NC
50
50
TXOUT2
+5.1VA
+12VA
+3.3VA
MOD2DMA-1
SG
MEM2CS-0
+5.1VA
MEMRD2-0
CLKOE-1
TXEN2-1
+5.1VA
A[16]
A[14]
A[12]
A[10]
A[8]
A[6]
A[4]
A[2]
A[0]
+5.1VA
CEP1RST-0
+5.1VA
SG
CEPCLK
SG
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
D[8]
D[10]
D[12]
D[14]
SG
MOD2DET-0
SG
DREQC2-1
DACKC2-0
RXIN2
AG
-12VA
AG
MD2INT-1
MOD2CS-0
MOD2RST-0
SG
RXEN2-1
MEMWRH2-0
MEMWRL2-0
A[18]
A[17]
A[15]
A[13]
A[11]
A[9]
A[7]
A[5]
A[3]
A[1]
CPURST-0
CEP2INT-1
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
IORD2-0
IOWR2-0
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
D[9]
D[11]
D[13]
D[15]
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
CEP2CS-0
DREQD2-1
DACKD2-0
CN401
CN600
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
68
68
69
69
70
70
71
71
72
72
73
73
74
74
75
75
76
76
77
77
78
78
79
79
80
80
BUSY
SELECT
NACK
NFAULT
PEERR
DATA[0]
DATA[1]
DATA[2]
DATA[3]
DATA[4]
DATA[5]
DATA[6]
DATA[7]
NINIT
NSTROB
NSELIN
NAUTDF
HLH
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
PLH
Scrambler board
FAX board
CN109
Option
To Slot [1]
To Slot [0]
CN811
2
1
NC
3
FAX
power relay
board
TRST#
+12VA
TMS
TD1
+5.1VA
INTA#
INTC#
+5.1VA
RESERVED
+3.3VA
RESERVED
+3.3VAUX
RST#
+3.3VA
GNT#
SG
PME#
AD[30]
+3.3VA
AD[28]
AD[26]
SG
AD[24]
IDSEL
+3.3VA
AD[22]
AD[20]
SG
AD[18]
AD[16]
+3.3VA
FRAME#
SG
TRDY#
SG
STOP#
+3.3VA
RESERVED
RESERVED
SG
PAR
AD[15]
+3.3VA
AD[13]
AD[11]
SG
AD[09]
SG
SG
C/BE[0]#
+3.3VA
AD[06]
AD[04]
SG
AD[02]
AD[00]
+3.3VA
REQ64#
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
-12VA
TCK
SG
TDO
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
INTB#
INTD#
PRSNT1#
RESERVED
PRSNT2#
RESERVED
SG
CLK
SG
REQ#
+3.3VA
AD[31]
AD[29]
SG
AD[27]
AD[25]
+3.3VA
C/BE[3]#
AD[23]
SG
AD[21]
AD[19]
+3.3VA
AD[17]
C/BE[2]#
SG
IRDY#
+3.3VA
DEVSEL#
SG
LOCK#
PERR#
+3.3VA
SERR#
+3.3VA
C/BE[1]#
AD[14]
SG
AD[12]
AD[10]
M66EN
SG
SG
AD[08]
AD[07]
+3.3VA
AD[05]
AD[03]
SG
AD[01]
+3.3VA
ACK64#
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
A39
A40
A41
A42
A43
A44
A45
A46
A47
A48
A49
A50
A51
A52
A53
A54
A55
A56
A57
A58
A59
A60
A61
A62
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
B33
B34
B35
B36
B37
B38
B39
B40
B41
B42
B43
B44
B45
B46
B47
B48
B49
B50
B51
B52
B53
B54
B55
B56
B57
B58
B59
B60
B61
B62
PCI slot
DDR DIMM
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
-12VA
-12VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+3.3VA
IDSEL0
OPBINT(0)
SG
IDSEL1
SG
PCICLK(3)
SG
REQ(1)
REQ(0)
+3.3VA
AD[31]
AD[29]
SG
AD[27]
AD[25]
+3.3VA
C/BE[3]
AD[23]
SG
AD[21]
AD[19]
+3.3VA
AD[17]
C/BE[2]
SG
IRDY
+3.3VA
DEVSEL
SG
LOCK
PERR
+3.3VA
SERR
+3.3VA
C/BE[1]
AD[14]
SG
AD[12]
AD[10]
M66EN
SG
AD[8]
AD[7]
+3.3VA
AD[5]
AD[3]
SG
AD[1]
+3.3VA
+5.1VA
SG
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
+12VA
+12VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+3.3VA
OPBINT(1)
+3.3VA
PCIRST
+3.3VA
PCICLK(4)
+3.3VA
GNT(1)
GNT(0)
SG
PME
AD[30]
+3.3VA
AD[28]
AD[26]
SG
AD[24]
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
AD[22]
AD[20]
SG
AD[18]
AD[16]
+3.3VA
FRAME
SG
TRDY
SG
STOP
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
PAR
AD[15]
+3.3VA
AD[13]
AD[11]
SG
AD[9]
SG
C/BE[0]
+3.3VA
AD[6]
AD[4]
SG
AD[2]
AD[0]
+3.3VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
DATA0
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
DATA8
DATA10
DATA12
DATA14
A21
A19
A17
A15
A13
A11
A09
A07
A05
A03
RDX
CS0-A
CS0-B
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
DATA1
DATA3
DATA5
DATA7
DATA9
DATA11
DATA13
DATA15
A20
A18
A16
A14
A12
A10
A08
A06
A04
A02
A22
/CS
+3.3VA
RMSL
/WRX
SG
SG
CN801
CN116
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
28
28
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
38
38
39
39
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
59
60
60
61
61
62
62
63
63
64
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
68
68
69
69
70
70
71
71
72
72
73
73
74
74
75
75
76
76
77
77
78
78
79
79
80
80
81
81
82
82
83
83
84
84
85
85
86
86
87
87
88
88
89
89
90
90
91
91
92
92
93
93
94
94
95
95
96
96
97
97
98
98
99
99
100 100
101 101
102 102
103 103
104 104
105 105
106 106
107 107
108 108
109 109
110 110
111 111
112 112
113 113
114 114
115 115
116 116
117 117
118 118
119 119
120 120
CN107
50
1
49
2
48
3
47
4
46
5
45
6
44
7
43
8
42
9
41
10
40
11
39
12
38
13
37
14
36
15
35
16
34
17
33
18
32
19
31
20
30
21
29
22
28
23
27
24
26
25
25
26
24
27
23
28
22
29
21
30
20
31
19
32
18
33
17
34
16
35
15
36
14
37
13
38
12
39
11
40
10
41
9
42
8
43
7
44
6
45
5
46
4
47
3
48
2
49
1
50
CN115
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
+5.1VD
APSC-0
SG
+5.1VD
APS3-0
SG
+5.1VD
APS2-0
SG
+5.1VD
APS1-0
SG
J22
3
2
1
J21
3
2
1
J20
3
2
1
J18
3
HOME-SNR
2
(S6)
1
CN3
1
2
3
B7
B8
B9
B4
B5
B6
B1
B2
B3
A7
A8
A9
A4
A5
A6
CN2
A1
A2
A3
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
CN115
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN8
CN5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
SCNM-BB
+36VC
SCNM-B
SCNM-AB
+36VC
SCNM-A
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
SG
CCDRS-0
SG
CCDCP-0
SG
CCDSH-0
SG
CCDCK2B-0
SG
CCDCK2A-0
SG
CCDCK1A-0
SG
CCD-EVEN-R
SG
CCD-EDD-R
SG
CCD-EVEN-L
SG
CCD-ODD-L
SG
AG
AG
AG
+12VD
+12VD
+12VD
+3.3VA
FRAME
CLKRUN
TRDY
SERR
STOP
SG
+3.3VA
PERR
DEVSEL
C/BE[1]
SG
AD[14]
AD[15]
SG
AD[13]
AD[12]
AD[11]
AD[10]
SG
SG
AD[09]
AD[08]
C/BE[0]
AD[07]
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
AD[05]
AD[06]
AD[04]
RSV
AD[02]
AD[03]
AD[00]
+5.1VA
RSV WIP
AD[01]
RSV WIP
SG
SG
AC SYNC
M66EN
AC SDATA IN
AC SDATA OUT
AC BIT CLK
AC CODEC ID0
AC CODEC ID1
AC RESET
MOD AUDIO MON
RSV
AUDIO GND
SG
SYS AUDIO OUT
SYS AUDIO IN
SYS AUDIO OUT GND
SYS AUDIO IN GND
AUDIO GND
AUDIO GND
RSV
MPC1ACT
VCC5V
+3.3VA
SG
HOME-0
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
APSR-0
SG
J23
3
2
1
NC
+24VE
FANSLG-0
J24
3
2
1
J19
1 2
2 1
DG
DG
LMPON-0A
+24VE
+24VE
Option
JPD/SAD/ASD/ASU/
AUD/MJD/CND/KRD/
TWD model only
APS1
(S1)
APS2
(S2)
APS3
(S3)
APS-C
(S4)
APS-R
(S5)
J25
1
2
CN1
CN2
5
1
4
2
INV-EXP
3
(INV-EXP)
3
2
4
1
SLGFAN-MOT
(M23)
LP-EXPO
(EXP)
TIP
RING
BPMJ-3
BPMJ-1
BPMJ-6
BPMJ-2
BPMJ-7
BPMJ-4
BPMJ-8
BPMJ-5
LED1 GRNP
LED2 YELP
ENABLE/DISABLE
LED2 YELN
CHSCND
RSV
INTB
+5.1VA
+3.3VA
INTA
RSV
RSV
SG
+3.3VA
CLK
RST
SG
+3.3VA
REQ
GNT
+3.3VA
SG
AD[31]
PME
AD[29]
RSV
SG
AD[30]
AD[27]
+3.3VA
AD[25]
AD[28]
RSV
AD[26]
C/BE[3]
AD[24]
AD[23]
IDSEL
SG
SG
AD[21]
AD[22]
AD[19]
AD[20]
SG
PAR
AD[17]
AD[18]
C/BE[2]
AD[16]
IRDY
+3.3VA
CN109
SG
DQ4
DQ5
VDD
DM0
DQ6
DQ7
SG
NC
NC
NC
VDD
DQ14
DQ13
DM1
VDD
DQ14
DQ15
CKE1
VDD
NC
DQ20
A12
SG
DQ21
A11
DM2
VDD
DQ22
A8
DQ23
SG
A6
DQ28
DQ29
VDD
DM3
A3
DQ30
SG
DQ31
CB4
CB5
VDD
CK0
/CK0
SG
DMB
A10
CB6
VDD
CB7
SG
DQ36
DQ37
VDD
DM4
DQ38
DQ39
SG
DQ44
/RAS
DQ45
VDD
/CS0
/CS1
DMS
SG
DQ46
DQ47
NC
VDD
DQS2
DQS3
NC
VDD
DM6
DQS4
DQS5
VDD
NC
DQ60
DQ61
SG
DM7
DQ62
DQ63
VDD
SA0
SA1
SA2
VDD-SPD
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
J26
CN11
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN29
3
2
1
CN30
3
2
1
CN31
3
DFLD-EXIT-SNR 2
(S68)
1
CN34
3
DFAPS-SNR
2
(S64)
1
DFREAD-SNR
(S69)
DFOPN-SNR
(S65)
DF-LD-SOL
(SOL5)
DENG-SOL
(SOL6)
DF-SD-SOL
(SOL4)
+24V
LSOL
RSOL
+24V
+24V
SSOL
5
6
CN4
1
2
4
5
6
CN3
1
2
3
+5.1VD
*READS
READLED
+5.1VD
SG
APS
NC
CN32 CN33
+5.1VD
1 3
*LOUTS
2 2
LOUTLED
3 1
4 3
5 2
6 1
10
11
12
13
7
8
9
4
5
6
CN55 CN54
CN11
+5.1VD
1 6
1
SG
2 5
2
DFOPNS
3 4
3
CN28 CN27
1 2
2 1
+24VG
*COPSW
C_COM
+24VG
*DFOPSW
DF_COM
CN26 CN25
1 3
NC
2 2
3 1
CN24 CN23
1 2
2 1
CN21
4
2
1
CN22
4
DF-OPNINTLCK-SW 2
(SW9)
1
DF-COVINTLCK-SW
(SW10)
CN9
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN8
1
2
3
4
5
6
KMOT_*B
KMOT_B
KMOT_*A
KMOT_A
+24V
+24V
RMOT_*B
RMOT_B
RMOT_*A
RMOT_A
+24V
+24V
LMOT_*B
LMOT_B
LMOT_*A
LMOT_A
+24V
+24V
NC
SMOT_*B
SMOT_B
SMOT_*A
SMOT_A
+24V
+24V
CN6
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
UDMOT_*B
UDMOT_B
UDMOT_*A
UDMOT_A
+24V
+24V
CN5
1
2
3
4
5
6
DF-FEED-MOT
(M37)
DF-READ-MOT
(M36)
DF-L-EXIT-MOT
(M39)
DF-S-EXIT-MOT
(M40)
DF-TRY-MOT
(M38)
PWA-F-SLG
(SLG)
SCAN-MOT
(M1)
PWA-F-CCD
(CCD)
PWA-F-SYS
(SYS)
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
D0
D2
D4
D6
*RD
A0
A2
A4
A6
A8
A10
A12
A14
A16
A18
SG
SG
D1
D3
D5
D7
*CS2
A1
A3
A5
A7
A9
A11
A13
A15
A17
ROMSEL
+5.1VD
LED
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TXD+
TXDRXIN+
GND
GND
RXINGND
GND
CN6
1
2
3
INV_VDD5V
INV_CONT
INV_GND
INV-LCD
(INV-LCD)
CN6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CN118
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN44
3
2
1
DFTRY-VR-SNR
(S54)
DFTRY-SNR
(S53)
CN38
3
2
1
CN39
3
DFSIZE-SNR2 2
(S57)
1
CN40
3
DFSIZE-SNR3 2
(S58)
1
CN41
3
DFRGST-SNR 2
(S55)
1
DFSIZE-SNR1
(S56)
CN35
3
2
1
CN36
3
DFEMP-SNR
2
(S60)
1
CN37
3
DFU-LMT-SNR 2
(S59)
1
DFCOV-SNR
(S61)
PWA-F-ADF
(ADF)
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MDT[0]
MDT[2]
MDT[4]
MDT[6]
MRD-0
MAD[0]
MAD[2]
MAD[4]
MAD[6]
MAD[8]
MAD[10]
PNLDT1
PNLDT3
MAD[16]
MAD[18]
SG
SG
MDT[1]
MDT[3]
MDT[5]
MDT[7]
PNLCS-0
MAD[1]
MAD[3]
MAD[5]
MAD[7]
MAD[9]
PNLDT0
PNLDT2
MAD[15]
MAD[17]
ROMDT-0
+5.1VD
LED
CN9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
CN10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
CN42 CN43
1 12
2 11
3 10
CN45 CN46
1 3
2 2
3 1
10 3
11 2
12 1
7 6
8 5
9 4
4 9
5 8
6 7
PWA-F-KEY2
(KEY2)
+5.1VD
TRVR
SG
NC
+5.1VD
SG
TRYS
+5.1VD
SG
REGS
+5.1VD
SG
SIZS3
+5.1VD
SG
SIZS2
+5.1VD
SG
SIZS1
+5.1VD
SG
ULMTS
+5.1VD
SG
EMPS
+5.1VD
SG
COPS
4
5
6
7
CN14
1
2
3
10
11
12
7
8
9
4
5
6
CN13
1
2
3
7
8
9
4
5
6
CN12
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
+5.1VD
SG
CSEN
NC
4
5
6
Standard
+5.1VD
*SSBS
SSBLED
CN51 CN50
3 1
2 2
1 3
PWA-F-DSP
(DSP)
+24V
PWRFN-0A
(S63)
(S70)
(S67)
1
CN53
3
DF2 SD-REV-SNR
(S66)
1
CN52
3
DF2 SD-EXIT-SNR
CN49
3
DF2 MID-TR-SNR
(S62)
1
CN48
3
DF2 LENG-SNR
CN1
1
2
CN2
1
2
CN404
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+36VD
PG
+24VE
DG
+24VG
+24VG
DG
DG
+24V
PWRFN-0A
CN408
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN405
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN171
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CN170
+3.3VC
SG
+5.1VD
+5.1VD
SG
SG
+12VD
AG
PWRDWN-1
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
SG
SG
+5.1VA
+5.1VA
+5.1VB
SG
SG
SG
AG
AG
PWR-DN
+12VB
PWR-EN
+12VA
NC
NC
NC
NC
CN47
3
DF2 L-LMT-SNR
PS-FAN-MOT2
(M35)
CN101
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
15
16
11
14
12
13
CN114
+12VA
1
SG
2
SG
3
+5.1VA
4
CN113
/RESET
1
SG
2
DD7
3
DD8
4
DD6
5
DD9
6
DD5
7
DD10
8
DD4
9
DD11
10
DD3
11
DD12
12
DD2
13
DD13
14
DD1
15
DD14
16
DD0
17
DD15
18
SG
19
NC(KEY)
20
MDARQ
21
SG
22
/DIOW
23
SG
24
/DIOR
25
SG
26
IORDY
27
SG
28
/DMACK
29
SG
30
INTRQ
31
NC(RESERVED)
32
DA1
33
/PDIAG
34
DA0
35
DA2
36
/CS0
37
/CS1
38
/DASP
39
SG
40
PS-FAN-MOT1
(M34)
+5.1VD
*LNGS
LNGLED
CN16
+5.1VD
1
SG
2
SHS
3
7
8
9
10
4
5
6
CN5-2A
NC
18 18
NC
19 19
NC
20 20
J501
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
CN15
+5.1VD
1
SG
2
DLMTS
3
FG
J17
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
CN102
SG
26
SG
25
EXPON-0
24
+3.3VC
23
SG
22
SYSRST-0
21
SG
20
SRTS-0
19
SRXD-1A
18
STXD-1
17
SCTS-0A
16
SG
15
SG
14
TX0-0
13
TX0-1
12
SG
11
TX1-0
10
TX1-1
9
SG
8
TX2-0
7
TX2-1
6
SG
5
CLK-1
4
CLK-0
3
SG
2
SG
1
TCP
(TCP)
+3.3VC
SG
+5.1VD
SG
+12VD
AG
+24VE
DG
+36VD
PG
PWRDWN-1
LAN connector
(10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX)
Option
CN112
VDD
1
NC
2
NC
3
D4
D+
5
NC
6
NC
7
DETACH
8
NC
9
SG
10
NC
11
NC
12
/RESET
13
NC
14
NC
15
NC
16
NC
17
NC
18
NC
19
SG
20
LCD(LCD)
CN4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN4-2
CN4-1
CN2
CN1
1
2
3
CN2
1
2
3
4
CN1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bluetooth module
12
13
NC
14
15
16
17
18
NC
19
20
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CN2
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
PWA-F-KEY1
(KEY1)
HDD
(HDD)
CN407
+5.1VE
1
+5.1VF
2
SG
3
SG
4
+3.3VB
5
+12VC
6
SG
7
AG
8
PWR-DN
9
CN403
+24VD
1
DG
2
+36VC
3
PG
4
+5.1VH
5
SG
6
SG
+5.1VH
+5.1VH
SG
DDISO2-1
WRAPC2-0
SG
LVDS2-0
LVDS2-1
SG
SG
WRLV2-1
SG
+5.1VH
+5.1VH
SG
J201
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
NC
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J417
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
NC
SG
+5.1VH
+5.1VH
SG
DDISO1-1
WRAPC1-0
SG
LVDS1-0
LVDS1-1
SG
SG
WRLV1-1
SKHSLV1-1
+5.1VH
+5.1VH
SG
3
4
1
2
14
12
10
CN211
5
15
6
16
7
13
8
11
9
J208
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J207
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J213
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
VBUS0
DD+
SG
VBUS1
DD+
SG
CN117
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
VBUS
DD+
SG
VBUS0
DD+
SG
VBUS1
DD+
SG
CN110
1
2
3
4
CN111
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
J201
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
e-STUDIO850
PWA-F-LDR2
(LDR2)
PWA-F-LDR1
(LDR1)
Internal
USB connector
(for Data overwrite kit)
USB connector
(Host)
USB connector
(Device)
SE_VCC
SE_VOUT
SE_GND
SE_TOUT
TNR-MOTINTLCK-SW
(SW11)
Option
1
2
3
4
5
MIR-GLV
(GLV)
PWA-F-SNS
(SNS)
POL-MOT
(M2)
4
3
2
1
CN806
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
e-STUDIO850
Finisher
CN212
GLV2-0
1
GLV2-1
2
J217
2
1
J210
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
SG
SG
+5.1VF
+5.1VF
+5.1VF
BMRST-0
BMSW3-0
BMSW2-0
BMSW1-0
BMSW0-0
CSEXT-0
LVCNT-0
OSEL-0
BMDIN-1
BMSCK-1
CSINT-0
DOUT
EOUT
MOUT
NOUT
+5.1VF
NC
OUTAB-0
+5.1VF
NC
BMCK-0
+5.1VF
EOCNV-0
RSTITG-0
WLOWL-0
WUPPL-0
+5.1VF
+5.1VF
SG
SG
5
4
3
2
1
J215
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN206
PMCLK-1A
1
PMOK-0A
2
PMON-0A
3
DG
4
+24VD
5
PWA-F-SNS
(SNS)
POL-MOT
(M2)
e-STUDIO520/600/720
CN203
CN202
+5.1VE
1
3
BEAMDT-0
2
2
SG
1
3
CN209
27V
1
DG
2
PMON-0A
3
PMOK-0A
4
PMCLK-1A
5
Coin controller
SYS-FAN-MOT
(M33)
CN204
IDATX4
1
IDATX3
2
IDATX2
3
IDATX1
4
IDATX0
5
SG
6
MVDEN
7
RGTAS
8
PLRST
9
LSBSY
10
LCTS
11
LRTS
12
LRXD
13
LTXD
14
IVSYNC
15
IHSYNC
16
SG
17
IRCLK
18
SG
19
IVDEN
20
SG
21
IHDEN
22
SG
23
IDCLK
24
SG
25
IDATX7
26
IDATX6
27
IDATX5
28
Option
PS-ACC
(PS)
A
B
J502
4 1
3 2
2 3
1 4
J670
1 10
2 9
3 8
4 7
5 6
6 5
7 4
8 3
9 2
10 1
CN104
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
J503
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
J628
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
NC
15 15
NC
16 16
NC
17 17
NC
18 18
SFBCOV-SNR
(S25)
J517
3
2
1
J599
1 6
2 5
3 4
ATTRN-SNR
(S12)
4 3
5 2
6 1
J613
1 4
2 3
3 2
4 1
J558
3
FEEDCOV-SNR
2
(S26)
1
J505
1
2
3
4
NC
5
J501
U-FRNT-COV-SW 2
(SW7)
1
CN108
+12VA
1
SG
2
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
RD-0
A[0]
A[2]
A[4]
A[6]
A[8]
A[10]
A[12]
A[14]
A[16]
A[18]
SG
SG
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
CS2-0
A[1]
A[3]
A[5]
A[7]
A[9]
A[11]
A[13]
A[15]
A[17]
ROMDT
+5.1VE
LED-1
A
B
J504
1
2
3
J592
1 5
2 4
3 3
4 2
5 1
TNR-TR-MOT
(M6)
TNREMP-SNR
(S10)
TNR-SW
(SW2)
TNR-MOT
(M5)
SE_VCC
SE_VOUT
SE_GND
SE_TOUT
TEMP/HUMI-SNR
(S7)
CN106
L/S
1
FULL-C
2
NONO-C
3
B/W
4
+5.1VA
5
SG
6
NC
7
CN7
1
2
3
4
CN8
1
2
3
4
CN1
4
3
2
1
FG
1
2
3
4
J16
DFAK-0
1 1
DFSCST-0
2 2
DFRXD-0
3 3
SG
4 4
DFTXD-0
5 5
SG
6 6
DFRAK-0
7 7
DFRRQ-0
8 8
DFRQ-0
9 9
DFCNT-0
10 10
NC
11 11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
INV_VDD5V
INV_GND
OUTP4PW
OUTP3PW
COM2PW
RET8
RET7
RET6
SCN4
LW
MID
UP
INV_CONT
FG
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
DISP
FRM
LOAD
CP
VDD
VSS
DF
D0
D1
D2
D3
VEE
VLCD
CN5-2B
CN5-1B
FG
SE_TOUT
SE_GND
SE_VOUT
SE_VCC
RET1
SCN1
SCN2
SCN3
SCN4
OUTP8
OUTP7
OUTP6
OUTP5
OUTP4
OUTP3
OUTP2
OUTP1
COM1
COM2
CN410
+12VF
1
NC
2
AG
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN5-1A
SG
RET8
RET7
RET6
RET5
RET4
RET3
RET2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CN1
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
J526
A15 A1
A14 A2
A13 A3
A12 A4
A11 A5
A10 A6
A9
A7
A8
A8
A7
A9
A6 A10
A5 A11
A4 A12
A3 A13
A2 A14
A1 A15
B15 B1
B14 B2
B13 B3
B12 B4
B11 B5
B10 B6
B9
B7
B8
B8
B7
B9
B6 B10
B5 B11
B4 B12
B3 B13
B2 B14
B1 B15
CN105
XSCL-1A
A1
LP-1A
A2
WF-1A
A3
YP-1A
A4
SG
A5
BZON-0A
A6
CPPOW-0A
A7
LDCLKA
A8
LDDAT-0A
A9
LDLTH-0A
A10
LDON1-0A
A11
LDON0-0A
A12
SG
A13
+5.1VA
A14
+5.1VA
A15
+5.1VA
B1
+5.1VA
B2
CPRST-0A
B3
SG
B4
RTS0-0A
B5
CTS0-0A
B6
SOUT0-0A
B7
SIN0-0A
B8
SG
B9
UD3-1A
B10
UD2-1A
B11
UD1-1A
B12
UD0-1A
B13
SG
B14
LCDEN-1A
B15
VREF
DQ0
SG
DQ1
DQS0
DQ2
VDD
DQ3
NC
NC
SG
DQ8
DQ9
DQS1
VDD
CK1
/CK1
SG
DQ10
DQ11
CKE0
VDD
DQ16
DQ17
DQS2
SG
A9
DQ18
A7
VDD
DQ19
A5
DQ24
SG
DQ25
DQS3
A4
VDD
DQ26
DQ27
A2
SG
A1
CB0
CB1
VDD
DQS8
A0
CB2
SG
CB3
BA1
DQ32
VDD
DQ33
DQS4
DQ34
SG
BA0
DQ35
DQ40
VDD
/WE
DQ41
/CAS
SG
DQ55
DQ42
DQ43
VDD
NC
DQ48
DQ49
SG
/CK2
CK2
VDD
DQS6
DQ50
DQ51
SG
VDD-ID
DQ56
DQ57
VDD
DQS7
DQ58
DQ59
SG
NC
SDA
SCL
CN810
2
1
PWA-F-PLG
(PLG)
05/11
5
CN409
NC
6
DG
5
+24VF
4
+24VF
3
SG
2
+5.1VG
1
FG
CNT-GND
F-CNT
NC
NC
NC
NC
SG
TXD
SG
RXD
A3
A2
A1
A14
A15
A16
CN805
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN324
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CN342
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
A14
A15
A16
A10
A11
A12
A13
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
CN338
A1
A2
A3
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
NC
CN330
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CN344
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NC
11
CN325
34
1
33
2
32
3
31
4
30
5
29
6
28
7
27
8
26
9
25
10
24
11
23
12
22
13
21
14
20
15
19
16
18
17
17
18
16
19
15
20
14
21
13
22
12
23
11
24
10
25
9
26
8
27
7
28
6
29
5
30
4
31
3
32
2
33
1
34
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TNMTON-0A
TNMTCW-0A
+5.1VC
DG
+24VB
HOPSW-1A
SG
+5.1VC
TNRES-0
SG
DG
+24VB
TNHMLK-0
TNHMON-0A
UFTCS-0
SG
SG
SDCOV-1A
+5.1VC
+5.1VC
HUMIS-1A
SG
TEMPS-1A
ATSSW-1
ATSVR-1A
+24VB
ATS-1A
SG
SG
SG
SFCOV-1A
+5.1VC
IPC board
(Finisher)
CN402
+24VA
1
+24VB
2
+24VC
3
DG
4
DG
5
DG
6
+36VA
7
+36VB
8
PG
9
PG
10
PWRFN-0A
11
CN406
+3.3VD
1
+5.1VC
2
SG
3
SG
4
PWR-DN
5
+12VE
6
AG
7
CN103
LTXD
1
LRXD
2
LRTS
3
LCTS
4
LSBSY
5
PLRST
6
RGTAS
7
MVDEN
8
SG
9
CMD
10
CBSY
11
CACK
12
CERR
13
SG
14
STS
15
SBSY
16
SACK
17
SERR
18
SG
19
MCNT
20
SYSRST
21
EXPON
22
+5.1VC
23
+3.3VD
24
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A7
A6
A5
A4
A10
A11
A12
A13
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
J635
A1 A16
A2 A15
A3 A14
SG
+5.1VC
AD0
AD2
AD4
AD6
I/O0
I/O2
I/O4
I/O6
SG
WE
CSIP2-0A
+5.1VC
IPCSW-0
SG
+5.1VC
AD1
AD3
AD5
AD7
I/O1
I/O3
I/O5
I/O7
SG
OE
RST-0
VDD
SG
+24VB
TOLON-0A
KCTRC-1A
MCRUN-0A
EXTCTR-0A
DG
BKCTR-0A
MNCTR-0A
SG
SIZE3-0A
SIZE2-0A
SIZE1-0A
SIZE0-0A
+5.1VC
CTRCN2-0
PD[0]
PD[2]
PD[4]
PD[6]
PRD-0
PA[0]
PA[2]
PA[4]
PA[6]
PA[8]
PA[10]
PA[12]
PA[14]
PA[16]
PA[18]
SG
SG
PD[1]
PD[3]
PD[5]
PD[7]
PBOOTCS
PA[1]
PA[3]
PA[5]
PA[7]
PA[9]
PA[11]
PA[13]
PA[15]
PA[17]
PROMDETO-0
+5.1VC
PLED-1
D[0]
D[2]
D[4]
D[6]
RD-0
A[0]
A[2]
A[4]
A[6]
A[8]
A[10]
A[12]
A[14]
A[16]
A[18]
SG
SG
D[1]
D[3]
D[5]
D[7]
BOOTCS
A[1]
A[3]
A[5]
A[7]
A[9]
A[11]
A[13]
A[15]
A[17]
ROMDETO-0
+5.1VC
LED-1
DG
+24VB
RTNMTLK-0
RTNMTON-0A
RSTSW-0A
+24VB
NC
NC
NC
NC
WCLMTB-0A
WCLMTA-0A
+24VB
ERSLP-0A
SG
MCLSW-0A
CLNSW-0A
SG
DRTH-0A
SG
+12VE
AG
CTDVR-1A
CTDVD-1A
CTDVC-1A
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
DG
+24VB
RTNHMLK-0
RTNHMON-0A
SG
DEVSW-0A
DCTIF-0A
+24VA
LDFAN-0A
+24VA
DVMBK-0A
+5.1VC
DEVMON-0A
SG
+5.1VC
DEVCK-1A
DG
DG
+24VA
+24VA
DCTF2-0A
+24VA
DEVFA-0A
+24VA
SG
TFUSW-1A
+5.1VC
TCMTA-0A
TCMTB-0A
+5.1VC
TRCS1-0A
SG
+5.1VC
TRCS2-0A
SG
J596
3
2
1
J549
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J589
3
2
1
J609
1
3
5
7
9
11
NC
CN351
PFMON-0A
1
SG
2
+5.1VC
3
PFMCK-1A
4
PG
5
PG
6
+36VA
7
+36VA
8
LSU-FAN-MOT
(M32)
DEV-MOT
(M10)
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
SG
TFUSW-1A
+5.1VC
NC
TCMTA-0A
TCMTB-0A
+5.1VC
TRCS1-0A
SG
+5.1VC
TRCS2-0A
SG
RGTA-0A
+24VC
RGTC-0A
RGTB-0A
+24VC
RGTD-0A
CPSW2-0
SG
PS-HVT
(HVT)
DRM-MOT
(M11)
TRB-MOT
(M14)
OUT5
A
OUT4
C
D D
REV-MOT
(M19)
B Magnetic roller
D Grid
OUT2
C
OUT3
A
J621
1 1
TRB-CAM-MOT
(M15)
2 2
J622
1
TRB-SNR1
2
(S16)
3
J623
1
TRB-SNR2
2
(S15)
3
OUT1
A
B B
3
9
1
11
7
5
J596
3
USD-TNRFLL-SNR
2
(S11)
1
J549
8 1
7 2
6 3
5 4
4 5
3 6
2 7
1 8
J604
1
THMS-DRM
(THM5)
2
J610
1
2
TNR-LVL-SNR
3
(S14)
4
5
B CH-CLN-POS-SW
(SW4)
A
9
11
MAIN-SW
(SW6)
3
9
1
11
7
5
J589
3
RGST-SNR
2
(S18)
1
J609
1
3
5
RGST-MOT
(M16)
7
CN422
+36VB
1
+36VB
2
TRMA-0
3
TRMBB-0
4
TRMB-0
5
TRMAB-0
6
CN421
+36VB
1
+36VB
2
DRMA-0
3
DRMBB-0
4
DRMB-0
5
DRMAB-0
6
e-STUDIO600/850
B9
B10
B11
B12
5
4
3
2
1
NC
10
5
4
3
2
1
10
DCT-I-FAN-MOT
(M30)
J595
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FUS-FAN-MOT
(M28)
DEV-FAN-MOT
(M31)
CN341
NC
A1
SG
A2
PSTPS-1
A3
+5.1VC
A4
J559
9
8
7
6
FEED-MOT
5
(M20)
4
3
2
1
CN412
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J618
2 2
1 1
J616
2 2
1 1
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
Not used
SPRT-FING-SOL
(SOL1)
J590
4
3
2
1
J632
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
B
A
J594
1
2
HOP-MOT
3
(M7)
4
5
J593
1
2
RCY-TNR-MOT
3
(M8)
4
NC
5
NC
DEV-SW
(SW3)
PWA-F-LGC
(LGC)
J601
1 CH-CLN-MOT
M
(M12)
2
J602 CN1
2 1
LP-ERS
(ERS)
1 2
J524
2 6
1 5
J653
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
4 5
3 6
2 7
1 8
J507
8 1
7 2
6 3
5 4
J629
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
B
A
CN605
4
3 DRUM-SUF-SNR
(S13)
2
1
2 5
1 6
J633
6 1
5 2
4 3
3 4
J515
1
2
DRM-CLN-MOT
3
(M13)
4
NC
5
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
PWA-F-MOT
(MOT)
Option
CN347
HVTAC-0A
1
HVTER-0
2
HVTM-0A
3
HVTVR-1A
4
HVTT-0A
5
HVTBB-0A
6
HVMVR-1A
7
DG
8
+24VB
9
HVDVR-1A
10
HVDAC-0A
11
HVDDC-0A
12
CN343
1
15
2
14
3
13
4
12
5
11
6
10
7
9
8
8
9
7
10
6
11
5
12
4
13
3
14
2
15
1
e-STUDIO520/720
B9
B10
B11
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
RGTA-0A
+24VC
RGTC-0A
RGTB-0A
+24VC
RGTD-0A
NC
NC
CN420
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2 3
1 4
J600
2 2
1 1
J570
2 2
1 1
J598
4 1
3 2
2 3
1 4
DG
+24VB
DFURMLK-0
DFURMON-0A
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
A7
A8
A9
A10
A5
A6
J597
2 2
1 1
CN341
SG
A1
PSTPS-1
A2
+5.1VC
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B20
A13
A12
A11
A10
A15
A14
NC
NC
NC
NC
EXIT-MOT
(M18)
J624
A19 A1
A18 A2
A17 A3
A16 A4
J619
4 1
3 2
6
5
4
3
2
1
+24VA
SCRP-0A
CN340
+36VB
1
+36VB
2
PG
3
PG
4
DRCLK-0A
5
DRVRST-0
6
DRMVR-0A
7
DRMEN-1A
8
DRMCW-0A
9
+5.1VC
10
SG
11
TRMCK-0A
12
TRMVR-0A
13
TRMEN-1A
14
TRMCW-0
15
PG
16
+36VB
17
B13
B14
B11
B12
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
A13
A14
A11
A12
A7
A8
A9
A10
A5
A6
CN339
SG
A1
KCTRC-1A
A2
+24VA
A3
KCTRON-0A
A4
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
7
8
9
10
5
6
CN337
DG
1
SG
2
DRV0-1A
3
+24VB
4
CN336
+24VB
1
+24VB
2
EXTMA-0A
3
EXTMC-0A
4
EXTMB-0A
5
EXTMD-0A
6
5
2
6
1
3
4
+24VB
+24VB
MTMA-0
MTMBB-0
MTMB-0
MTMAB-0
IH-FAN-MOT
(M26)
J528
2 2
1 1
Option
J850
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
1
2
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
PWA-FMOT2-RV
(MOT2-RV)
External LCF
J415
1
2
3
4
5
6
J561
2 2
GATE-SOL
(SOL2)
1 1
J562
3
REV-SNR1
2
(S23)
1
J563
3
REV-SNR2
2
(S24)
1
J567
3
EXIT-SNR
2
(S22)
1
J568
2
EXIT-COV-SW
(SW5)
1
J564
2 2
REV-FAN-MOT1
(M24)
1 1
J565
2 2
REV-FAN-MOT2
(M25)
1 1
J532
2 2
1 1
J529
2 2
HRZ-DR-CLT2
(CLT2)
1 1
J530
2 2
HRZ-DR-CLT3
(CLT3)
1 1
J533
3
HRZ-TR-SNR1
2
(S19)
1
J534
3
HRZ-TR-SNR2
2
(S20)
1
J535
3
HRZ-TR-SNR3
2
(S21)
1
HRZ-DR-CLT1
(CLT1)
J420
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FG
J516
1
2
3
4
NC
5
J585
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J569
2 2
1 1
J571
2 2
1 1
CN455
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FUS-MOT
(M3)
PWA-F-IH
(IH)
PLTRM-0A
PLTRM-1A
SG
P3BTM-1A
+5.1VC
SG
P4BTM-1A
+5.1VC
J555
2 2
1 1
J643
3
2
1
J644
3
2
1
CST4BTM-SNR
(S48)
CST3BTM-SNR
(S42)
CST-TRY-MOT2
(M22)
USD-TNR-MOT
(M9)
EXIT-FAN-MOT
(M29)
DCT-O-FAN-MOT
(M27)
WEB-MOT
(M4)
WEB-SNR
(S8)
J579
2 2
1 1
J580
3
2
1
J581
3 3
2 2
4 4
1 1
J577
3
FUS-TR-SNR
2
(S9)
1
J578
8 8
THMS-R-HTR
(THM3)
5 5
4 4
7 7
THMS-F-HTR
(THM1)
6 6
3 3
2 2
THMS-C-HTR
(THM2)
1 1
THMS-L-HTR
(THM4)
SG
P2BTM-1A
+5.1VC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B12
B11
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
J822
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
2
2
1
1
J560
1
11
2
10
3
9
4
8
5
7
6
6
7
5
8
4
9
3
10
2
11
1
13
12
11
16
15
14
6
7
8
3
4
5
J614
1
18
2
17
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
J611
A1 A20
A2 A19
A3 A18
A4 A17
A5 A16
A6 A15
A7 A14
A8 A13
A9 A12
A10 A11
A11 A10
A12 A9
A13 A8
A14 A7
A15 A6
A16 A5
A17 A4
A18 A3
A19 A2
A20 A1
B1 B20
B2 B19
B3 B18
B4 B17
B5 B16
B6 B15
J584
1 4
2 3
3 2
4 1
J615
1 4
2 3
3 2
4 1
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
B1
B2
J645
A1 A12
A2 A11
A3 A10
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
5
6
7
8
CN333
1
2
3
4
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
B1
B2
CN332
A1
A2
A3
FG
SG
DG
PFCPM2-0A
PFCPM1-0A
LC-FCLT-0
LCPCLT-0
LCFDMB-0A
LCFDMA-0A
LCTRMB-0A
LCTRMA-0A
+24VC
+24VC
LCFINT-0
LC-FEED
LC-PICK
LC-TRAYUP
LC-BTH
LC-CST
LC-PEMP
LC-SET
LC-JUDGE
+5.1VC
NC
+24VB
+24VB
DG
DG
REVMC-0A
DRVRST-0
RVNVR-0A
REVME-0A
REVCW-0A
+5.1VC
SG
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
ADUFA2-0A
+24VC
SG
EXCSW-1A
+5.1VC
ADUFA1-0A
+24VC
SG
EXTSW-1A
+5.1VC
SG
REVS2-1A
+5.1VC
SG
REVS1-1A
+5.1VC
STKSL-0A
+24VC
SG
ADTR1-1A
+5.1VC
SG
ADTR2-1A
+5.1VC
SG
ADTR3-1A
+5.1VC
SG
ADCNT-1A
ATRC4-0A
+24VC
ATRC1-0A
+24VC
ATRC2-0A
+24VC
CN346
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
17
18
12
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
6
7
8
3
4
5
CN335
1
2
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
CN334
H1EER3-0
A1
H1EER2-0
A2
H1EER1-0
A3
IHDUTY-1A
A4
SG
A5
IH1ON-1
A6
H2PWR3-0A
A7
H2PWR2-0A
A8
H2PWR1-0A
A9
H1PWR3-0A
A10
H1PWR2-0A
A11
H1PWR1-0A
A12
+5VSW
A13
IH2ON-1
A14
IHFAN-0A
A15
+24VC
A16
NC
A17
HTRMT-0C
SG
HTRML-0A
SG
+5.1VC
HTRCK-1A
PG
PG
+36VA
+36VA
DG
+24VB
AGMLK-0
AGMON-0A
+24VC
DCTOF-0A
+24VC
RVSFA-0A
SG
WEBED-0
+5.1VC
WEBMTB-0A
WEBMTA-0A
+5.1VC
WEBCN-0
SG
NC
NC
+5VSW
STH--1A
STH+-1A
ETH--1A
ETH+-1A
MTH--1A
MTH+-1A
FUSSW-1A
NC
PTH--1A
PTH+-1A
SG
HEXTS-1A
+5.1VC
B6
B7
B8
B3
B4
B5
B1
B2
A6
A7
A8
A3
A4
A5
SG
P1BTM-1A
+5.1VC
J551
3
CST2BTM-SNR
2
(S36)
1
CST1BTM-SNR
(S30)
J550
3
2
1
CST-TRY-MOT1
(M21)
CN331
PUTRM-0A
A1
PUTRM-1A
A2
J554
2 2
1 1
+24VB
+24VB
DG
DG
MTMCK-0A
DRVRST-0
MTMRF-0A
MTMEN-0A
NC
+5.1VC
SG
+24VC
SFBC-0A
NC
NC
SG
RGTAS-1
+5.1VC
SG
SFBS0-1A
SFBS1-1A
SFBS2-1A
SFBS3-1A
+5.1VC
SFBSW-1A
SG
SG
P2FED-1A
+5.1VC
+24VC
P2FDC-0A
+24VC
P2RGC-0A
SG
PCST2-1A
+5.1VC
SG
P2RGT-1A
+5.1VC
SG
P2TOP-1A
+5.1VC
SG
P2EMP-1A
+5.1VC
SG
P1FED-1A
+5.1VC
+24VC
P1FDC-0A
+24VC
P1RGC-0A
SG
PCST1-1A
+5.1VC
SG
P1RGT-1A
+5.1VC
SG
P1TOP-1A
+5.1VC
SG
P3FED-1A
+5.1VC
+24VC
P3FDC-0A
+24VC
P3RGC-0A
NC
SG
PCST3-1A
+5.1VC
TPUSL-0A
+24VC
SG
P3RGT-1A
+5.1VC
SG
P3TOP-1A
+5.1VC
10
11
21
22
23
24
19
20
16
17
18
12
13
14
15
7
8
9
4
5
6
11
12
6
7
8
9
10
3
4
5
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
B9
B10
B11
B7
B8
B5
B6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
B1
B2
B3
B4
A4
A5
A6
B9
B10
B11
B7
B8
B5
B6
B1
B2
B3
B4
A10
A11
A7
A8
A9
A4
A5
A6
B3
B2
B1
B5
B4
B7
B6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B11
B10
B9
B8
A8
A7
A6
B9
B10
B11
B7
B8
B5
B6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
B1
B2
B3
B4
A4
A5
A6
J642
A11 A1
A10 A2
A9
A3
B3
B2
B1
B5
B4
B7
B6
B11
B10
B9
B8
A2
A1
A5
A4
A3
A8
A7
A6
J641
A11 A1
A10 A2
A9
A3
B3
B2
B1
B5
B4
B7
B6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B11
B10
B9
B8
A8
A7
A6
NC
NC
NC
NC
CST1-TR-CLT
(CLT5)
CST1-SNR
(S29)
CST1TR-SNR
(S33)
CST1TRY-SNR
(S32)
CST1EMP-SNR
(S31)
PWA-FMOT2-MT
(MOT2-MT)
CST2-TR-CLT
(CLT7)
CST2-SNR
(S35)
CST2TR-SNR
(S39)
CST2TRY-SNR
(S38)
CST2EMP-SNR
(S37)
CST2FEED-SNR
(S40)
LCF-PICK-SOL
(SOL7)
J536
3
CST3EMP-SNR
2
(S43)
1
J537
3
CST3TRY-SNR
2
(S44)
1
J538
3
CST3
TR-SNR
2
(S45)
1
3
2
1
CST2-FEED-CLT
(CLT8)
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
CST1FEED-SNR
(S34)
2 2
1 1
2 2
1 1
2 2
1 1
J541
2 2
1 1
CST4-TR-CLT
(CLT11)
CST4-SNR
(S47)
CST4TR-SNR
(S51)
CST4TRY-SNR
(S50)
CST4EMP-SNR
(S49)
3
2
1
CST4FEED-SNR
(S52)
CST4-FEED-CLT
(CLT12)
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
J539
3
CST32 FEED-SNR
(S46)
1
CST3-FEED-CLT
(CLT10)
CST3-TR-CLT
(CLT9)
TLTRM-0A
TLTRM-1A
TEFSL-0A
+24VC
TLCFS-1A
+5.1VC
14
13
12
16
15
19
18
17
5
4
3
2
1
22
21
20
8
7
6
NC
NC
NC
J588
2 LCF-TRY-MOT
(M41)
1
B3
B2
B1
B5
B4
B8
B7
B6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B11
B10
B9
A8
A7
A6
J503
A11 11
A10 10
A9
9
J506
1
LCFBTM-SNR
2
(S71)
3
J511
1 1
2 2
LCF-ENDF-SOL
(SOL8)
J510
1 LCF-ENDFSTP-SNR
2
(S75)
3
J507
1 LCF-ENDF-MOT
M
(M42)
2
J509
1 LCF-ENDFHP-SNR
2
(S73)
3
J508
1
LCFEMP-SNR
2
(S74)
3
J512
1
LCFMST-SNR
2
(S72)
3
ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD/
TWD(e-STUDIO850) model only
TLTMM-0A
TLTMM-1A
+5.1VC
TLTGE-1A
SG
NC
+5.1VC
TLTGS-1A
SG
+5.1VC
TLEGC-1A
SG
+5.1VC
TLLEMP-1A
SG
MT-MOT
(M17)
Tandem LCF
4th drawer
3rd drawer
2nd drawer
1st drawer
3
9
1
11
7
5
SFBSIZE-SNR
(S28)
J518
1
SFB2 FEED-SNR
(S27)
3
J519
1
2
3
4
5
CN424
+24VB
1
+24VB
2
MTMA-0
3
MTMBB-0
4
MTMB-0
5
MTMAB-0
6
ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD/
TWD(e-STUDIO850) model only
J540
3
CST3-SNR
2
(S41)
1
J542
J543
2 2
1 1
2 2
1 1
SFB-SOL
(SOL3)
CST1-FEED-CLT
(CLT6)
3
2
1
2 2
1 1
2 2
1 1
2 2
1 1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
2
1
J557
3
MID-TR-SNR
2
(S17)
1
J640
A11 A1
A10 A2
A9
A3
B7
B8
B5
B6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
B1
B2
B3
B4
A4
A5
A6
J583
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J517
J514
5
1
4
2
3
3
2
4
1
5
J516
2 2
SFB-FEED-CLT
(CLT4)
1 1
1
2
3
J515
2 2
1 1
B9
B10
B11
B3
B2
B1
B5
B4
B7
B6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
B11
B10
B9
B8
A8
A7
A6
J639
A11 A1
A10 A2
A9
A3
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J527
14
1
13
2
12
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
10
9
8
J513
12
1
11
2
SG
P4FED-1A
+5.1VC
+24VC
P4FDC-0A
+24VC
P4RGC-0A
SG
PCST4-1A
+5.1VC
SG
P4RGT-1A
+5.1VC
SG
P4TOP-1A
+5.1VC
CN345
+5.1VC
1
TLFBTM-1A
2
SG
3
17
18
19
15
16
13
14
10
11
12
7
8
9
4
5
6
CN350
SG
1
P4EMP-1A
2
+5.1VC
3
20
21
22
18
19
16
17
12
13
14
15
10
11
7
8
9
4
5
6
CN328
SG
1
P3EMP-1A
2
+5.1VC
3
36
37
38
34
35
32
33
29
30
31
26
27
28
23
24
25
20
21
22
17
18
19
15
16
13
14
10
11
12
7
8
9
4
5
6
CN329
SG
1
P1EMP-1A
2
+5.1VC
3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
A11
A12
A13
A14
B1
B2
B3
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A3
A4
A5
CN327
+24VC
A1
SFBSL-0A
A2
1) Scanner unit
c. Heater, thermostat
S5
2) Control panel
3) Laser unit
a. e-STUDIO520/600/720
3) Laser unit
b. e-STUDIO850
M1
S4
M23
INV-EXP
THM3
SLG
S6
SW1
THMO1
THM1
LDR1
LDR1
INV-LCD
DH2
M3
THM2
KEY2
THMO3
THMO2
LDR2
CCD
S7
S3
S1
EXP
PLG
S2
M4
KEY1
PLG
DH1
IH-COIL
TCP/LCD
1) Scanner unit
b. LT series
GLV
S9
S5
M1
DSP
S4
M23
INV-EXP
M2
M2
SNS
SNS
S8
THM4
SLG
S6
CCD
S3
EXP
S2
S13
M10
S22
S18
M16
S12
M11
SW2
S23
DH3
SW4
S11
M5
SW3
M13
S17
M14
CLT3
M8
S10
M17
SOL1
M9
CLT2
THM5
M18
S15
M7
CLT1
M6
M12
S16
M24
ERS
M19
S14
M15
MOT2-RV
S21
SOL2
M25
S20
FUS
THMO4
S24
SW5
S19
M32
SW6
S27
M27
S31
SW11
S30
MOT
S32
M30
SW7
M28
HDD
M21
S33
CLT4
SOL7
S34
S72
SOL3
M31
CLT5
M29
S28
IH
S39
S38
S37
S36
S40
S45
MOT2-MT
S44 S43
M26
S48
S49
S50
S51
S52
S42
S46
S26
HVT
SYS
M42
CLT9
CLT10
S41
S47
S25
SW8
M33
SOL8
CLT6
S29
CLT7
CLT8
S35
M20
M41
CLT11
CLT12
M34
S73
M22
LGC
M35
S71
S74
PS
S75
SOL4
M40
SW9
ADF
M37
S53
M36
S54
S57
S64
S56
M38
S55
S58
NF1
NF1
NF1
S61
S60
SOL6
M39
S65
SOL5
S59
RLY
BRK1
S67
BRK2
BRK1
FIL
NF1
NF2
BRK1
BRK1
S62
S66
S69
S63
Motors
Symbol
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
M39
M40
M41
M42
Name
SCAN-MOT
Scan motor
POL-MOT
Polygonal motor
FUS-MOT
Fuser motor
WEB-MOT
Web motor
TNR-MOT
New toner supply motor
TNR-TR-MOT
New toner transport motor
HOP-MOT
Hopper motor
RCY-TNR-MOT
Recycle toner transport motor
USD-TNR-MOT
Used toner transport motor
DEV-MOT
Developer unit motor
DRM-MOT
Drum motor
CH-CLN-MOT
Wire cleaner drive motor
DRM-CLN-MOT
Cleaning brush drive motor
TRB-MOT
Transfer belt motor
TRB-CAM-MOT
Transfer belt cam motor
RGST-MOT
Registration motor
MT-MOT
Transport motor
EXIT-MOT
Exit motor
REV-MOT
Reverse motor
FEED-MOT
Feed motor
CST-TRY-MOT1
Tray-up motor-1
CST-TRY-MOT2
Tray-up motor-2
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model
of e-STUDIO600/720
SLG-FAN-MOT
SLG board cooling fan
REV-FAN-MOT1
Reverse section cooling fan-1
REV-FAN-MOT2
Reverse section cooling fan-2
IH-FAN-MOT
IH board cooling fan
DCT-O-FAN-MOT
Duct out fan
FUS-FAN-MOT
Fuser cooling fan
EXIT-FAN-MOT
Exit section cooling fan
DCT-I-FAN-MOT
Duct in fan
DEV-FAN-MOT
Developer unit fan
LSU-FAN-MOT
Laser unit cooling fan
SYS-FAN-MOT
SYS board cooling fan
PS-FAN-MOT1
Switching regulator cooling fan-1
PS-FAN-MOT2
Switching regulator cooling fan-2
DF-READ-MOT
Read motor
DF-FEED-MOT
Document feed motor
DF-TRY-MOT
Tray lift motor
DF-L-EXIT-MOT
Large original exit motor
DF-S-EXIT-MOT
Small original exit motor
LCF-TRY-MOT
Tandem LCF tray-up motor
* Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments
and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
LCF-ENDF-MOT
Tandem LCF end fence motor
* Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments
and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
Figure
1)-a
1)-b
3)-a
3)-b
Wire harness
location
Symbol
8-B
S1-5
5-E
S6
4)
7-D
S7
4)
7-C
S8
5-B
S9
5)
5-B
S10
6)
5)
6-B
S11
6)
6-B
S12
6)
7-C
S13
7)-a
6-D
S14
7)-a
6-E
S15
7)-a
6-B
S16
7)-a
6-D
S17
7)-a
6-E
S18
7)-a
6-F
S19
8)
6-F
S20
8)
8-B
S21
9)
6-A
S22
9)
7-G
S23
13)
6-H
S24
13)
7-A
S25
13)
7-B
1)-a
1)-b
2-E
S28
9)
7-F
S29
9)
7-F
S30
S26
S27
10)
7-E
10)
7-C
10)
6-D
S31
S32
S33
10)
7-C
S34
11)
6-D
S35
11)
6-D
S36
11)
6-D
S37
15)
5-C
S38
15)
4-F
15)
4-F
17)-c
3-H
17)-c
3-H
17)-c
3-G
17)-c
3-G
17)-c
3-G
14)
8-H
S39
S40
S41
S42
S43
S44
S45
S46
14)
8-G
S47
S48
Name
APS1-3, APS-C, APS-R
Automatic original detection sensor
HOME-SNR
Carriage home position sensor
TEMP/HUMI-SNR
Temperature/humidity sensor
WEB-SNR
Web detection sensor
FUS-TR-SNR
Fuser transport sensor
TNR-EMP-SNR
Toner cartridge empty detection sensor
USD-TNR-FLL-SNR
Toner bag full detection sensor
ATTNR-SNR
Auto-toner sensor
DRUM-SUF-SNR
Drum surface potential sensor
TNR-LVL-SNR
Image quality sensor
TRB-SNR2
Transfer belt release detection sensor
TRB-SNR1
Transfer belt contact detection sensor
MID-TR-SNR
Intermediate transport sensor
RGST-SNR
Registration sensor
HRZ-TR-SNR1
Horizontal transport sensor-1
HRZ-TR-SNR2
Horizontal transport sensor-2
HRZ-TR-SNR3
Horizontal transport sensor-3
EXIT-SNR
Exit sensor
REV-SNR1
Reverse sensor-1
REV-SNR2
Reverse sensor-2
SFB-COV-SNR
Bypass feed unit cover sensor
FEED-COV-SNR
Feed cover sensor
SFB-FEED-SNR
Bypass feed sensor
SFB-SIZE-SNR
Bypass paper size detection sensor
CST1-SNR
1st drawer detection sensor
CST1-BTM-SNR
1st drawer bottom sensor
CST1-EMP-SNR
1st drawer empty sensor
CST1-TRY-SNR
1st drawer tray-up sensor
CST1-TR-SNR
1st drawer transport sensor
CST1-FEED-SNR
1st drawer feed sensor
CST2-SNR
2nd drawer detection sensor
CST2-BTM-SNR
2nd drawer bottom sensor
CST2-EMP-SNR
2nd drawer empty sensor
CST2-TRY-SNR
2nd drawer tray-up sensor
CST2-TR-SNR
2nd drawer transport sensor
CST2-FEED-SNR
2nd drawer feed sensor
CST3-SNR
3rd drawer detection sensor
CST3-BTM-SNR
3rd drawer bottom sensor
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model
of e-STUDIO600/720
CST3-EMP-SNR
3rd drawer / tandem LCF empty sensor
CST3-TRY-SNR
3rd drawer / tandem LCF tray-up sensor
CST3-TR-SNR
3rd drawer / tandem LCF transport sensor
CST3-FEED-SNR
3rd drawer / tandem LCF feed sensor
CST4-SNR
4th drawer detection sensor
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model
of e-STUDIO600/720
CST4-BTM-SNR
4th drawer bottom sensor
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model
of e-STUDIO600/720
Figure
1)-a
1)-b
1)-a
1)-b
Wire harness
location
2-E
Symbol
S49
2-F
2)
5-A
4)
7-C
S50
S51
4)
7-B
5)
5-B
6)
6-F
7)-a
5-A
S52
7)-a
6-B
7)-a
6-C
7)-a
6-F
7)-a
6-F
8)
8-B
8)
6-E
8)
7-E
8)
7-E
8)
7-E
9)
7-F
9)
7-F
9)
7-F
11)
5-A
11)
5-B
12)
8-A
12)
8-B
13)
8-C
13)
7-A
13)
S54
S55
S56
S57
S58
S59
S60
S61
S62
S63
S64
S65
S66
S67
S68
S69
S70
S71
8-C
13)
8-C
13)
8-C
13)
8-C
13)
8-D
13)
S53
7-A
13)
8-D
13)
8-D
S72
S73
S74
S75
13)
13)
8-D
8-D
13)
8-E
13)
7-B
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
13)
13)
8-E
SW6
8-E
SW7
13)
8-E
SW8
13)
8-E
SW9
13)
8-F
13)
7-B
SW10
SW11
Name
Figure
CST4-EMP-SNR
4th drawer empty sensor
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model
of e-STUDIO600/720
Wire harness
location
13)
8-F
13)
8-F
13)
8-F
13)
8-F
Symbol
CLT1
CLT2
CST4-TRY-SNR
4th drawer tray-up sensor
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model
of e-STUDIO600/720
CST4-TR-SNR
4th drawer transport sensor
CLT3
CLT4
CST4-FEED-SNR
4th drawer feed sensor
CLT5
CLT6
DF-TRY-SNR
Original tray sensor
DF-TRY-VR-SNR
Original tray width sensor
CLT7
17)-a
DF-RGST-SNR
Original registration sensor
DF-SIZE-SNR1
Original width detection sensor-1
DF-SIZE-SNR2
Original width detection sensor-2
DF-SIZE-SNR3
Original width detection sensor-3
DF-U-LMT-SNR
Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor
DF-EMP-SNR
Original empty sensor
DF-COV-SNR
Jam access cover sensor
DF-L-LMT-SNR
Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor
DF-LENG-SNR
Original length detection sensor
DF-APS-SNR
APS operation sensor
DF-OPN-SNR
RADF opening/closing sensor
DF-SD-REV-SNR
Small original reverse sensor
DF-SD-EXIT-SNR
Small original exit sensor
DF-LD-EXIT-SNR
Large original exit sensor
DF-READ-SNR
Read sensor
DF-MID-TR-SNR
Original intermediate transport sensor
LCF-BTM-SNR
Tandem LCF bottom sensor
* Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments
and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
LCF-MST-SNR
Standby side mis-stacking sensor
* Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments
and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
LCF-ENDF-HP-SNR
End fence home position sensor
* Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments
and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
3-H
17)-a
3-H
17)-a
3-G
17)-a
3-G
CLT8
CLT9
CLT10
CLT11
17)-a
17)-a
3-G
3-G
3-G
Solenoids
3-G
Symbol
4-F
SOL1
4-F
SOL2
17)-c
2-H
SOL3
17)-c
2-G
SOL4
17)-d
4-G
SOL5
17)-d
4-G
SOL6
17)-d
2-H
17)-d
2-G
17)-d
4-G
14)
8-G
SOL7
SOL8
8-G
8-G
Symbol
SLG
KEY1
KEY2
LCF-EMP-SNR
Standby side empty sensor
* Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments
and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
LCF-ENDF-STP-SNR
End fence stop position sensor
14)
8-G
14)
8-G
PLG
LDR1
FSR-SW
Fuser detection switch
TNR-SW
Toner cartridge detection switch
DEV-SW
Developer unit detection switch
CH-CLN-POS-SW
Wire cleaner position detection switch
EXIT-COV-SW
Exit cover switch
MAIN-SW
Main switch
U-FRNT-COV-SW
Front cover switch
COV-INTLCK-SW
Cover interlock switch
DF-OPN-INTLCK-SW
RADF opening/closing switch
DF-COV-INTLCK-SW
Jam access cover opening/closing switch
TNR-MOT-INTLCK-SW
Toner motor interlock switch
LDR2
4)
AC wire harness
SNS
5)
5-B
FUS
7)-a
6-B
7)-a
6-C
IH
9)
7-F
MOT
Symbol
8)
7-E
EXP
8)
7-E
ERS
8)
7-E
IH-COIL
12)
8-B
DH1
13)
8-C
DH2
13)
8-C
13)
8-D
13)
8-D
Symbol
13)
8-E
THM1
13)
8-E
THM2
13)
8-F
DH3
THM3
THM4
13)
8-F
Figure
Wire harness
location
THM5
THMO1
THMO2
Name
SPRT-FING-SOL
Drum separation finger solenoid
GATE-SOL
Gate solenoid
SFB-SOL
Bypass pickup solenoid
DF-SD-SOL
Small original exit solenoid
DF-LD-SOL
Large original exit solenoid
DENG-SOL
Large original exit roller release solenoid
LCF-PICK-SOL
Tandem LCF pickup solenoid
LCF-ENDF-SOL
Tandem LCF end fence solenoid
7)-a
THMO3
6-C
THMO4
9)
10)
6-B
AC wire harness
MOT2-MT
10)
5-B
MOT2-RV
10)
AC wire harness
SYS
17)-c
2-G
LGC
17)-c
2-G
10)
5-B
Name
PWA-F-CCD
CCD driving PC board (CCD board)
PWA-F-SLG
Scanning section control PC board (SLG board)
PWA-F-DSP
Display PC board (DSP board)
PWA-F-KEY1
Key PC board-1 (KEY1 board)
PWA-F-KEY2
Key PC board-2 (KEY2 board)
PWA-F-PLG
Laser control PC board (PLG board)
PWA-F-LDR1
Laser driving PC board-1 (LDR1 board)
PWA-F-LDR2
Laser driving PC board-2 (LDR2 board)
* Only for e-STUDIO850 models
PWA-F-SNS
H-sync detection PC board (SNS board)
PWA-F-FUS
Fuse PC board (FUS board)
FIL
PWA-F-IH
Heater control PC board (IH board)
PWA-F-MOT
Motor driving PC board (MOT board)
PWA-F-MOT2-MT
Transport motor driving PC board (MOT2-MT board)
PWA-F-MOT2-RV
Reverse motor driving PC board (MOT2-RV board)
PWA-F-SYS
System control PC board (SYS board)
PWA-F-LGC
Logic PC board (LGC board)
PWA-F-FIL
Filter PC board (FIL board)
* Only for NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of
e-STUDIO600/720
PWA-F-ADF
RADF control PC board (ADF board)
Name
S70
LP-EXPO
Exposure lamp
LP-ERS
Discharge LED
Figure
1)-a
1)-b
IH-COIL
IH coil
SCN-DH-L
Scanner damp heater (Left)
SCN-DH-R
Scanner damp heater (Right)
DRM-DH
Drum damp heater
Wire harness
location
2-D
7)-a
6-C
4)
AC wire harness
1)-c
AC wire harness
1)-c
AC wire harness
7)-b
AC wire harness
Figure
Wire harness
location
4)
7-B
4)
7-B
4)
7-B
4)
7-C
7)-a
6-C
4)
AC wire harness
4)
AC wire harness
1)-c
AC wire harness
7)-b
AC wire harness
Figure
Wire harness
location
7-F
Transformer
12)
8-A
17)-c
2-G
17)-c
2-G
17)-c
2-G
Symbol
HVT
Name
PS-HVT
High-voltage transformer
Symbol
13)
8-E
14)
8-H
Figure
1)-a
1)-b
1)-a
1)-b
Wire harness
location
INV-EXP
TCP
INV-LCD
3-E
3-F
GLV
Name
4-A
HDD
2)
4-A
PS
2)
3-A
NF1
INV-EXP
Lamp inverter board
LCD
LCD panel
TCP
Touch panel
INV-LCD
LCD inverter board
MIR-GLV
Galvanic mirror
HDD
Hard disk
PS-ACC
Switching regulator
NS-FIL1
Noise filter-1
5-E
4-E
6-G
Figure
Wire harness
location
1)-a
1)-b
2-D
2)
3-B
2)
3-B
2)
3-A
3)-b
5-G
2)
3)-a
3)-b
3)-a
3)-b
15)
Others
NF2
NS-FIL2
Noise filter-2
15)
4-C
15)
5-G
AC wire harness
16)-a
16)-b
16)-c
16)-d
AC wire harness
16)-b
AC wire harness
3)-b
4-F
BRK1
3)-a
3)-b
5-E
5-F
7)-b
AC wire harness
10)
7-D
15)
6-E
11)
8-B
9)
7-G
BRK2
BREAKER1
Breaker-1
BREAKER2
Breaker-2
RLY
RELEY
Relay
* Only forJPD model of e-STUDIO850
15)
3-B
15)
6-A
16)-c
AC wire harness
17)-c
3-F
16)-a
16)-b
16)-c
16)-d
AC wire harness
16)-b
AC wire harness
16)-b
AC wire harness
ADF
05/11
Wire harness
location
LCD
DSP
14)
Figure
PC boards
CCD
14)
HRZ-DR-CLT3
Horizontal transport section driving clutch-3
SFB-FEED-CLT
Bypass feed clutch
CST1-TR-CLT
1st drawer transport clutch
CST1-FEED-CLT
1st drawer feed clutch
CST2-TR-CLT
2nd drawer transport clutch
CST2-FEED-CLT
2nd drawer feed clutch
CST3-TR-CLT
3rd drawer / tandem LCF transport clutch
CST3-FEED-CLT
3rd drawer / tandem LCF feed clutch
CST4-TR-CLT
4th drawer transport clutch
CST4-FEED-CLT
4th drawer feed clutch
17)-b
17)-b
HRZ-DR-CLT1
Horizontal transport section driving clutch-1
HRZ-DR-CLT2
Horizontal transport section driving clutch-2
17)-b
17)-b
Name
3-G
CLT12
17)-b
S68